From a74c16d06af04f22a53debd1a1ef211416c3a6f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Sun, 13 May 2012 22:58:34 +0000 Subject: latex2e-help-texinfo (11may12) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@26333 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog | 15 + .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile | 2 +- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS | 6 + .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk | 5079 ++++++----- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html | 1143 +-- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf | Bin 652706 -> 656486 bytes .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi | 230 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt | 3528 ++++---- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml | 9440 +++++++++----------- Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info | 5090 ++++++----- 10 files changed, 12557 insertions(+), 11976 deletions(-) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog index cf991b1b771..9b30c2ca513 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,18 @@ +2012-05-10 Karl Berry + + * May 2012 release for TeX Live 2012. + + * latex2e.texi (About this document): mention a few other docs. + (eqnarray): don't use it; reference Madsen article + (figure): ! float specifier, \*number parameters. + (Math accents): mention \mathring. + +2012-04-25 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: Index \extracolsep, template list at + http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates, other template updates, + etc. + 2011-05-12 Karl Berry * May 2011 release for TeX Live 2011. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile index 4b5b0d83d22..bc781e222dd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ mostlyclean clean: realclean distclean: clean rm -f $(all) -dist: +dist: all @rm -f spanish; ln -s . spanish tar cvzf latex2e-help-texinfo.tgz \ ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README ltx-help.el \ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS index 6ed536f08e7..6093263061b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS @@ -3,6 +3,12 @@ Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen. Spanish translation from Nacho Pacheco. +---------------------------------------------------------------- +Changes in May 2012 release: +Template updates and references. +More on floats. +Mention a few other documents. + ---------------------------------------------------------------- Changes in May 2011 release: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk index 7dcf8aa18db..6d42c9c12d1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk @@ -3,49 +3,46 @@ ]> - -@LaTeX{}2e reference manual (May 2011) + +&latex;2e reference manual (May 2012) - + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - -This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of May 2011. +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a +document preparation system, version of May 2012. -This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS -Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by -George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The -&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The +This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in +the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by +George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The +&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the -&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway -and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway +and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was directly copied). -Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Karl Berry. +Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Karl Berry. -Copyright © 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. +Copyright © 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. -Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. +Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice @@ -59,21 +56,50 @@ notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. - - + + -* Menu: -* LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual. +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a +document preparation system, version of May 2012. + +This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in +the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by +George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The +&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The +&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl +Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges +using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the +&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway +and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as +&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was +directly copied). + +Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Karl Berry. +Copyright © 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. +Copyright © 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + - + &latex;2e This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version as of May 2011. It is +document preparation system, version as of May 2012. It is intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of &latex; for many years. @@ -81,16 +107,22 @@ intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of -Overview of &latex; +About this document -Knuth, Donald E.Lamport, Leslie&latex; Project teamThe &latex; document preparation system is implemented as a macro -package for Donald E. Knuth's &tex; typesetting program. +Knuth, Donald E. +Lamport, Leslie +&latex; Project team +The &latex; document preparation system is implemented as a macro +package for Donald E. Knuth’s &tex; typesetting program. &latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by the &latex; project is available from their web site. -bug reportingreporting bugslatexrefman-discuss@gna.org email addressThe present document is completely unofficial and has not been +bug reporting +reporting bugs +latexrefman-discuss@gna.org email address +The present document is completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org. @@ -100,6 +132,22 @@ comments to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org. current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure. +Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about +&latex;. Here are a few: + + +Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation. + + +Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. + + +The guide for document authors maintained as part of &latex;; there +are several others. + + +Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;. + @@ -107,72 +155,88 @@ infrastructure. What is &latex;? -overview of &latex;basics of &latex;&latex; overview&latex; typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the -&latex; “macro package” for &tex;. That is, it processes an input +overview of &latex; +basics of &latex; +&latex; overview +&latex; typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the +&latex; “macro package” for &tex;. That is, it processes an input file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that describe how the text should be formatted. &latex; files are plain text that can be written in any reasonable editor. It produces at least three files as output: - -The main output file, which is one of: +The main output file, which is one of: -.dvi -.dvi filelatex commandIf invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) +.dvi +.dvi file +latex command +If invoked as latex, a “Device Independent” (.dvi) file is produced. This contains commands that can be translated into commands for virtually any output device. You can view such .dvi output of &latex; by using a program such as xdvi (display directly), dvips (convert to PostScript), or dvipdfmx (convert to PDF). -.pdf -.pdf filepdf&tex;pdflatex commandIf invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” +.pdf +.pdf file +pdf&tex; +pdflatex command +If invoked as pdflatex, a “Portable Document Format” (.pdf) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the same document. -lualatex commandLua&tex;If invoked as lualatex, a .pdf file is created using +lualatex command +Lua&tex; +If invoked as lualatex, a .pdf file is created using the Lua&tex; engine (http://luatex.org). -xelatex commandXe&tex;If invoked as xelatex, a .pdf file is created using +xelatex command +Xe&tex; +If invoked as xelatex, a .pdf file is created using the Xe&tex; engine (http://tug.org/xetex). - Many other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) exist, which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. - - -transcript filelog file.log fileThe “transcript” or .log file that contains summary +transcript file +log file +.log file +The “transcript” or .log file that contains summary information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. - - -auxiliary file.aux fileAn “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, +auxiliary file +.aux file +An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself, for things such as cross-references. - - -An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won't try to + +An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won’t try to list them all. Xxx components? -\ character starting commands[...] for optional arguments{...} for required argumentsIn the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \, -followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single +\ character starting commands +[...] for optional arguments +{...} for required arguments +In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \, +followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are required. -case sensitivity of &latex;&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless +case sensitivity of &latex; +&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. - + Starting & ending -starting & endingending & starting +starting & ending +ending & starting + A minimal input file looks like the following: \documentclass{class} @@ -181,10 +245,11 @@ explicitly directed to do otherwise. \end{document} where the class is a valid document class for &latex;. -See , for details of the various document classes +See Document classes, for details of the various document classes available locally. -preamble, definedYou may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass +preamble, defined +You may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the preamble). @@ -193,7 +258,10 @@ and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the Document classes -document classesclasses of documents\documentclass +document classes +classes of documents +\documentclass + The class of a given document is defined with the command: \documentclass[options]{class} @@ -201,8 +269,13 @@ and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the The \documentclass command must be the first command in a &latex; source file. -article classreport classbook classletter classslides classBuilt-in &latex; document class names are (many other document -classes are available as add-ons; see ): +article class +report class +book class +letter class +slides class +Built-in &latex; document class names are (many other document +classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): article report book letter slides @@ -215,7 +288,11 @@ classes are available as add-ons; see ): Document class options -document class optionsoptions, document classclass optionsglobal options +document class options +options, document class +class options +global options + You can specify so-called global options or class options to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate @@ -225,69 +302,98 @@ them with a comma: Here is the list of the standard class options. -10pt option11pt option12pt optionAll of the standard classes except slides accept the following +10pt option +11pt option +12pt option +All of the standard classes except slides accept the following options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt): 10pt 11pt 12pt -a4paper optiona5paper optionb5paper optionexecutivepaper optionlegalpaper optionletterpaper optionAll of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper +a4paper option +a5paper option +b5paper option +executivepaper option +legalpaper option +letterpaper option +All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default is letterpaper): a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper -draft optionfinal optionfleqn optionlandscape optionleqno optionopenbib optiontitlepage optionnotitlepage optionMiscellaneous other options: - -draft, final -black boxes, omittingmark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. -fleqn -Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. -landscape -Selects landscape format; default is portrait. -leqno -Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. -openbib -Use “open” bibliography format. -titlepage, notitlepage -Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. +draft option +final option +fleqn option +landscape option +leqno option +openbib option +titlepage option +notitlepage option +Miscellaneous other options: + +draft, final +black boxes, omitting +mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final. +fleqn +Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. +landscape +Selects landscape format; default is portrait. +leqno +Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. +openbib +Use “open” bibliography format. +titlepage, notitlepage +Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. - These options are not available with the slides class: -onecolumn optiontwocolumn optiononeside optiontwoside optionopenright optionopenany optiononecolumn -twocolumn -Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. - -oneside -twoside -\evensidemargin\oddsidemarginSelects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except +onecolumn option +twocolumn option +oneside option +twoside option +openright option +openany option +onecolumn +twocolumn +Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn. + +oneside +twoside +\evensidemargin +\oddsidemargin +Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except for the book class. The \evensidemargin (\oddsidemargin parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the -page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper +page and the text’s left margin. The defaults vary with the paper size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, with \evensidemargin the remainder. -openright -openany -Determines if a chapter should start on a +openright +openany +Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is openright for book. - The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note. -packages, loadingloading additional packages\usepackageAdditional packages are loaded like this: +packages, loading +loading additional packages +\usepackage +Additional packages are loaded like this: \usepackage[options]{pkg} To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. -global optionsoptions, globalAny options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown +global options +options, global +Any options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with \usepackage. @@ -297,7 +403,9 @@ by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with Typefaces -typefacesfonts +typefaces +fonts + Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. @@ -306,69 +414,102 @@ and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. Font styles -font stylestypeface stylesstyles of text +font styles +typeface styles +styles of text + The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. -These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. +This first group of commands is typically used like +\textit{italic text}. The corresponding command in +parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no arguments. The +scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command +or the end of the current group. The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. -You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, -\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. - -\textrm (\rmfamily) -\textrm\rmfamilyRoman. - -\textit (\itshape) -\textit\itshapeItalics. - -\emph -\emphemphasisEmphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). - -\textmd (\mdseries) -\textmd\mdseriesMedium weight (default). - -\textbf (\bfseries) -\textbf\bfseriesBoldface. -\textup (\upshape) -\textup\upshapeUpright (default). The opposite of slanted. -\textsl (\slshape) -\textsl\slshapeSlanted. -\textsf (\sffamily) -\textsf\sffamilySans serif. -\textsc (\scshape) -\textsc\scshapeSmall caps. -\texttt (\ttfamily) -\texttt\ttfamilyTypewriter. -\textnormal (\normalfont) -\textnormal\normalfontMain document font. -\mathrm -\mathrmRoman, for use in math mode. -\mathbf -\mathbfBoldface, for use in math mode. -\mathsf -\mathsfSans serif, for use in math mode. -\mathtt -\mathttTypewriter, for use in math mode. - -\mathit -(\mit) -Italics, for use in math mode. - -\mathnormal -\mathnormalFor use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. -\mathcal -\mathcal`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. +You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for +instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. + +These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the +\textrm (\rmfamily) +\textrm +\rmfamily +Roman. + +\textit (\itshape) +\textit +\itshape +Italics. + +\emph +\emph +emphasis +Emphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). + +\textmd (\mdseries) +\textmd +\mdseries +Medium weight (default). + +\textbf (\bfseries) +\textbf +\bfseries +Boldface. +\textup (\upshape) +\textup +\upshape +Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. +\textsl (\slshape) +\textsl +\slshape +Slanted. +\textsf (\sffamily) +\textsf +\sffamily +Sans serif. +\textsc (\scshape) +\textsc +\scshape +Small caps. +\texttt (\ttfamily) +\texttt +\ttfamily +Typewriter. +\textnormal (\normalfont) +\textnormal +\normalfont +Main document font. +\mathrm +\mathrm +Roman, for use in math mode. +\mathbf +\mathbf +Boldface, for use in math mode. +\mathsf +\mathsf +Sans serif, for use in math mode. +\mathtt +\mathtt +Typewriter, for use in math mode. + +\mathit +(\mit) +Italics, for use in math mode. + +\mathnormal +\mathnormal +For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. +\mathcal +\mathcal +‘Calligraphic’ letters, for use in math mode. - In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} -\mathversioncan be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in +\mathversion +can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. &latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to @@ -377,183 +518,214 @@ differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd\cmd{...}. These are two very different things. -\bf -bold fontSwitch to bold face. +\bf\bf +bold font +Switch to bold face. -\cal -script letters for mathcalligraphic letters for mathSwitch to calligraphic letters for math. +\cal\cal +script letters for math +calligraphic letters for math +Switch to calligraphic letters for math. -\em -emphasisEmphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). +\em\em +emphasis +Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). -\it -italic fontItalics. +\it\it +italic font +Italics. -\rm -roman fontRoman. +\rm\rm +roman font +Roman. -\sc -small caps fontSmall caps. +\sc\sc +small caps font +Small caps. -\sf -sans serif fontSans serif. +\sf\sf +sans serif font +Sans serif. -\sl -slanted fontoblique fontSlanted (oblique). +\sl\sl +slanted font +oblique font +Slanted (oblique). -\tt -typewriter fontmonospace fontfixed-width fontTypewriter (monospace, fixed-width). +\tt\tt +typewriter font +monospace font +fixed-width font +Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). - Font sizes -font sizestypeface sizessizes of text +font sizes +typeface sizes +sizes of text + The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font -size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and -‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see ). - -\tiny\scriptsize\footnotesize\small\normalsize\large\Large\LARGE\huge\Huge - Command 10pt 11pt 12pt - \tiny - 5 6 6 - \scriptsize - 7 8 8 - \footnotesize - 8 9 10 - \small - 9 10 10.95 - \normalsize (default) - 10 10.95 12 - \large - 12 12 14.4 - \Large - 14.4 14.4 17.28 - \LARGE - 17.28 17.28 20.74 - \huge - 20.74 20.74 24.88 - \Huge - 24.88 24.88 24.88 - -The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of +size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and +‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class +options). + +\tiny +\scriptsize +\footnotesize +\small +\normalsize +\large +\Large +\LARGE +\huge +\Huge + +Command 10pt 11pt 12pt +\tiny +5 6 6 +\scriptsize +7 8 8 +\footnotesize +8 9 10 +\small +9 10 10.95 +\normalsize (default) +10 10.95 12 +\large +12 12 14.4 +\Large +14.4 14.4 17.28 +\LARGE +17.28 17.28 20.74 +\huge +20.74 20.74 24.88 +\Huge +24.88 24.88 24.88 + +The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. - + Low-level font commands -low-level font commandsfont commands, low-level +low-level font commands +font commands, low-level + These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available ones. -\fontencoding{enc} -\fontencodingSelect font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. +\fontencoding{enc} +\fontencoding +Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. -\fontfamily{family} -\fontfamilySelect font family. Valid families include: +\fontfamily{family} +\fontfamily +Select font family. Valid families include: - cmr for Computer Modern Roman - - cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif - - cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter - - +cmr for Computer Modern Roman +cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif +cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter + and numerous others. -\fontseries{series} -\fontseriesSelect font series. Valid series include: - - m Medium (normal) - - b Bold - - c Condensed - - bc Bold condensed - - bx Bold extended - - +\fontseries{series} +\fontseries +Select font series. Valid series include: + +m Medium (normal) +b Bold +c Condensed +bc Bold condensed +bx Bold extended + and various other combinations. -\fontshape{shape} -\fontshapeSelect font shape. Valid shapes are: - - n Upright (normal) - - it Italic - - sl Slanted (oblique) - - sc Small caps - - ui Upright italics - - ol Outline - - +\fontshape{shape} +\fontshape +Select font shape. Valid shapes are: + +n Upright (normal) +it Italic +sl Slanted (oblique) +sc Small caps +ui Upright italics +ol Outline + The two last shapes are not available for most font families. -\fontsize{size}{skip} -\fontsize\baselineskipSet font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and +\fontsize{size}{skip} +\fontsize +\baselineskip +Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. -\baselinestretchsetspace packagedouble spacingThe line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the +\baselinestretch +setspace package +double spacing +The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the -default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, +default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the setspace package; see http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. -\linespread\linespread{factor} -Equivalent to +\linespread +\linespread{factor} +Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as described just above. -\selectfontThe changes made by calling the font commands described above do +\selectfont +The changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called. -\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} -\usefontThe same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, +\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} +\usefont +The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. - Layout layout commands + Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - + <literal>\onecolumn</literal> -\onecolumnone-column output +\onecolumn +one-column output + The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default. - + <literal>\twocolumn</literal> -\twocolumnmulticolumn texttwo-column output +\twocolumn +multicolumn text +two-column output + Synopsis: \twocolumn[text1col] @@ -565,58 +737,59 @@ starts. These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: -\columnsep -The distance between columns (35pt by default). +\columnsep\columnsep +The distance between columns (35pt by default). -\columnseprule -The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. +\columnseprule\columnseprule +The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. -\columnwidth -The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in +\columnwidth\columnwidth +The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in single-column text. - These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: -\dbltopfraction -Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied -by floats. Default ‘.7’, can be usefully redefined to (say) -‘.9’ to avoid going to float pages so soon. +\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied +by floats. Default ‘.7’, can be usefully redefined to (say) +‘.9’ to avoid going to float pages so soon. -\dblfloatpagefraction -The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, -for a two-column float page. Default ‘.5’. +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, +for a two-column float page. Default ‘.5’. -\dblfloatsep -Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float -page. Default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and -‘11pt’ documents, ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float +page. Default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and +‘11pt’ documents, ‘14pt plus2pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. -\dbltextfloatsep -Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page -and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page +and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. - - + <literal>\flushbottom</literal> \flushbottom + The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected -(see ). +(see Document class options). - + <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> -\raggedbottomstretch, omitting vertical +\raggedbottom +stretch, omitting vertical + The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched. @@ -626,96 +799,102 @@ stretched. Page layout parameters -page layout parametersparameters, page layoutlayout, page parameters forheader, parameters forfooter, parameters forrunning header and footer -\headheight -Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is -‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the +page layout parameters +parameters, page layout +layout, page parameters for +header, parameters for +footer, parameters for +running header and footer + +\headheight\headheight +Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is +‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\headsep -Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of -the main text. Default is ‘25pt’, except in the book +\headsep\headsep +Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +the main text. Default is ‘25pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\footskip -Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of -the page footer. Default is ‘30pt’, except in the book +\footskip\footskip +Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +the page footer. Default is ‘30pt’, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\linewidth -Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list -(see ). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth by +\linewidth\linewidth +Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list +(see list). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth by the sum of \leftmargin and \rightmargin -(see ). The default varies with the font size, paper +(see itemize). The default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in -‘10pt’, it's set to ‘345pt’; in two-column mode, that -becomes ‘229.5pt’. +‘10pt’, it’s set to ‘345pt’; in two-column mode, that +becomes ‘229.5pt’. -\textheight -The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with +\textheight\textheight +The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an article or -report document in ‘10pt’, it's set to -‘43\baselineskip’; for book, it's ‘41\baselineskip’. -For ‘11pt’, it's ‘38\baselineskip’ and for ‘12pt’, -‘36\baselineskip’. - -\textwidth -The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies -as usual. For an article or report document, it's -‘345pt’ at ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ at ‘11pt’, and -‘390pt’ at ‘12pt’. For a book document, it's -‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or -‘12pt’. +report document in ‘10pt’, it’s set to +‘43\baselineskip’; for book, it’s ‘41\baselineskip’. +For ‘11pt’, it’s ‘38\baselineskip’ and for ‘12pt’, +‘36\baselineskip’. + +\textwidth\textwidth +The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies +as usual. For an article or report document, it’s +‘345pt’ at ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ at ‘11pt’, and +‘390pt’ at ‘12pt’. For a book document, it’s +‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or +‘12pt’. In multi-column output, \textwidth remains the width of the entire page body, while \columnwidth is the width of one column -(see ). +(see \twocolumn). -In lists (see ), \textwidth remains the width of the +In lists (see list), \textwidth remains the width of the entire page body (and \columnwidth the width of the entire column), while \linewidth may decrease for nested lists. -Inside a minipage (see ) or \parbox -(see ), all the width-related parameters are set to the +Inside a minipage (see minipage) or \parbox +(see \parbox), all the width-related parameters are set to the specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox. -\hsizeFor completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used +\hsize +For completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal &latex; documents. -\topmargin -Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the +\topmargin\topmargin +Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed -based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − -\headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and +based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − +\headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and then divided by two. -\topskip -Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +\topskip\topskip +Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the -same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. +same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10pt’. - Sectioning sectioning + Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: -\part -\chapter -(report and book class only) -\section -\subsection -\subsubsection -\paragraph -\subparagraph - - +\part\part +\chapter\chapter +(report and book class only) +\section\section +\subsection\subsection +\subsubsection\subsubsection +\paragraph\paragraph +\subparagraph\subparagraph + All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., \chapter[toctitle]{title} @@ -723,55 +902,58 @@ same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘
  • In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the section title can appear in two other places: - -The table of contents. - - -The running head at the top of the page. - - +The table of contents. +The running head at the top of the page. + You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. -*-form of sectioning commandsAlso, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print +*-form of sectioning commands +Also, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. For instance: \section*{Preamble} -\appendixappendix, creatingThe \appendix command changes the way following sectional units +\appendix +appendix, creating +The \appendix command changes the way following sectional units are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is something like \chapter{A Chapter} -… +… \appendix \chapter{The First Appendix} -secnumdepth countersection numbers, printingThe secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. +secnumdepth counter +section numbers, printing +The secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} -suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where -chapter is level zero. (See .) +suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where +chapter is level zero. (See \setcounter.) Cross references cross references + One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer -the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” +the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” - + <literal>\label</literal> \label + Synopsis: \label{key} @@ -787,26 +969,28 @@ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: -ch -for chapters -sec -for lower-level sectioning commands -fig -for figures -tab -for tables -eq -for equations +ch +for chapters +sec +for lower-level sectioning commands +fig +for figures +tab +for tables +eq +for equations - Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or fig.snark. - + <literal>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> -\pagerefcross referencing with page numberpage number, cross referencing +\pageref +cross referencing with page number +page number, cross referencing + Synopsis: \pageref{key} @@ -817,17 +1001,23 @@ the place in the text where the corresponding - + <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> -\refcross referencing, symbolicsection number, cross referencingequation number, cross referencingfigure number, cross referencingfootnote number, cross referencing +\ref +cross referencing, symbolic +section number, cross referencing +equation number, cross referencing +figure number, cross referencing +footnote number, cross referencing + Synopsis: \ref{key} The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding -\label command (see ). It does not produce any text, -such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. +equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding +\label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, +such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself. @@ -835,7 +1025,10 @@ such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. Environments environments -\begin\end + +\begin +\end + &latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: @@ -845,10 +1038,12 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - + <literal>abstract</literal> -abstract environmentabstracts +abstract environment +abstracts + Synopsis: \begin{abstract} ... @@ -858,9 +1053,11 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - + <literal>array</literal> -array environmentarrays, math +array environment +arrays, math + Synopsis: \begin{array}{template} @@ -869,28 +1066,29 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: \end{array} Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally -within an equation environment (see ). It has a +within an equation environment (see equation). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: -c -centered -l -flush left -r -flush right +c +centered +l +flush left +r +flush right - -\\ (for array)Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include +\\ (for array) +Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with \\. -@{...}In the template, the construct @{text} puts text +@{...} +In the template, the construct @{text} puts text between columns in each row. -Here's an example: +Here’s an example: \begin{equation} \begin{array}{lrc} @@ -899,8 +1097,9 @@ between columns in each row. \end{array} \end{equation} -\arraycolsepThe \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space -separating columns; the default is ‘5pt’. See , for other +\arraycolsep +The \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space +separating columns; the default is ‘5pt’. See tabular, for other parameters which affect formatting in array environments, namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. @@ -908,10 +1107,12 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. - + <literal>center</literal> -center environmentcentering text, environment for +center environment +centering text, environment for + Synopsis: \begin{center} @@ -919,17 +1120,20 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. line2 \\ \end{center} -\\ (for center)The center environment allows you to create a paragraph +\\ (for center) +The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the string \\. - + <literal>\centering</literal> -\centeringcentering text, declaration for +\centering +centering text, declaration for + The \centering declaration corresponds to the center environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Thus, the text of a figure or @@ -938,11 +1142,11 @@ command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of +paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command (of an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. -Here's an example: +Here’s an example: \begin{quote} \centering @@ -953,10 +1157,13 @@ second line \\ - + <literal>description</literal> -description environmentlabelled lists, creatingdescription lists, creating +description environment +labelled lists, creating +description lists, creating + Synopsis: \begin{description} @@ -965,25 +1172,29 @@ second line \\ ... \end{description} -\itemThe description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each +\item +The description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may contain multiple paragraphs. -bold typewriter, avoidingtypewriter labels in listsAnother variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if -you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you'll get +bold typewriter, avoiding +typewriter labels in lists +Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you’ll get bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use \tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt plain typewriter}]. -For details about list spacing, see . +For details about list spacing, see itemize. - + <literal>displaymath</literal> -displaymath environment +displaymath environment + Synopsis: \begin{displaymath} @@ -997,26 +1208,29 @@ plain typewriter}]. The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. The global fleqn option makes equations flush left; see -. +Document class options. No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an -equation number, use the equation environment (see ). +equation number, use the equation environment (see equation). - + <literal>document</literal> -document environment +document environment + The document environment encloses the body of a document. -It is required in every &latex; document. See . +It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting & ending. - + <literal>enumerate</literal> -enumerate environmentlists of items, numbered +enumerate environment +lists of items, numbered + Synopsis: \begin{enumerate} @@ -1028,72 +1242,102 @@ It is required in every &latex; document. See ) and description -(see ). +itemize (see itemize) and description +(see description). -\itemEach item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. +\item +Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: - 1., 2., … - - (a), (b), … - - i., ii., … - - A., B., … - - -\enumi\enumii\enumiii\enumivThe enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi -through \enumiv counters (see ). If the optional +1., 2., … +(a), (b), … +i., ii., … +A., B., … + +\enumi +\enumii +\enumiii +\enumiv +The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi +through \enumiv counters (see Counters). If the optional argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. -\labelenumi\labelenumii\labelenumiii\labelenumivThe enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi +\labelenumi +\labelenumii +\labelenumiii +\labelenumiv +The enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can -use \renewcommand to change the labels (see ). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase +use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & +\renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters: -\Alph example\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} +\Alph example +\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} - + <literal>eqnarray</literal> -eqnarray environmentequations, aligningaligning Equations +eqnarray environment +equations, aligning +aligning equations + +align environment, from amsmath +amsmath package, replacing eqnarray +Madsen, Lars +First, a caveat: the eqnarray environment has some infelicities +which cannot be overcome; the article “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars +Madsen describes them in detail +(http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). The bottom +line is that it is better to use the align environment (and +others) from the amsmath package. + +Nevertheless, here is a description of eqnarray: + \begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*) formula1 \\ formula2 \\ ... \end{eqnarray} -\\ (for eqnarray)The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of +\\ (for eqnarray) +The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. -\\* (for eqnarray)\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal +\\* (for eqnarray) +\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. -\nonumberequation numbers, omittingAn equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +\nonumber +equation numbers, omitting +An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a \nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as eqnarray. -\lefteqnThe command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across +\lefteqn +The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. - + <literal>equation</literal> -equation environmentequations, environment forformulas, environment for +equation environment +equations, environment for +formulas, environment for + Synopsis: \begin{equation} @@ -1101,14 +1345,17 @@ zero width. \end{equation} The equation environment starts a displaymath -environment (see ), e.g., centering the math text +environment (see displaymath), e.g., centering the math text on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. - + <literal>figure</literal> -figureinserting figuresfigures, inserting +figure +inserting figures +figures, inserting + \begin{figure[*]}[placement] figbody \label{label} @@ -1116,149 +1363,204 @@ on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. \end{figure} Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. +instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. Figures will not be split between two pages. When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns). +placement of floats +specifier, float placement The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your figure. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float: -t -(Top)—at the top of a text page. +t +(Top)—at the top of a text page. -b -(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not +b +(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. -h -float package(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment -appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is -automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, -use the float and use its H placement letter. (That -package also provides other options.) - -p -(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page +h +float package +(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment +appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; t is +automatically added. + +here, putting floats +float package +To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, you can +\usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it +defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere. + +p +(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. +! +Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, &latex; +ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear +and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page. +The ! specifier does not mean “put the float here”; +see above. + - The standard report and article classes use the default placement tbp. -The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc. -you wish. +The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, +etc. you wish. -\captionThe \caption command specifies caption text for the +\caption +The \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text -(see ). +(see Tables of contents). - -\bottomfractionThe maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at -the bottom; default ‘.3’. +Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and +non-float text: -\floatpagefraction -The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; -default ‘.5’. +\bottomfraction +The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +the bottom; default ‘.3’. -\floatsep -Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default -‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. +\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +default ‘.5’. -\intextsep -Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default -‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and ‘11pt’ styles, -‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +\textfraction\textfraction +Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a +different page. The default is ‘.2’. -\textfloatsep -Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; -default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. +\topfraction\topfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default ‘.7’. + +Parameters relating to vertical space around floats: -\textfraction -Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too -much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a -different page. The default is ‘.2’. +\floatsep\floatsep +Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. -\topfraction -Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before -floats; default is ‘.7’. +\intextsep\intextsep +Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for ‘10pt’ and ‘11pt’ styles, +‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for ‘12pt’. + +\textfloatsep\textfloatsep +Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. + +Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page: + +\bottomnumber\bottomnumber +Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; +default 1. + +\topnumber\topnumber +Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; +default 2. + +\totalnumber\totalnumber +Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. + +The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats: +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats. - - - + <literal>flushleft</literal> -flushleft environmentleft-justifying text, environment forragged right text, environment for +flushleft environment +left-justifying text, environment for +ragged right text, environment for + \begin{flushleft} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{flushleft} -\\ for flushleftThe flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph +\\ for flushleft +The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - + <literal>\raggedright</literal> -\raggedrightragged right textleft-justifying textjustification, ragged right +\raggedright +ragged right text +left-justifying text +justification, ragged right + The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; -formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. - + <literal>flushright</literal> -flushright environmentragged left text, environment forright-justifying text, environment for +flushright environment +ragged left text, environment for +right-justifying text, environment for + \begin{flushright} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{flushright} -\\ (for flushright)The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph +\\ (for flushright) +The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - + <literal>\raggedleft</literal> -\raggedleftragged left textjustification, ragged leftright-justifying text +\raggedleft +ragged left text +justification, ragged left +right-justifying text + The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; -formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. - + <literal>itemize</literal> -itemize environment\itemlists of itemsunordered listsbulleted lists +itemize environment +\item +lists of items +unordered lists +bulleted lists + Synopsis: \begin{itemize} @@ -1267,40 +1569,47 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. ... \end{itemize} -The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” +The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making -environments, such as enumerate (see ). +environments, such as enumerate (see enumerate). Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. By default, the marks at each level look like this: - • (bullet) - - -- (bold en-dash) - - * (asterisk) - - . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) - - -\labelitemi\labelitemii\labelitemiii\labelitemivThe itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +• (bullet) +-- (bold en-dash) +* (asterisk) +. (centered dot, rendered here as a period) + +\labelitemi +\labelitemii +\labelitemiii +\labelitemiv +The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have the first level use diamonds: \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} -\leftmargin\leftmargini\leftmarginii\leftmarginiii\leftmarginiv\leftmarginv\leftmarginviThe \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define +\leftmargin +\leftmargini +\leftmarginii +\leftmarginiii +\leftmarginiv +\leftmarginv +\leftmarginvi +The \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of nesting is entered. -The defaults vary from ‘.5em’ (highest levels of nesting) to -‘2.5em’ (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. +The defaults vary from ‘.5em’ (highest levels of nesting) to +‘2.5em’ (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em @@ -1308,59 +1617,58 @@ This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: Some parameters that affect list formatting: -\itemindent -Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. +\itemindent\itemindent +Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. -\labelsep -Space between the label and text of an item; default ‘.5em’. +\labelsep\labelsep +Space between the label and text of an item; default ‘.5em’. -\labelwidth -Width of the label; default ‘2em’, or ‘1.5em’ in two-column mode. +\labelwidth\labelwidth +Width of the label; default ‘2em’, or ‘1.5em’ in two-column mode. -\listparindent -Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a -list item; default ‘0pt’. +\listparindent\listparindent +Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a +list item; default ‘0pt’. -\rightmargin -Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the -enclosing environment; default ‘0pt’, except in the quote, +\rightmargin\rightmargin +Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the +enclosing environment; default ‘0pt’, except in the quote, quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal to \leftmargin. - Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather loose, by default). -\itemsep -Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt +\itemsep\itemsep +Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. -\parsep -Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults +\parsep\parsep +Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults are the same as \itemsep. -\topsep -Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. +\topsep\topsep +Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for 10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced for nested lists. -\partopsep -Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a +\partopsep\partopsep +Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. - -\parskip exampleEspecially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide +\parskip example +Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, -see ): +see \parskip): \newenvironment{itemize*}% {\begin{itemize}% @@ -1371,16 +1679,19 @@ see ): - + <literal>letter</literal> environment: writing letters letter -This environment is used for creating letters. See . + +This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. - + <literal>list</literal> -listlists of items, generic +list +lists of items, generic + The list environment is a generic environment which is used for defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in macros. @@ -1401,14 +1712,16 @@ spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by -\linewidth (see ). +\linewidth (see Page layout parameters). - + <literal>math</literal> -math environmentin-line formulas +math environment +in-line formulas + Synopsis: \begin{math} @@ -1417,55 +1730,66 @@ empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. The math environment inserts the given math within the running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. -See . +See Math formulas. - + <literal>minipage</literal> -minipage environmentminipage, creating a +minipage environment +minipage, creating a + \begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} text \end{minipage} The minipage environment typesets its body text in a block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the -\parbox command (see ), but unlike \parbox, +\parbox command (see \parbox), but unlike \parbox, other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. -The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see ). +The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). -indentation of paragraphs, in minipageparagraph indentation, in minipage\parindentBy default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage +indentation of paragraphs, in minipage +paragraph indentation, in minipage +\parindent +By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. -footnotes in figuresfigures, footnotes inFootnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is +footnotes in figures +figures, footnotes in +Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary -footnote counter (see ). +footnote counter (see Counters). -However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using +However, don’t put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. - + <literal>picture</literal> -picturecreating picturespictures, creating +picture +creating pictures +pictures, creating + \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) -… picture commands … +… picture commands … \end{picture} -\unitlengthThe picture environment allows you to create just about any +\unitlength +The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal -point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or +point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 @@ -1483,7 +1807,7 @@ the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. +argument’s x- and y-coordinates. The picture environment also has an optional position argument, following the size argument, that can change the @@ -1503,10 +1827,10 @@ origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. -The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the +The environment’s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; &latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even -off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by &latex; in determining +off the page. The picture’s nominal size is used by &latex; in determining how much room to leave for it. Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put @@ -1515,11 +1839,12 @@ command. The command \put (11.3,-.3){...} puts the object specified by ... in the -picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). +picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. -lR boxThe \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything -that can go in an \mbox (see ) in the text argument of +lR box +The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything +that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox) in the text argument of the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. @@ -1527,9 +1852,10 @@ be the lower left corner of the box. - + <literal>\circle</literal> \circle + \circle[*]{diameter} The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close @@ -1540,9 +1866,10 @@ draws a solid circle. - + <literal>\makebox</literal> \makebox (picture) + \makebox(width,height)[position]{...} The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to @@ -1552,27 +1879,27 @@ the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: -t -Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. +t +Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. -b -Moves the item to the bottom. +b +Moves the item to the bottom. -l -Moves the item to the left. +l +Moves the item to the left. -r -Moves the item to the right. +r +Moves the item to the right. - -See . +See \makebox. - + <literal>\framebox</literal> \framebox + Synopsis: \framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} @@ -1581,16 +1908,19 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. -\fboxrule\fboxsepThe \framebox command produces a rule of thickness +\fboxrule +\fboxsep +The \framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents of the box. - + <literal>\dashbox</literal> \dashbox + Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: \dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} @@ -1605,9 +1935,10 @@ multiples of the dlen. - + <literal>\frame</literal> \frame + Synopsis: \frame{text} @@ -1618,9 +1949,10 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. - + <literal>\line</literal> \line + Synopsis: \line(xslope,yslope){length} @@ -1628,16 +1960,17 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. The \line command draws a line with the given length and slope xslope/yslope. -Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, -where x and y have integer values from −6 -through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, +Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, +where x and y have integer values from −6 +through 6. For lines of any slope, not to mention other shapes, see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. - + <literal>\linethickness</literal> \linethickness + The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be dim, which must be a positive length. @@ -1647,40 +1980,44 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. - + <literal>\thicklines</literal> \thicklines + The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf.  and . +cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. - + <literal>\thinlines</literal> \thinlines + The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf.  and . +cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. - + <literal>\multiput</literal> \multiput + Synopsis: \multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position -(x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, +(x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, n times. - + <literal>\oval</literal> \oval + Synopsis: \oval(width,height)[portion] @@ -1689,26 +2026,26 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at pos The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the oval via the following: -t -selects the top portion; -b -selects the bottom portion; -r -selects the right portion; -l -selects the left portion. +t +selects the top portion; +b +selects the bottom portion; +r +selects the right portion; +l +selects the left portion. - -The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a -maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like +The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a +maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like boxes with rounded corners. - + <literal>\put</literal> \put + \put(x coord,y coord){ ... } The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory @@ -1716,9 +2053,10 @@ argument at the given coordinates. - + <literal>\shortstack</literal> \shortstack + Synopsis: \shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} @@ -1726,36 +2064,41 @@ argument at the given coordinates. The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid positions are: -r -Move the objects to the right of the stack. -l -Move the objects to the left of the stack -c -Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) +r +Move the objects to the right of the stack. +l +Move the objects to the left of the stack +c +Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) - -\\ (for \shortstack objects)Objects are separated with \\. +\\ (for \shortstack objects) +Objects are separated with \\. - + <literal>\vector</literal> \vector + Synopsis: \vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -−4 and +4, inclusive. +length and slope. The x and y values must lie between +−4 and +4, inclusive. - + <literal>quotation</literal> -quotationquoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text with paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text +quotation +quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text + Synopsis: \begin{quotation} @@ -1771,10 +2114,14 @@ normally. - + <literal>quote</literal> -quotequoted text without paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text without paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text, omitting +quote +quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting + Snyopsis: \begin{quote} @@ -1789,10 +2136,14 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - + <literal>tabbing</literal> -tabbing environmenttab stops, usinglining text up in columns using tab stopsalignment via tabbing +tabbing environment +tab stops, using +lining text up using tab stops +alignment via tabbing + Synopsis: \begin{tabbing} @@ -1811,67 +2162,71 @@ environment. The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: -\\ (tabbing) -End a line. +\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) +End a line. -\= (tabbing) -Sets a tab stop at the current position. +\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) +Sets a tab stop at the current position. -\> (tabbing) -\>Advances to the next tab stop. +\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) +\> +Advances to the next tab stop. -\< -Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing +\<\< +Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. -\+ -Moves the left margin of the next and all the +\+\+ +Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\- -Moves the left margin of the next and all the +\-\- +Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\' (tabbing) -Moves everything that you have typed so far in the +\’ (tabbing)\' (tabbing) +Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right -of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. +of the previous column, flush against the current column’s tab stop. -\` (tabbing) -Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab -stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column -because there's no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the +\‘ (tabbing)\` (tabbing) +Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab +stop 0. However, it can’t move text to the right of the last column +because there’s no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between the \` and the command that ends the line. -\a (tabbing) -\a' (acute accent in tabbing)\a` (grave accent in tabbing)\a= (macron accent in tabbing)In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and -\` do not produce accents as usual (see ). Instead, +\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) +\a’ (acute accent in tabbing) +\a‘ (grave accent in tabbing) +\a= (macron accent in tabbing) +In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and +\` do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead, the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. -\kill -Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ +\kill\kill +Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- commands in that line remain in effect. -\poptabs -\poptabsRestores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. +\poptabs\poptabs +\poptabs +Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. -\pushtabs -Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing +\pushtabs\pushtabs +Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. -\tabbingsep -Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. +\tabbingsep\tabbingsep +Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. - This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: \begin{tabbing} @@ -1886,10 +2241,13 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ - + <literal>table</literal> -tabletables, creatingcreating tables +table +tables, creating +creating tables + Synopsis: \begin{table}[placement] @@ -1900,13 +2258,13 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ \end{table} Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. +usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables will not be split between two pages. The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your table. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float; these are the same as that used with the figure -environment, and described there (see ). +environment, and described there (see figure). The standard report and article classes use the default placement [tbp]. @@ -1916,9 +2274,12 @@ you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your tabl - + <literal>tabular</literal> -tabular environmentlines in tableslining text up in tables +tabular environment +lines in tables +lining text up in tables + Synopsis: \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} @@ -1926,7 +2287,7 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ ... \end{tabular} - or +or \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ @@ -1936,109 +2297,110 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. -\\ for tabular\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, -except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline +\\ for tabular +\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline command (to put a rule below the table) follows. The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: -width -Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be +width +Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified width. -pos -Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of +pos +Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of the environment. -t -align on top row -b -align on bottom row +t +align on top row + +b +align on bottom row - -cols -Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the +cols +Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and intercolumn material. -l -A column of left-aligned items. +l +A column of left-aligned items. -r -A column of right-aligned items. +r +A column of right-aligned items. -c -A column of centered items. +c +A column of centered items. -| -A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. +| +A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. -@{text} -This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the +@{text} +This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space -between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in -text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression -causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all -subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep -command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not -suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be -used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. - -p{wd} -Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width +before the adjacent item must be included in text. + +To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given +column, you have to load the array package and use the +>{...} specifier. + + +\extracolsep +An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression causes an +extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent +columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. +Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed +by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only +in an @-expression in the cols argument. + +p{wd} +Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument of a \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not appear in the item, except in the following situations: - -inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. - - -inside an explicit \parbox. - - -in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft +inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. +inside an explicit \parbox. +in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a p-column element. - - -*{num}{cols} -Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a + +*{num}{cols} +Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression. - - - + Parameters that control formatting: -\arrayrulewidth -Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and +\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth +Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments; the -default is ‘.4pt’. +default is ‘.4pt’. -\arraystretch -Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array -environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling. +\arraystretch\arraystretch +Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array +environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling. -\doublerulesep -Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || -in the tabular and array environments; default is ‘2pt’. +\doublerulesep\doublerulesep +Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || +in the tabular and array environments; default is ‘2pt’. -\tabcolsep -Half the width of the space between columns; default is ‘6pt’. +\tabcolsep\tabcolsep +Half the width of the space between columns; default is ‘6pt’. - -These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: +The following commands can be used inside a tabular +environment: - + <literal>\multicolumn</literal> \multicolumn + Synopsis: \multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text} @@ -2049,7 +2411,7 @@ specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centered, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, text, specifies what text to put in the entry. -Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; +Here’s an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; \multicolumn is used for the heading: \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} @@ -2061,9 +2423,10 @@ for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argumen - + <literal>\cline</literal> \cline + Synopsis: \cline{i-j} @@ -2074,19 +2437,21 @@ which are specified in the mandatory argument. - + <literal>\hline</literal> \hline + The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the -enclosing tabular or array environment. It's most +enclosing tabular or array environment. It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. - + <literal>\vline</literal> \vline + The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @@ -2095,10 +2460,12 @@ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an - + <literal>thebibliography</literal> -thebibliographybibliography, creating (manually) +thebibliography +bibliography, creating (manually) + Synopsis: \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} @@ -2110,8 +2477,8 @@ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an reference list. In the article class, this reference list is labelled -“References”; in the report class, it is labelled -“Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) +“References”; in the report class, it is labelled +“Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command \refname. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: @@ -2124,10 +2491,11 @@ less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. - + <literal>\bibitem</literal> \bibitem + Synopsis: \bibitem[label]{cite_key} @@ -2138,18 +2506,19 @@ automatically generated using the enumi counter. The symbols not containing a comma. This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the -item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by -the \begin{document} command, the item's label is +item’s cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by +the \begin{document} command, the item’s label is associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key with a \cite command (see next section) to produce the associated label. - + <literal>\cite</literal> \cite + Synopsis: \cite[subcite]{keys @@ -2161,13 +2530,14 @@ the references associated with keys by entries in the The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce -`[Knuth, p. 314]'. +‘[Knuth, p. 314]’. - + <literal>\nocite</literal> \nocite + \nocite{key_list} The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, @@ -2178,11 +2548,16 @@ which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux f Using Bib&tex; -using Bib&tex;bib&tex;, usingbibliography, creating (automatically)\bibliographystyle\bibliography +using Bib&tex; +bib&tex;, using +bibliography, creating (automatically) +\bibliographystyle +\bibliography + If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of -titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the -thebibliography environment (see ). Instead, +titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don’t use the +thebibliography environment (see thebibliography). Instead, you include the lines \bibliographystyle{bibstyle} @@ -2194,17 +2569,16 @@ be produced: bibstyle refers to a file bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are: -alpha -Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of +alpha +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. -plain -Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. -unsrt -Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. -abbrv -Like plain, but more compact labels. +plain +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +unsrt +Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. +abbrv +Like plain, but more compact labels. - In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. @@ -2218,27 +2592,32 @@ Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and - + <literal>theorem</literal> -theorem environmenttheorems, typesetting +theorem environment +theorems, typesetting + Synopsis: \begin{theorem} theorem-text \end{theorem} -The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in +The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem -(see ). +(see \newtheorem). - + <literal>titlepage</literal> -titlepage environmentmaking a title pagetitle pages, creating +titlepage environment +making a title page +title pages, creating + Synopsis: \begin{titlepage} @@ -2249,17 +2628,23 @@ possibilities for n are described under \new with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command may be useful on title pages -(see ). +(see \today). -You can use the \maketitle command (see ) to +You can use the \maketitle command (see \maketitle) to produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. - + <literal>verbatim</literal> -verbatim environmentverbatim textsimulating typed texttyped text, simulatingcode, typesettingcomputer programs, typesetting +verbatim environment +verbatim text +simulating typed text +typed text, simulating +code, typesetting +computer programs, typesetting + Synopsis: \begin{verbatim} @@ -2268,17 +2653,19 @@ produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the -\ character produces a printed ‘\’. It turns &latex; +\ character produces a printed ‘\’. It turns &latex; into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a typewriter. The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). - + <literal>\verb</literal> -\verbverbatim text, inline +\verb +verbatim text, inline + Synopsis: \verbcharliteral-textchar @@ -2290,16 +2677,19 @@ including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter \verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. -visible spaceThe *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a -“visible space” character. +visible space +The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a +“visible space” character. - + <literal>verse</literal> -verse environmentpoetry, an environment for +verse environment +poetry, an environment for + Synopsis: \begin{verse} @@ -2311,7 +2701,8 @@ verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-textThe verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. -\\ for verseThe margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not +\\ for verse +The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. @@ -2321,7 +2712,9 @@ stanzas. Line breaking -line breakingbreaking lines +line breaking +breaking lines + The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines @@ -2333,9 +2726,12 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the - + <literal>\\</literal>[*][<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>] -\\ force line breaknew line, startingline break, forcing +\\ force line break +new line, starting +line break, forcing + The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a @@ -2346,11 +2742,14 @@ except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line. - + <literal>\obeycr</literal> & <literal>\restorecr</literal> -\obeycr\restorecrnew line, output as input +\obeycr +\restorecr +new line, output as input + The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file -(‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\ (followed by +(‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\ (followed by \relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. @@ -2358,18 +2757,22 @@ in the output. - + <literal>\newline</literal> -\newlinenew line, starting (paragraph mode) +\newline +new line, starting (paragraph mode) + The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode. - + <literal>\-</literal> (discretionary hyphen) -\- (hyphenation)hyphenation, forcing +\- (hyphenation) +hyphenation, forcing + The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an @@ -2383,32 +2786,35 @@ that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. - + <literal>\fussy</literal> \fussy + The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command -(see . +(see \sloppy. - + <literal>\sloppy</literal> The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. -Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see ). +Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). - + <literal>\hyphenation</literal> -\hyphenationhyphenation, defining +\hyphenation +hyphenation, defining + Synopsis: \hyphenation{word-one word-two} @@ -2424,9 +2830,13 @@ misses the hyphenations in these words): - + <literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal> -\linebreak\nolinebreakline breaks, forcingline breaks, preventing +\linebreak +\nolinebreak +line breaks, forcing +line breaks, preventing + Synopses: \linebreak[priority] @@ -2439,24 +2849,28 @@ extends to the right margin as usual. With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from -0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. +0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. Page breaking -page breakingbreaking pages +page breaking +breaking pages + &latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - + <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> -\cleardoublepagestarting on a right-hand page +\cleardoublepage +starting on a right-hand page + The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand @@ -2464,25 +2878,33 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand - + <literal>\clearpage</literal> -\clearpageflushing floats and starting a pagestarting a new page and clearing floats +\clearpage +flushing floats and starting a page +starting a new page and clearing floats + The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - + <literal>\newpage</literal> -\newpagenew page, startingstarting a new page +\newpage +new page, starting +starting a new page + The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see \clearpage above). - + <literal>\enlargethispage</literal> -\enlargethispageenlarge current page +\enlargethispage +enlarge current page + \enlargethispage{size} \enlargethispage*{size} @@ -2497,22 +2919,26 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit - + <literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal> -\pagebreak\nopagebreakpage break, forcingpage break, preventing +\pagebreak +\nopagebreak +page break, forcing +page break, preventing + Synopses: \pagebreak[priority] \nopagebreak[priority] By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For -\linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out +(prevents) a page break at the current position. With +\pagebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. With the optional argument priority, you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand to a request. The number must -be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more +be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is. @@ -2521,6 +2947,7 @@ insistent the request is. Footnotes footnotes, creating + Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the @@ -2528,9 +2955,10 @@ produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the - + <literal>\footnote</literal> \footnote + Synopsis: \footnote[number]{text} @@ -2546,9 +2974,10 @@ tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections. - + <literal>\footnotemark</literal> \footnotemark + With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, @@ -2563,9 +2992,10 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with - + <literal>\footnotetext</literal> \footnotetext + Synopsis: \footnotetext[number]{text} @@ -2582,14 +3012,17 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode. Symbolic footnotes -footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedIf you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered +If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} -\fnsymbol, and footnotes\@fnsymbolThe \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols -(see ). If you want to -use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also +\fnsymbol, and footnotes +\@fnsymbol +The \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols +(see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you’ll need to also redefine \@fnsymbol. @@ -2597,37 +3030,43 @@ redefine \@fnsymbol. Footnote parameters -footnote parametersparameters, for footnotes -\footnoterule -Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's +footnote parameters +parameters, for footnotes + +\footnoterule\footnoterule +Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except slides, where it does not appear). -\footnotesep -The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +\footnotesep\footnotesep +The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize -fonts (see ), therefore there is no extra space between -footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for -‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. +fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between +footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for +‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - Definitions definitions + &latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. - + <literal>\newcommand</literal> & <literal>\renewcommand</literal> -\newcommandcommands, defining new onesdefining a new commandnew commands, defining +\newcommand +commands, defining new ones +defining a new command +new commands, defining + \newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: @@ -2637,35 +3076,36 @@ command, respectively. Synopses: \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} -cmd -The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it +cmd +The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand, it must already be defined. -nargs -An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +nargs +An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. -default -If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +default +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command’s first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified -in the call) is the string ‘def’. +in the call) is the string ‘def’. -defn -The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a +defn +The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the text of the nth argument. - - + <literal>\newcounter</literal> -\newcountercounters, defining new +\newcounter +counters, defining new + Synopsis: \newcounter{cnt}[countername] @@ -2676,13 +3116,15 @@ The new counter is initialized to zero. Given the optional argument [countername], cnt will be reset whenever countername is incremented. -See , for more information about counters. +See Counters, for more information about counters. - + <literal>\newlength</literal> -\newlengthlengths, defining new +\newlength +lengths, defining new + Synopsis: \newlength{\arg} @@ -2692,14 +3134,15 @@ will be reset whenever countername is incremented. be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error occurs if \foo is already defined. -See , for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and +See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. - + <literal>\newsavebox</literal> \newsavebox + Synopsis: \newsavebox{cmd} @@ -2709,9 +3152,14 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. - + <literal>\newenvironment</literal> & <literal>\renewenvironment</literal> -\newenvironment\renewenvironmentenvironments, definingdefining new environmentsredefining environments +\newenvironment +\renewenvironment +environments, defining +defining new environments +redefining environments + Synopses: \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} @@ -2719,70 +3167,74 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. \renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, -\begin{env} … \end{env}. +\begin{env} … \end{env}. -env -The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env +env +The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env must not be an existing environment, and the command \env must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be the name of an existing environment. -nargs -An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of +nargs +An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. -default -If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default +default +If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default gives the default value for that argument. -begdef -The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a +begdef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by the text of the nth argument. -enddef -The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It +enddef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It may not contain any argument parameters. - - + <literal>\newtheorem</literal> -\newtheoremtheorems, definingdefining new theorems +\newtheorem +theorems, defining +defining new theorems + \newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] \newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: -newenv -The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an +newenv +The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an existing environment or otherwise defined. -label -The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the -number. For example, ‘Theorem’. +label +The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +number. For example, ‘Theorem’. -numbered_like -(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; +numbered_like +(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. -within -(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. +within +(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the within counter. - At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, not both. - + <literal>\newfont</literal> -\newfontfonts, new commands fordefining new fonts +\newfont +fonts, new commands for +defining new fonts + Synopsis: \newfont{cmd}{fontname} @@ -2796,28 +3248,32 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd fi - + <literal>\protect</literal> \protect -fragile commandsmoving argumentsFootnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and + +fragile commands +moving arguments +Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it must be preceded by \protect. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. Some examples of moving arguments are \caption -(see ), \thanks (see ), and +(see figure), \thanks (see \maketitle), and expressions in tabular and array environments -(see ). +(see tabular). -robust commandsCommands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not +robust commands +Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not be preceded by \protect. See also: -http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect - +http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect + @@ -2825,12 +3281,14 @@ be preceded by \protect. Counters -counters, a list ofvariables, a list of +counters, a list of +variables, a list of + Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or command that produces the number, except with no \. -(enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate -environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;'s +(enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate +environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;’s standard document classes to control numbering. part paragraph figure enumi @@ -2841,43 +3299,45 @@ subsubsection - + <literal>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</literal>: Printing counters All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for instance, \alph{enumi}. -\alph -prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', …. +\alph\alph +prints counter using lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ... -\Alph -uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', …. +\Alph\Alph +uses uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... -\arabic -uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', …. +\arabic\arabic +uses Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, ... -\roman -uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', …. +\roman\roman +uses lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... -\roman -uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', …. +\roman\roman +uses uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... -\fnsymbol -prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine +\fnsymbol\fnsymbol +prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of -counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. +counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. -The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: +The symbols mostly aren’t supported in Info, but here are the names: asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - - + <literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> -\usecounterlist items, specifying counternumbered items, specifying counter +\usecounter +list items, specifying counter +numbered items, specifying counter + Synopsis: \usecounter{counter} @@ -2888,9 +3348,11 @@ the list items. - + <literal>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> -\valuecounters, getting value of +\value +counters, getting value of + Synopsis: \value{counter} @@ -2904,9 +3366,12 @@ be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: - + <literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> -\setcountercounters, settingsetting counters +\setcounter +counters, setting +setting counters + Synopsis: \setcounter{\counter}{value} @@ -2916,42 +3381,48 @@ be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: - + <literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> \addtocounter + The \addtocounter command increments counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. - + <literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> \refstepcounter + The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as -\stepcounter See , except it also defines the +\stepcounter See \stepcounter, except it also defines the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. - + <literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> \stepcounter + The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and resets all subsidiary counters. - + <literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Predefined counters -\day\month\year +\day +\month +\year + &latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, -1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year +1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year (\year, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. The related command \today produces a string representing the -current day (see ). +current day (see \today). @@ -2959,14 +3430,17 @@ current day (see ). Lengths lengths, defining and using + A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. - + <literal>\setlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> -\setlengthlengths, setting +\setlength +lengths, setting + The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points @@ -2974,18 +3448,21 @@ understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm - + \addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>} -\addtolengthlengths, adding to -The \addtolength command increments a “length command” +\addtolength +lengths, adding to + +The \addtolength command increments a “length command” \len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which may be negative. - + <literal>\settodepth</literal> \settodepth + \settodepth{\gnat}{text} The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command @@ -2993,9 +3470,10 @@ equal to the depth of the text argument. - + <literal>\settoheight</literal> \settoheight + \settoheight{\gnat}{text} The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command @@ -3004,29 +3482,35 @@ equal to the height of the text argument. - + <literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \settowidth + The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument. - Predefined lengths -lengths, predefinedpredefined lengths +lengths, predefined +predefined lengths + \width -\width +\width + \height -\height +\height + \depth -\depth +\depth + \totalheight -\totalheight +\totalheight + These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands (see ). They specify the natural width etc. of the -text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + +commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width, etc., of +the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say @@ -3037,17 +3521,22 @@ natural size, e.g., say Making paragraphs -making paragraphsparagraphs -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not +making paragraphs +paragraphs + +A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command. - + <literal>\indent</literal> -\indent\parindentindent, forcing +\indent +\parindent +indent, forcing + \indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would @@ -3059,18 +3548,22 @@ mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, < - + <literal>\noindent</literal> -\noindentindent, suppressing +\noindent +indent, suppressing + When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. - + <literal>\parskip</literal> -\parskipvertical space before paragraphs +\parskip +vertical space before paragraphs + \parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. @@ -3078,7 +3571,11 @@ before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. Marginal notes -marginal notesnotes in the marginremarks in the margin\marginpar +marginal notes +notes in the margin +remarks in the margin +\marginpar + Synopsis: \marginpar[left]{right} @@ -3090,17 +3587,13 @@ where the \marginpar occurs. When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text will be placed - -in the right margin for one-sided layout; - - -in the outside margin for two-sided layout; - - -in the nearest margin for two-column layout. - - -\reversemarginpar\normalmarginparThe command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes +in the right margin for one-sided layout; +in the outside margin for two-sided layout; +in the nearest margin for two-column layout. + +\reversemarginpar +\normalmarginpar +The command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them in the default position. @@ -3112,22 +3605,21 @@ hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. These parameters affect the formatting of the note: -\marginparpush -Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for -‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. +\marginparpush\marginparpush +Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for +‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. -\marginparsep -Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default -‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. +\marginparsep\marginparsep +Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. -\marginparwidth -Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document -is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for -‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. -In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. +\marginparwidth\marginparwidth +Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document +is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for +‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. +In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. - The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes from falling off the bottom of the page. @@ -3139,19 +3631,28 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. Math formulas -math formulasformulas, mathmath mode, entering -math environmentdisplaymath environmentequation environmentThere are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: - -math -For formulas that appear right in the text. -displaymath -For formulas that appear on their own line. -equation -The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation +math formulas +formulas, math +math mode, entering + +math environment +displaymath environment +equation environment +There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: + +math +For formulas that appear right in the text. +displaymath +For formulas that appear on their own line. +equation +The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation number in the right margin. - -\(\)\[\]The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, +\( +\) +\[ +\] +The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: @@ -3159,18 +3660,22 @@ environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} -$In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even +$ +In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even shorter form: $ ... $ instead of \(...\) -\boldmath\unboldmathThe \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in +\boldmath +\unboldmath +The \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the \unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used outside of math mode. -\displaystyleThe \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the +\displaystyle +The \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ @@ -3179,12 +3684,17 @@ below summations. For example - + Subscripts & superscripts -superscriptsubscriptexponent_^ -To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type -_{exp}. To get exp to appear as a -superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles +superscript +subscript +exponent +_ +^ + +To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type +_{exp}. To get exp to appear as a +superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript. @@ -3193,915 +3703,953 @@ superscript. Math symbols -math symbolssymbols, mathgreek letters -&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to +math symbols +symbols, math +greek letters + +&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you’re likely to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get -the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. +the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. -\| -\| +\|\| +\| -\aleph -\aleph +\aleph\aleph +\aleph -\alpha -\alpha +\alpha\alpha +\alpha -\amalg -\amalg (binary operation) +\amalg\amalg +\amalg (binary operation) -\angle -\angle +\angle\angle +\angle -\approx -\approx (relation) +\approx\approx +\approx (relation) -\ast -\ast (binary operation) +\ast\ast +\ast (binary operation) -\asymp -\asymp (relation) +\asymp\asymp +\asymp (relation) -\backslash -\ (delimiter) +\backslash\backslash +\ (delimiter) -\beta -\beta +\beta\beta +\beta -\bigcap -\bigcap +\bigcap\bigcap +\bigcap -\bigcirc -\bigcirc (binary operation) +\bigcirc\bigcirc +\bigcirc (binary operation) -\bigcup -\bigcup +\bigcup\bigcup +\bigcup -\bigodot -\bigodot +\bigodot\bigodot +\bigodot -\bigoplus -\bigoplus +\bigoplus\bigoplus +\bigoplus -\bigotimes -\bigotimes +\bigotimes\bigotimes +\bigotimes -\bigtriangledown -\bigtriangledown (binary operation) +\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangledown (binary operation) -\bigtriangleup -\bigtriangleup (binary operation) +\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup +\bigtriangleup (binary operation) -\bigsqcup -\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup -\biguplus -\biguplus +\biguplus\biguplus +\biguplus -\bigcap -\bigvee +\bigcap\bigcap +\bigvee -\bigwedge -\bigwedge +\bigwedge\bigwedge +\bigwedge -\bot -\bot +\bot\bot +\bot -\bowtie -\bowtie (relation) +\bowtie\bowtie +\bowtie (relation) -\Box -(square open box symbol) +\Box\Box +(square open box symbol) -\bullet -bullet symbol\bullet (binary operation) +\bullet\bullet +bullet symbol +\bullet (binary operation) -\cap -\cap (binary operation) +\cap\cap +\cap (binary operation) -\cdot -\cdot (binary operation) +\cdot\cdot +\cdot (binary operation) -\chi -\chi +\chi\chi +\chi -\circ -\circ (binary operation) +\circ\circ +\circ (binary operation) -\clubsuit -\clubsuit +\clubsuit\clubsuit +\clubsuit -\cong -\cong (relation) +\cong\cong +\cong (relation) -\coprod -\coprod +\coprod\coprod +\coprod -\cup -\cup (binary operation) +\cup\cup +\cup (binary operation) -\dagger -\dagger (binary operation) +\dagger\dagger +\dagger (binary operation) -\dashv -\dashv (relation) +\dashv\dashv +\dashv (relation) -\ddagger -\dagger (binary operation) +\ddagger\ddagger +\dagger (binary operation) -\Delta -\Delta +\Delta\Delta +\Delta -\delta -\delta +\delta\delta +\delta -\Diamond -bigger \diamond +\Diamond\Diamond +bigger \diamond -\diamond -\diamond (binary operation) +\diamond\diamond +\diamond (binary operation) -\diamondsuit -\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit -\div -\div (binary operation) +\div\div +\div (binary operation) -\doteq -\doteq (relation) +\doteq\doteq +\doteq (relation) -\downarrow -\downarrow (delimiter) +\downarrow\downarrow +\downarrow (delimiter) -\Downarrow -\Downarrow (delimiter) +\Downarrow\Downarrow +\Downarrow (delimiter) -\ell -\ell +\ell\ell +\ell -\emptyset -\emptyset +\emptyset\emptyset +\emptyset -\epsilon -\epsilon +\epsilon\epsilon +\epsilon -\equiv -\equiv (relation) +\equiv\equiv +\equiv (relation) -\eta -\eta +\eta\eta +\eta -\exists -\exists +\exists\exists +\exists -\flat -\flat +\flat\flat +\flat -\forall -\forall +\forall\forall +\forall -\frown -\frown (relation) +\frown\frown +\frown (relation) -\Gamma -\Gamma +\Gamma\Gamma +\Gamma -\gamma -\gamma +\gamma\gamma +\gamma -\ge -\ge +\ge\ge +\ge -\geq -\geq (relation) +\geq\geq +\geq (relation) -\gets -\gets +\gets\gets +\gets -\gg -\gg (relation) +\gg\gg +\gg (relation) -\hbar -\hbar +\hbar\hbar +\hbar -\heartsuit -\heartsuit +\heartsuit\heartsuit +\heartsuit -\hookleftarrow -\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow -\hookrightarrow -\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow -\iff -\iff +\iff\iff +\iff -\Im -\Im +\Im\Im +\Im -\in -\in (relation) +\in\in +\in (relation) -\infty -\infty +\infty\infty +\infty -\int -\int +\int\int +\int -\iota -\iota +\iota\iota +\iota -\Join -condensed bowtie symbol (relation) +\Join\Join +condensed bowtie symbol (relation) -\kappa -\kappa +\kappa\kappa +\kappa -\Lambda -\Lambda +\Lambda\Lambda +\Lambda -\lambda -\lambda +\lambda\lambda +\lambda -\land -\land +\land\land +\land -\langle -\langle (delimiter) +\langle\langle +\langle (delimiter) -\lbrace -\lbrace (delimiter) +\lbrace\lbrace +\lbrace (delimiter) -\lbrack -\lbrack (delimiter) +\lbrack\lbrack +\lbrack (delimiter) -\lceil -\lceil (delimiter) +\lceil\lceil +\lceil (delimiter) -\le -\le +\le\le +\le -\leadsto - +\leadsto\leadsto + -\Leftarrow -\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow -\leftarrow -\leftarrow +\leftarrow\leftarrow +\leftarrow -\leftharpoondown -\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown -\leftharpoonup -\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup -\Leftrightarrow -\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow -\leftrightarrow -\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow -\leq -\leq (relation) +\leq\leq +\leq (relation) -\lfloor -\lfloor (delimiter) +\lfloor\lfloor +\lfloor (delimiter) -\lhd -(left-pointing arrow head) +\lhd\lhd +(left-pointing arrow head) -\ll -\ll (relation) +\ll\ll +\ll (relation) -\lnot -\lnot +\lnot\lnot +\lnot -\longleftarrow -\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow -\longleftrightarrow -\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow -\longmapsto -\longmapsto +\longmapsto\longmapsto +\longmapsto -\longrightarrow -\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow -\lor -\lor +\lor\lor +\lor -\mapsto -\mapsto +\mapsto\mapsto +\mapsto -\mho - +\mho\mho + -\mid -\mid (relation) +\mid\mid +\mid (relation) -\models -\models (relation) +\models\models +\models (relation) -\mp -\mp (binary operation) +\mp\mp +\mp (binary operation) -\mu -\mu +\mu\mu +\mu -\nabla -\nabla +\nabla\nabla +\nabla -\natural -\natural +\natural\natural +\natural -\ne -\ne +\ne\ne +\ne -\nearrow -\nearrow +\nearrow\nearrow +\nearrow -\neg -\neg +\neg\neg +\neg -\neq -\neq (relation) +\neq\neq +\neq (relation) -\ni -\ni (relation) +\ni\ni +\ni (relation) -\not -Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. +\not\not +Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. -\notin -\ni +\notin\notin +\ni -\nu -\nu +\nu\nu +\nu -\nwarrow -\nwarrow +\nwarrow\nwarrow +\nwarrow -\odot -\odot (binary operation) +\odot\odot +\odot (binary operation) -\oint -\oint +\oint\oint +\oint -\Omega -\Omega +\Omega\Omega +\Omega -\omega -\omega +\omega\omega +\omega -\ominus -\ominus (binary operation) +\ominus\ominus +\ominus (binary operation) -\oplus -\oplus (binary operation) +\oplus\oplus +\oplus (binary operation) -\oslash -\oslash (binary operation) +\oslash\oslash +\oslash (binary operation) -\otimes -\otimes (binary operation) +\otimes\otimes +\otimes (binary operation) -\owns -\owns +\owns\owns +\owns -\parallel -\parallel (relation) +\parallel\parallel +\parallel (relation) -\partial -\partial +\partial\partial +\partial -\perp -\perp (relation) +\perp\perp +\perp (relation) -\phi -\phi +\phi\phi +\phi -\Pi -\Pi +\Pi\Pi +\Pi -\pi -\pi +\pi\pi +\pi -\pm -\pm (binary operation) +\pm\pm +\pm (binary operation) -\prec -\prec (relation) +\prec\prec +\prec (relation) -\preceq -\preceq (relation) +\preceq\preceq +\preceq (relation) -\prime -\prime +\prime\prime +\prime -\prod -\prod +\prod\prod +\prod -\propto -\propto (relation) +\propto\propto +\propto (relation) -\Psi -\Psi +\Psi\Psi +\Psi -\psi -\psi +\psi\psi +\psi -\rangle -\rangle (delimiter) +\rangle\rangle +\rangle (delimiter) -\rbrace -\rbrace (delimiter) +\rbrace\rbrace +\rbrace (delimiter) -\rbrack -\rbrack (delimiter) +\rbrack\rbrack +\rbrack (delimiter) -\rceil -\rceil (delimiter) +\rceil\rceil +\rceil (delimiter) -\Re -\Re +\Re\Re +\Re -\rfloor -\rfloor +\rfloor\rfloor +\rfloor -\rhd -(binary operation) +\rhd\rhd +(binary operation) -\rho -\rho +\rho\rho +\rho -\Rightarrow -\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow -\rightarrow -\rightarrow +\rightarrow\rightarrow +\rightarrow -\rightharpoondown -\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown -\rightharpoonup -\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup -\rightleftharpoons -\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons -\searrow -\searrow +\searrow\searrow +\searrow -\setminus -\setminus (binary operation) +\setminus\setminus +\setminus (binary operation) -\sharp -\sharp +\sharp\sharp +\sharp -\Sigma -\Sigma +\Sigma\Sigma +\Sigma -\sigma -\sigma +\sigma\sigma +\sigma -\sim -\sim (relation) +\sim\sim +\sim (relation) -\simeq -\simeq (relation) +\simeq\simeq +\simeq (relation) -\smallint -\smallint +\smallint\smallint +\smallint -\smile -\smile (relation) +\smile\smile +\smile (relation) -\spadesuit -\spadesuit +\spadesuit\spadesuit +\spadesuit -\sqcap -\sqcap (binary operation) +\sqcap\sqcap +\sqcap (binary operation) -\sqcup -\sqcup (binary operation) +\sqcup\sqcup +\sqcup (binary operation) -\sqsubset -(relation) +\sqsubset\sqsubset +(relation) -\sqsubseteq -\sqsubseteq (relation) +\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq +\sqsubseteq (relation) -\sqsupset -(relation) +\sqsupset\sqsupset +(relation) -\sqsupseteq -\sqsupseteq (relation) +\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq +\sqsupseteq (relation) -\star -\star (binary operation) +\star\star +\star (binary operation) -\subset -\subset (relation) +\subset\subset +\subset (relation) -\subseteq -\subseteq (relation) +\subseteq\subseteq +\subseteq (relation) -\succ -\succ (relation) +\succ\succ +\succ (relation) -\succeq -\succeq (relation) +\succeq\succeq +\succeq (relation) -\sum -\sum +\sum\sum +\sum -\supset -\supset (relation) +\supset\supset +\supset (relation) -\supseteq -\supseteq (relation) +\supseteq\supseteq +\supseteq (relation) -\surd -\surd +\surd\surd +\surd -\swarrow -\swarrow +\swarrow\swarrow +\swarrow -\tau -\tau +\tau\tau +\tau -\theta -\theta +\theta\theta +\theta -\times -\times (binary operation) +\times\times +\times (binary operation) -\to -\to +\to\to +\to -\top -\top +\top\top +\top -\triangle -\triangle +\triangle\triangle +\triangle -\triangleleft -\triangleleft (binary operation) +\triangleleft\triangleleft +\triangleleft (binary operation) -\triangleright -\triangleright (binary operation) +\triangleright\triangleright +\triangleright (binary operation) -\unlhd -left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) +\unlhd\unlhd +left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -\unrhd -right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) +\unrhd\unrhd +right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -\Uparrow -\Uparrow (delimiter) +\Uparrow\Uparrow +\Uparrow (delimiter) -\uparrow -\uparrow (delimiter) +\uparrow\uparrow +\uparrow (delimiter) -\Updownarrow -\Updownarrow (delimiter) +\Updownarrow\Updownarrow +\Updownarrow (delimiter) -\updownarrow -\updownarrow (delimiter) +\updownarrow\updownarrow +\updownarrow (delimiter) -\uplus -\uplus (binary operation) +\uplus\uplus +\uplus (binary operation) -\Upsilon -\Upsilon +\Upsilon\Upsilon +\Upsilon -\upsilon -\upsilon +\upsilon\upsilon +\upsilon -\varepsilon -\varepsilon +\varepsilon\varepsilon +\varepsilon -\varphi -\varphi +\varphi\varphi +\varphi -\varpi -\varpi +\varpi\varpi +\varpi -\varrho -\varrho +\varrho\varrho +\varrho -\varsigma -\varsigma +\varsigma\varsigma +\varsigma -\vartheta -\vartheta +\vartheta\vartheta +\vartheta -\vdash -\vdash (relation) +\vdash\vdash +\vdash (relation) -\vee -\vee (binary operation) +\vee\vee +\vee (binary operation) -\Vert -\Vert (delimiter) +\Vert\Vert +\Vert (delimiter) -\vert -\vert (delimiter) +\vert\vert +\vert (delimiter) -\wedge -\wedge (binary operation) +\wedge\wedge +\wedge (binary operation) -\wp -\wp +\wp\wp +\wp -\wr -\wr (binary operation) +\wr\wr +\wr (binary operation) -\Xi -\Xi +\Xi\Xi +\Xi -\xi -\xi +\xi\xi +\xi -\zeta -\zeta +\zeta\zeta +\zeta - Math functions -math functionsfunctions, math +math functions +functions, math + These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. -\arccos -\arccos +\arccos\arccos +\arccos -\arcsin -\arcsin +\arcsin\arcsin +\arcsin -\arctan -\arctan +\arctan\arctan +\arctan -\arg -\arg +\arg\arg +\arg -\bmod -Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) +\bmod\bmod +Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) -\cos -\cos +\cos\cos +\cos -\cosh -\cosh +\cosh\cosh +\cosh -\cot -\cos +\cot\cot +\cos -\coth -\cosh +\coth\coth +\cosh -\csc -\csc +\csc\csc +\csc -\deg -\deg +\deg\deg +\deg -\det -\deg +\det\det +\deg -\dim -\dim +\dim\dim +\dim -\exp -\exp +\exp\exp +\exp -\gcd -\gcd +\gcd\gcd +\gcd -\hom -\hom +\hom\hom +\hom -\inf -\inf +\inf\inf +\inf -\ker -\ker +\ker\ker +\ker -\lg -\lg +\lg\lg +\lg -\lim -\lim +\lim\lim +\lim -\liminf -\liminf +\liminf\liminf +\liminf -\limsup -\limsup +\limsup\limsup +\limsup -\ln -\ln +\ln\ln +\ln -\log -\log +\log\log +\log -\max -\max +\max\max +\max -\min -\min +\min\min +\min -\pmod -parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) +\pmod\pmod +parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) -\Pr -\Pr +\Pr\Pr +\Pr -\sec -\sec +\sec\sec +\sec -\sin -\sin +\sin\sin +\sin -\sinh -\sinh +\sinh\sinh +\sinh -\sup -\sup +\sup\sup +\sup -\tan -\tan +\tan\tan +\tan -\tanh -\tanh +\tanh\tanh +\tanh - Math accents -math accentsaccents, mathematical +math accents +accents, mathematical + &latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text -(see ). +(see Accents). + +\acute\acute +acute accent, math +Math acute accent: \acute{x}. -\acute -acute accent, mathMath acute accent: \acute{x}. +\bar\bar +bar-over accent, math +macron accent, math +Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. -\bar -bar-over accent, mathmacron accent, mathMath bar-over accent: \bar{x}. +\breve\breve +breve accent, math +Math breve accent: \breve{x}. -\breve -breve accent, mathMath breve accent: \breve{x}. +\check\check +check accent, math +háček accent, math +Math háček (check) accent: \check{x}. -\check -check accent, mathhác<ek accent, mathMath hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}. +\ddot\ddot +double dot accent, math +Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. -\ddot -double dot accent, mathMath dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. +\dot\dot +overdot accent, math +dot over accent, math +Math dot accent: \dot{x}. -\dot -overdot accent, mathdot over accent, mathMath dot accent: \dot{x}. +\grave\grave +grave accent, math +Math grave accent: \grave{x}. -\grave -grave accent, mathMath grave accent: \grave{x}. +\hat\hat +hat accent, math +circumflex accent, math +Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. -\hat -hat accent, mathcircumflex accent, mathMath hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. +\imath\imath +dotless i, math +Math dotless i. -\imath -dotless i, mathMath dotless i. +\jmath\jmath +dotless j, math +Math dotless j. -\jmath -dotless j, mathMath dotless j. +\mathring\mathring +ring accent, math +Math ring accent: x*. -\tilde -tilde accent, mathMath tilde accent: \tilde{x}. +\tilde\tilde +tilde accent, math +Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}. -\vec -vector symbol, mathMath vector symbol: \vec{x}. +\vec\vec +vector symbol, math +Math vector symbol: \vec{x}. -\widehat -wide hat accent, mathMath wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. +\widehat\widehat +wide hat accent, math +Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. -\widehat -wide tile accent, mathMath wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. +\widehat\widehat +wide tile accent, math +Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. - Spacing in math mode -spacing within math modemath mode, spacing +spacing within math mode +math mode, spacing + In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, &latex; provides the following commands for use in math mode: -\; -\;A thick space (5\over18\,quad). -\: -\> -\:\>Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). -\, -\,A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. -\! -A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). +\; +\; +A thick space (5\over18\,quad). +\: +\> +\: +\> +Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). +\, +\, +A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. +\! +A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). - Math miscellany math miscellany -\* -discretionary multiplicationmultiplication symbol, discretionary line breakA “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is + + +\*\* +discretionary multiplication +multiplication symbol, discretionary line break +A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. -\cdots -A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. +\cdots\cdots +A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. -\ddots -A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. +\ddots\ddots +A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. -\frac{num}{den} -\fracProduces the fraction num divided by den. +\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} +\frac +Produces the fraction num divided by den. -\left delim1 ... \right delim2 -\rightnull delimiterThe two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, +\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 +\right +null delimiter +The two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. -\overbrace{text} -Generates a brace over text. -For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. +\overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} +Generates a brace over text. +For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. -\overline{text} -Generates a horizontal line over tex. -For exampe, \overline{x+y}. +\overline{text}\overline{text} +Generates a horizontal line over tex. +For exampe, \overline{x+y}. -\sqrt[root]{arg} -Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The +\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} +Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. -\stackrel{text}{relation} -Puts text above relation. For example, +\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} +Puts text above relation. For example, \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. -\underbrace{math} -Generates math with a brace underneath. +\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} +Generates math with a brace underneath. -\underline{text} -Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be +\underline{text}\underline{text} +Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. -\vdots -\vdotsProduces a vertical ellipsis. +\vdots\vdots +\vdots +Produces a vertical ellipsis. - Modes -modesparagraph modemath modeleft-to-right modelR mode +modes +paragraph mode +math mode +left-to-right mode +lR mode + When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: - -Paragraph mode - - -Math mode - - -Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - - +Paragraph mode +Math mode +Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short + &latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when &latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. -“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in +“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it’s the one &latex; is in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in -“math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR -mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it +“math mode” when it’s generating a mathematical formula. In “LR +mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words @@ -4116,76 +4664,92 @@ There are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. +“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out +in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. Page styles -styles, pagepage styles +styles, page +page styles + The \documentclass command determines the size and position of -the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. +the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - + <literal>\maketitle</literal> -titles, making\maketitle +titles, making +\maketitle + The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title -page—except in the article class, where the title is placed +page—except in the article class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations: -\author{name \and name2} -author, for titlepage\\ for \author\and for \authorThe \author command declares the document author(s), where the +\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} +author, for titlepage +\\ for \author +\and for \author +The \author command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use -\\ to separate lines within a single author's entry—for -example, to give the author's institution or address. +\\ to separate lines within a single author’s entry—for +example, to give the author’s institution or address. -\date{text} -date, for titlepageThe \date command declares text to be the document's -date. With no \date command, the current date (see ) +\date{text}\date{text} +date, for titlepage +The \date command declares text to be the document’s +date. With no \date command, the current date (see \today) is used. -\thanks{text} -thanks, for titlepagecredit footnoteThe \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, +\thanks{text}\thanks{text} +thanks, for titlepage +credit footnote +The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. -\title{text} -title, for titlepage\\ for \titleThe \title command declares text to be the title of the +\title{text}\title{text} +title, for titlepage +\\ for \title +The \title command declares text to be the title of the document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. - - + <literal>\pagenumbering</literal> -\pagenumberingpage numbering style +\pagenumbering +page numbering style + Synopsis: \pagenumbering{style} Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: -arabic -arabic numerals -roman -lowercase Roman numerals -Roman -uppercase Roman numerals -alph -lowercase letters -Alph -uppercase letters +arabic +arabic numerals +roman +lowercase Roman numerals +Roman +uppercase Roman numerals +alph +lowercase letters +Alph +uppercase letters - - + <literal>\pagestyle</literal> -\pagestyleheader stylefooter stylerunning header and footer style +\pagestyle +header style +footer style +running header and footer style + Synopsis: \pagestyle{style} @@ -4193,42 +4757,41 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: -plain -Just a plain page number. +plain +Just a plain page number. -empty -Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. +empty +Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. -headings -Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what +headings +Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what goes in the headers. -myheadings -Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the +myheadings +Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the \markright commands. - Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: -\markboth{left}{right} -Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” +\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} +Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” (left) is generated by the last \markboth command before -the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is +the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is generated by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. -\markright{right} -Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. +\markright{right}\markright{right} +Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. - - + <literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}</literal> \thispagestyle + The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the \pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it changes to style for the current page only. @@ -4239,17 +4802,19 @@ changes to style for the current page only. Spaces spaces + &latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. -Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” +Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is -more often useful in math mode (see ). +more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in math mode). - + <literal>\hspace</literal> \hspace + Synopsis: \hspace[*]{length} @@ -4266,24 +4831,29 @@ form. - + <literal>\hfill</literal> -\hfillThe \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has +\hfill +The \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. -\fillThe \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, -the glue value ‘0pt plus1fill’); thus, \hspace\fill is +\fill +The \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, +the glue value ‘0pt plus1fill’); thus, \hspace\fill is equivalent to \hfill. - + <literal>\SPACE</literal> -\SPACE\TAB\NEWLINE -The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's -useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example +\SPACE +\TAB +\NEWLINE + +The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It’s +useful after punctuation which shouldn’t end a sentence. For example Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system. @@ -4293,79 +4863,86 @@ are equivalent to \ . - + <literal>\@</literal> \@ + The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without \@: -… in C\@. Pascal, though … -… in C. Pascal, though … +… in C\@. Pascal, though … +… in C. Pascal, though … produces -
    … in C. Pascal, though … -… in C. Pascal, though … +
    … in C. Pascal, though … +… in C. Pascal, though …
    - - + <literal>\thinspace</literal> \thinspace + \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in '”. +in ’”. - + <literal>\/</literal> \/ + The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic -f character typically has a large italic correction value. +f character typically has a large italic correction value. -If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to +If the following character is a period or comma, it’s not necessary to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as normal letters, it can help. Compare -f: f; (in the &tex; output, the `f's are nicely separated) -with f: f;. +f: f; (in the &tex; output, the ‘f’s are nicely separated) +with f: f;. Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare -pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the `f') +pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the ‘f’) with pdf&tex;. - + <literal>\hrulefill</literal> \hrulefill -The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can + +The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule. - + <literal>\dotfill</literal> \dotfill -The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills + +The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills with dots instead of just white space. - + <literal>\addvspace</literal> -\addvspacevertical spacespace, inserting vertical +\addvspace +vertical space +space, inserting vertical + \addvspace{length} The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height @@ -4376,41 +4953,48 @@ of the total vertical space equal to length. - + <literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal> These commands produce a given amount of space. -\bigskip -\bigskip\bigskipamountThe same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +\bigskip +\bigskip +\bigskipamount +The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line space (with stretch and shrink). -\medskip -\medskip\medskipamountThe same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily +\medskip +\medskip +\medskipamount +The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). -\smallskip -\smallskip\smallskipamountThe same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +\smallskip +\smallskip +\smallskipamount +The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class. - + <literal>\vfill</literal> \vfill + The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which -can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to -\vspace{\fill} (see ). +can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to +\vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). - + <literal>\vspace[*]{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> \vspace + Synopsis: \vspace[*]{length} @@ -4429,24 +5013,29 @@ space is not removed. Boxes boxes -All the predefined length parameters (see ) can be + +All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - + <literal>\mbox{<replaceable>text}</replaceable></literal> \mbox -hyphenation, preventingThe \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the + +hyphenation, preventing +The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. - + <literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal> -\fbox\framebox +\fbox +\framebox + Synopses: \fbox{text} @@ -4460,18 +5049,21 @@ specification of the box width with the optional widthposition argument. -\fboxrule\fboxsepBoth commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default -‘.4pt’), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default -‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. +\fboxrule +\fboxsep +Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default +‘.4pt’), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default +‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. -See , for the \framebox command in the +See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the picture environment. - + <literal>lrbox</literal> lrbox + \begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} This is the environment form of \sbox. @@ -4481,9 +5073,10 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox. - + <literal>\makebox</literal> \makebox + Synopsis: \makebox[width][position]{text} @@ -4494,25 +5087,25 @@ optional width argument. The position of the text wi is determined by the optional position argument, which may take the following values:
    -c -Centered (default). -l -Flush left. -r -Flush right. -s -Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain +c +Centered (default). +l +Flush left. +r +Flush right. +s +Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain stretchable space for this to work. - \makebox is also used within the picture environment -see . +see \makebox (picture). - + <literal>\parbox</literal> \parbox + Synopsis: \parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} @@ -4520,19 +5113,18 @@ see . The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you -shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a +shouldn’t use any paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a -minipage environment (see ). +minipage environment (see minipage). \parbox has two mandatory arguments: -width -the width of the parbox; -text -the text that goes inside the parbox. +width +the width of the parbox; +text +the text that goes inside the parbox. - The optional position argument allows you to align either the top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text (default is top). @@ -4542,22 +5134,22 @@ text (default is top). The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. -t -text is placed at the top of the box. -c -text is centered in the box. -b -text is placed at the bottom of the box. -s -stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space +t +text is placed at the top of the box. +c +text is centered in the box. +b +text is placed at the bottom of the box. +s +stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space for this to work. - - + <literal>\raisebox</literal> \raisebox + Synopsis: \raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} @@ -4574,44 +5166,47 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth. - + <literal>\savebox</literal> \savebox + Synopsis: \savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox -(see ), except that instead of printing the resulting box, +(see \makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been -declared with \newsavebox (see ). +declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). - + <literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \sbox + Synopsis: \sbox{\boxcmd}{text} \sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox -(see ) except that instead of the resulting box being +(see \mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with -\newsavebox (see ). +\newsavebox (see \newsavebox). - + <literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable></literal> \usebox + Synopsis: \usebox{\boxcmd} \usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin -\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see ). +\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see \savebox). @@ -4626,28 +5221,42 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. Reserved characters -reserved characterscharacters, reserved +reserved characters +characters, reserved + The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called -“reserved characters” or “special characters”. +“reserved characters” or “special characters”. # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } -\#\$\%\&\_\{\}Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; +\# +\$ +\% +\& +\_ +\{ +\} +Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce $ in your output. -\backslashOne exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has +\backslash +One exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is -produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see ). +produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). -\~\^Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over -the following letter, as in õ and ô (see ); to get +\~ +\^ +Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over +the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents); to get a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim command. -\symbolaccessing any character of a font +\symbol +accessing any character of a font + Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character used in the \verb* command has the code @@ -4662,187 +5271,286 @@ with ", so the previous example could also be written as Text symbols -text symbolstextcomp package&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +text symbols +textcomp package +&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. -\copyright -\textcopyright -copyright symbolThe copyright symbol, ©. - -\dag -dagger, in textThe dagger symbol (in text). - -\ddag -double dagger, in textThe double dagger symbol (in text). - -\LaTeX -&latex; logologo, &latex;The &latex; logo. - -\guillemotleft («) -\guillemotright (») -\guilsinglleft (<) -\guilsinglright (>) -double guillemetssingle guillemetsleft angle quotation marksright angle quotation marksdouble angle quotation markssingle angle quotation marksFrench quotation marksquotation marks, FrenchDouble and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: -«, », <, >. - -\ldots -\dots -\textellipsis -ellipsisAn ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `…'. \ldots + +\copyright\copyright +\textcopyright\textcopyright +copyright symbol +The copyright symbol, ©. + +\dag\dag +dagger, in text +The dagger symbol (in text). + +\ddag\ddag +double dagger, in text +The double dagger symbol (in text). + +\LaTeX\LaTeX +&latex; logo +logo, &latex; +The &latex; logo. + +\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) +\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») +\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) +\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) +double guillemets +single guillemets +left angle quotation marks +right angle quotation marks +double angle quotation marks +single angle quotation marks +French quotation marks +quotation marks, French +Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: +«, », ‹, ›. + +\ldots\ldots +\dots\dots +\textellipsis\textellipsis +ellipsis +An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): ‘…’. \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. -\lq -left quoteopening quoteLeft (opening) quote: `. - -\P -\textparagraph -paragraph symbolpilcrowParagraph sign (pilcrow). - -\pounds -\textsterling -pounds symbolsterling symbolEnglish pounds sterling: £. - -\quotedblbase („) -\quotesinglbase (‚) -double low-9 quotation marksingle low-9 quotation marklow-9 quotation marks, single and doubleDouble and single quotation marks on the baseline: -„ and ‚. - -\rq -right quoteclosing quoteRight (closing) quote: '. - -\S -section symbolSection symbol. - -\TeX -&tex; logologo, &tex;The &tex; logo. - -\textasciicircum -circumflex, ASCII, in textASCII circumflex, in textASCII circumflex: ^. - -\textasciitilde -tilde, ASCII, in textASCII tilde, in textASCII tilde: ~. - -\textasteriskcentered -asterisk, centered, in textcentered asterisk, in textCentered asterisk: *. - -\textbackslash -backslash, in textBackslash: \. - -\textbar -vertical bar, in textbar, vertical, in textVertical bar: |. - -\textbardbl -vertical bar, double, in textbar, double vertical, in textdouble vertical bar, in textDouble vertical bar. - -\textbigcircle -big circle symbols, in textcircle symbol, big, in textBig circle symbol. - -\textbraceleft -left brace, in textbrace, left, in textLeft brace: {. - -\textbraceright -right brace, in textbrace, right, in textRight brace: }. - -\textbullet -bullet, in textBullet: •. - -\textcircled{letter} -circled letter, in textletter in a circle, as in ®. - -\textcompwordmark -\textcapitalwordmark -\textascenderwordmark -composite word mark, in textcap heightascender heightComposite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form +\lq\lq +left quote +opening quote +Left (opening) quote: ‘. + +\P\P +\textparagraph\textparagraph +paragraph symbol +pilcrow +Paragraph sign (pilcrow). + +\pounds\pounds +\textsterling\textsterling +pounds symbol +sterling symbol +English pounds sterling: £. + +\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) +\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) +double low-9 quotation mark +single low-9 quotation mark +low-9 quotation marks, single and double +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +„ and ‚. + +\rq\rq +right quote +closing quote +Right (closing) quote: ’. + +\S\S +section symbol +Section symbol. + +\TeX\TeX +&tex; logo +logo, &tex; +The &tex; logo. + +\textasciicircum\textasciicircum +circumflex, ASCII, in text +ASCII circumflex, in text +ASCII circumflex: ^. + +\textasciitilde\textasciitilde +tilde, ASCII, in text +ASCII tilde, in text +ASCII tilde: ~. + +\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered +asterisk, centered, in text +centered asterisk, in text +Centered asterisk: *. + +\textbackslash\textbackslash +backslash, in text +Backslash: \. + +\textbar\textbar +vertical bar, in text +bar, vertical, in text +Vertical bar: |. + +\textbardbl\textbardbl +vertical bar, double, in text +bar, double vertical, in text +double vertical bar, in text +Double vertical bar. + +\textbigcircle\textbigcircle +big circle symbols, in text +circle symbol, big, in text +Big circle symbol. + +\textbraceleft\textbraceleft +left brace, in text +brace, left, in text +Left brace: {. + +\textbraceright\textbraceright +right brace, in text +brace, right, in text +Right brace: }. + +\textbullet\textbullet +bullet, in text +Bullet: •. + +\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} +circled letter, in text +letter in a circle, as in ®. + +\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark +\textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark +\textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmark +composite word mark, in text +cap height +ascender height +Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form has the ascender height. -\textdagger -dagger, in textDagger: \dag. - -\textdaggerdbl -dagger, double, in textdouble dagger, in textDouble dagger: \ddag. - -\textdollar (or $) -dollar signcurrency, dollarDollar sign: $. - -\textemdash (or ---) -em-dashEm-dash: — (for punctuation). - -\textendash (or --) -e-dashEn-dash: — (for ranges). - -\texteuro -euro symbolcurrency, euroThe Euro symbol: €. - -\textexclamdown (or !`) -exclamation point, upside-downUpside down exclamation point: ¡. - -\textgreater -greater than symbol, in textGreater than: >. - -\textless -less than symbol, in textLess than: <. - -\textleftarrow -arrow, left, in textleft arrow, in textLeft arrow. - -\textordfeminine -\textordmasculine -feminine ordinal symbolmasculine ordinal symbolordinals, feminine and masculineSpanish ordinals, feminine and masculineFeminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. - -\textperiodcentered -period, centered, in textcentered period, in textCentered period: \cdot. - -\textquestiondown (or ?`) -questionation point, upside-downUpside down questionation point: ¿. - -\textquotedblleft (or ``) -left quote, doubledouble left quoteDouble left quote: “. - -\textquotedblright (or ') -right quote, doubledouble right quoteDouble right quote: ”. - -\textquoteleft (or `) -left quote, singlesingle left quoteSingle left quote: `. - -\textquoteright (or ') -right quote, singlesingle right quoteSingle right quote: '. - -\textquotestraightbase -\textquotestraightdblbase -quote, straight basestraight quote, basedouble quote, straight basestraight double quote, baseSingle and double straight quotes on the baseline. - -\textregistered -registered symbolRegistered symbol: ®. - -\textrightarrow -arrow, right, in textright arrow, in textRight arrow. - -\textthreequartersemdash -three-quarters em-dashem-dash, three-quarters“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - -\texttrademark -trademark symbolTrademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. - -\texttwelveudash -two-thirds em-dashem-dash, two-thirds“Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - -\textunderscore -underscore, in textUnderscore: _. - -\textvisiblespace -visible space symbol, in textVisible space symbol. +\textdagger\textdagger +dagger, in text +Dagger: \dag. + +\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl +dagger, double, in text +double dagger, in text +Double dagger: \ddag. + +\textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $) +dollar sign +currency, dollar +Dollar sign: $. + +\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) +em-dash +Em-dash: — (for punctuation). + +\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) +e-dash +En-dash: — (for ranges). + +\texteuro\texteuro +euro symbol +currency, euro +The Euro symbol: €. + +\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) +exclamation point, upside-down +Upside down exclamation point: ¡. + +\textgreater\textgreater +greater than symbol, in text +Greater than: >. + +\textless\textless +less than symbol, in text +Less than: <. + +\textleftarrow\textleftarrow +arrow, left, in text +left arrow, in text +Left arrow. + +\textordfeminine\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine\textordmasculine +feminine ordinal symbol +masculine ordinal symbol +ordinals, feminine and masculine +Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine +Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. + +\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered +period, centered, in text +centered period, in text +Centered period: \cdot. + +\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) +questionation point, upside-down +Upside down questionation point: ¿. + +\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) +left quote, double +double left quote +Double left quote: “. + +\textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ') +right quote, double +double right quote +Double right quote: ”. + +\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) +left quote, single +single left quote +Single left quote: ‘. + +\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') +right quote, single +single right quote +Single right quote: ’. + +\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase +\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase +quote, straight base +straight quote, base +double quote, straight base +straight double quote, base +Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +\textregistered\textregistered +registered symbol +Registered symbol: ®. + +\textrightarrow\textrightarrow +arrow, right, in text +right arrow, in text +Right arrow. + +\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash +three-quarters em-dash +em-dash, three-quarters +“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +\texttrademark\texttrademark +trademark symbol +Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. + +\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash +two-thirds em-dash +em-dash, two-thirds +“Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +\textunderscore\textunderscore +underscore, in text +Underscore: _. + +\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace +visible space symbol, in text +Visible space symbol. - Accents -accentscharacters, accentedletters, accented -&latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and +accents +characters, accented +letters, accented + +&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. @@ -4850,150 +5558,249 @@ the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. -\" -\capitaldieresis -\" (umlaut accent)\capitaldieresisumlaut accentdieresis accentProduces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. - -\' -\capitalacute -\' (acute accent)\capitalacuteacute accentProduces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing +\" +\capitaldieresis +\" (umlaut accent) +\capitaldieresis +umlaut accent +dieresis accent +Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. + +\' +\capitalacute +\’ (acute accent) +\capitalacute +acute accent +Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column -(see ). - -\. -\. (dot-over accent)dot accentdot-over accentProduces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. - -\= -\capitalmacron -\= (macron accent)\capitalmacronmacron accentoverbar accentbar-over accentProduces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. - -\^ -\capitalcircumflex -\^ (circumflex accent)\capitalcircumflexcircumflex accenthat accentProduces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. - -\` -\capitalgrave -\` (grave accent)\capitalgravegrave accentProduces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the +(see tabbing). + +\. +\. (dot-over accent) +dot accent +dot-over accent +Produces a dot accent over the following, as in ȯ. + +\= +\capitalmacron +\= (macron accent) +\capitalmacron +macron accent +overbar accent +bar-over accent +Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in ō. + +\^ +\capitalcircumflex +\^ (circumflex accent) +\capitalcircumflex +circumflex accent +hat accent +Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. + +\` +\capitalgrave +\‘ (grave accent) +\capitalgrave +grave accent +Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin -(see ). - -\~ -\capitaltilde -\~ (tilde accent)\capitaltildetilde accentProduces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. - -\b -\b (bar-under accent)bar-under accentProduces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. - -\c -\capitalcedilla -\c (cedilla accent)\capitalcedillacedilla accentProduces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. - -\d -\capitaldotaccent -\d (dot-under accent)\capitaldotaccentdot-under accentProduces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. - -\H -\capitalhungarumlaut -\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)\capitalhungarumlauthungarian umlaut accentProduces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. - -\i -\i (dotless i)dotless iProduces a dotless i, as in `i'. - -\j -\j (dotless j)dotless jProduces a dotless j, as in `j'. - -\k -\capitalogonek -\k (ogonek)\capitalogonekogonekProduces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in +(see tabbing). + +\~ +\capitaltilde +\~ (tilde accent) +\capitaltilde +tilde accent +Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. + +\b +\b (bar-under accent) +bar-under accent +Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. + +\c +\capitalcedilla +\c (cedilla accent) +\capitalcedilla +cedilla accent +Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. + +\d +\capitaldotaccent +\d (dot-under accent) +\capitaldotaccent +dot-under accent +Produces a dot accent under the following, as in ọ. + +\H +\capitalhungarumlaut +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) +\capitalhungarumlaut +hungarian umlaut accent +Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in ő. + +\i +\i (dotless i) +dotless i +Produces a dotless i, as in ‘i’. + +\j +\j (dotless j) +dotless j +Produces a dotless j, as in ‘j’. + +\k +\capitalogonek +\k (ogonek) +\capitalogonek +ogonek +Produces a letter with ogonek, as in ‘ǫ’. Not available in the OT1 encoding. -\r -\capitalring -\r (ring accent)\capitalringring accentProduces a ring accent, as in `o*'. - -\t -\capitaltie -\newtie -\capitalnewtie -\t (tie-after accent)\capitaltie\newtie\capitalnewtietie-after accentProduces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The +\r +\capitalring +\r (ring accent) +\capitalring +ring accent +Produces a ring accent, as in ‘o*’. + +\t +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +\t (tie-after accent) +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +tie-after accent +Produces a tie-after accent, as in ‘oo[’. The \newtie form is centered in its box. -\u -\capitalbreve -\u (breve accent)\capitalbrevebreve accentProduces a breve accent, as in `o('. - -\underbar -\underbarunderbarNot exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +\u +\capitalbreve +\u (breve accent) +\capitalbreve +breve accent +Produces a breve accent, as in ‘ŏ’. + +\underbar +\underbar +underbar +Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through -descenders. See also \underline in . +descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. -\v -\capitalcaron -\v (breve accent)\capitalcaronhacek accentcheck accentcaron accentProduces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. +\v +\capitalcaron +\v (breve accent) +\capitalcaron +hacek accent +check accent +caron accent +Produces a háček (check, caron) accent, as in ‘ǒ’. - - + Non-English characters -special charactersnon-English characterscharacters, non-Englishletters, non-English +special characters +non-English characters +characters, non-English +letters, non-English + Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly used in languages other than English. -\aa -\AA -\aa (å)\AA (Å)aringå and Å. - -\ae -\AE -\ae (æ)\AE (Æ)ae ligatureæ and Æ. - -\dh -\DH -\dh (æ)\DH (Æ)Icelandic etheth, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. - -\dj -\DJ -\dj\DJxxxx - -\ij -\IJ -\ij (ij)\IJ (IJ)ij letter, Dutchij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). - -\l -\L -\l (/l)\L (/L)polish l/l and /L. - -\ng -\NG -\ng\NGxxxx - -\o -\O -\o (ø)\O (Ø)oslashø and Ø. - -\oe -\OE -\oe (œ)\OE (Œ)oe ligatureœ and Œ. - -\ss -\SS -\ss (ß)\SS (SS)es-zet German lettersharp S lettersß and SS. - -\th -\TH -\th (þ)\TH (Þ)Icelandic thornthorn, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. + +\aa +\AA +\aa (å) +\AA (Å) +aring +å and Å. + +\ae +\AE +\ae (æ) +\AE (Æ) +ae ligature +æ and Æ. + +\dh +\DH +\dh (æ) +\DH (Æ) +Icelandic eth +eth, Icelandic letter +Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. + +\dj +\DJ +\dj +\DJ +xxxx + +\ij +\IJ +\ij (ij) +\IJ (IJ) +ij letter, Dutch +ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). + +\l +\L +\l (ł) +\L (Ł) +polish l +ł and Ł. + +\ng +\NG +\ng +\NG +xxxx + +\o +\O +\o (ø) +\O (Ø) +oslash +ø and Ø. + +\oe +\OE +\oe (œ) +\OE (Œ) +oe ligature +œ and Œ. + +\ss +\SS +\ss (ß) +\SS (SS) +es-zet German letter +sharp S letters +ß and SS. + +\th +\TH +\th (þ) +\TH (Þ) +Icelandic thorn +thorn, Icelandic letter +Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. - - + <literal>\rule</literal> \rule + Synopsis: \rule[raise]{width}{thickness} @@ -5001,28 +5808,29 @@ used in languages other than English. The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or rectangles. The arguments are: -raise -How high to raise the rule (optional). +raise +How high to raise the rule (optional). -width -The length of the rule (mandatory). +width +The length of the rule (mandatory). -thickness -The thickness of the rule (mandatory). +thickness +The thickness of the rule (mandatory). - - + <literal>\today</literal> \today -The \today command produces today's date, in the format -‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, `July 4, 1976'. + +The \today command produces today’s date, in the format +‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, ‘July 4, 1976’. It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and -\year (see ) to do this. It is not +\year (see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not updated as the program runs. -datetime packageThe datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety +datetime package +The datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety of other date formats. @@ -5030,39 +5838,44 @@ of other date formats. Splitting the input -splitting the input fileinput file +splitting the input file +input file + A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into +input in a single large file, it’s more efficient to split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when you run &latex;. - + <literal>\include</literal> \include + Synopsis: \include{file} If no \includeonly command is present, the \include command executes \clearpage to start a new page -(see ), then reads file, then does another +(see \clearpage), then reads file, then does another \clearpage. Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are only run if file is listed as an argument to \includeonly. See the next section. -nested \include, not allowedThe \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +nested \include, not allowed +The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read by another \include command. - + \<literal>includeonly</literal> \includeonly + Synopsis: \includeonly{file1,file2,...} @@ -5077,9 +5890,10 @@ effective. - + \input \input + Synopsis: \input{file} @@ -5088,15 +5902,15 @@ effective. and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at that point. -If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or -‘foo.bar’), it is first tried with that extension (‘foo.tex’ -or ‘foo.bar.tex’). If that is not found, the original file -is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). +If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or +‘foo.bar’), it is first tried with that extension (‘foo.tex’ +or ‘foo.bar.tex’). If that is not found, the original file +is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). - + Front/back matter @@ -5105,7 +5919,10 @@ is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.barTables of contents table of contents, creating -\tableofcontents.toc fileA table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents + +\tableofcontents +.toc file +A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must have generated a .toc file. @@ -5115,78 +5932,87 @@ not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command. -\listoffigures\listoftablesThe analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables +\listoffigures +\listoftables +The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. -\nofilesThe command \nofiles overrides these commands, and +\nofiles +The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and prevents any of these lists from being generated. - + \addcontentsline -\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}table of contents entry, manually adding +\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +table of contents entry, manually adding + The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: -ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). -unit -The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the +unit +The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the following, matching the value of the ext argument: -toc -The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, +toc +The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, section, subsection, subsubsection. -lof -For the list of figures. -lot -For the list of tables. +lof +For the list of figures. +lot +For the list of tables. - -entry -The actual text of the entry. +entry +The actual text of the entry. - -\contentslineWhat is written to the .ext file is the +\contentsline +What is written to the .ext file is the command \contentsline{unit}{name}. - + \addtocontents \addtocontents{ext}{text} + The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text (or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. -ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written: +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). -text -The text to be written. +text +The text to be written. - Glossaries glossaries -\makeglossaryThe command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. + +\makeglossary +The command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. -\glossary.glo fileThe command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for +\glossary +.glo file +The command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. -\glossaryentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command +\glossaryentry +Specifically, what gets written is the command \glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. @@ -5198,44 +6024,60 @@ glossaries. Indexes indexes -\makeindexThe command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in + +\makeindex +The command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in the preamble. -\index.idx fileThe command \index{text} writes an index entry for +\index +.idx file +The command \index{text} writes an index entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. -\indexentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command +\indexentry +Specifically, what gets written is the command \indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. -`see' and `see also' index entriesTo generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a +‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries +To generate a index entry for ‘bar’ that says ‘See foo’, use a vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso -instead of see to make a `See also' entry. +instead of see to make a ‘See also’ entry. -\seename\alsonameThe text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' +\seename +\alsoname +The text ‘See’ is defined by the macro \seename, and ‘See also’ by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other languages. -makeindex programxindy program.ind fileThe generated .idx file is then sorted with an external +makeindex program +xindy program +.ind file +The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external command, usually either makeindex (http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset the index. -printindexmakeidx packageThe index is usually generated with the \printindex command. +printindex +makeidx package +The index is usually generated with the \printindex command. This is defined in the makeidx package, so \usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. -indexspaceThe rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new -letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘10pt plus5pt -minus3pt’. +indexspace +The rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new +letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘10pt plus5pt +minus3pt’. -showidx packageThe showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in +showidx package +The showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. -multind packageThe multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the +multind package +The multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. @@ -5244,7 +6086,9 @@ preparing the index. Letters -letterscreating letters +letters +creating letters + You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at once, although you can make just one if you so desire. @@ -5271,8 +6115,9 @@ the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter closes with a \closing command. -\\ for lettersAfter the closing, you can have additional material. The -\cc command produces the usual “cc: …”. There's also a +\\ for letters +After the closing, you can have additional material. The +\cc command produces the usual “cc: …”. There’s also a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use \\ to separate the items. @@ -5280,25 +6125,28 @@ commands, use \\ to separate the items. - + \address{<replaceable>return-address}</replaceable> \address + The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard -letterhead. (See , for details on your local +will be formatted for copying onto your organisation’s standard +letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter. - + <literal>\cc</literal> -\cccc list, in letters +\cc +cc list, in letters + Synopsis: \cc{name1\\name2} @@ -5308,10 +6156,13 @@ printed on a separate line. - + <literal>\closing</literal> -\closingletters, endingclosing letters +\closing +letters, ending +closing letters + Synopsis: \closing{text} @@ -5321,10 +6172,12 @@ printed on a separate line. - + <literal>\encl</literal> -\enclenclosure list +\encl +enclosure list + Synopsis: \encl{line1\\line2} @@ -5333,19 +6186,21 @@ printed on a separate line. - + <literal>\location</literal> \location + \location{address} -This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears +This modifies your organisation’s standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. - + <literal>\makelabels</literal> \makelabels + \makelabels{number} If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of @@ -5354,9 +6209,10 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. - + <literal>\name</literal> \name + \name{June Davenport} Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return @@ -5364,9 +6220,11 @@ address. - + <literal>\opening{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> -\openingletters, starting +\opening +letters, starting + Synopsis: \opening{text} @@ -5379,26 +6237,30 @@ For instance: - + <literal>\ps</literal> -\pspostscript, in letters +\ps +postscript, in letters + Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after \closing. - + <literal>\signature{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> \signature + Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within text as usual. - + <literal>\startbreaks</literal> \startbreaks + \startbreaks Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. @@ -5406,9 +6268,10 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within - + <literal>\stopbreaks</literal> \stopbreaks + \stopbreaks Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. @@ -5416,9 +6279,10 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within - + <literal>\telephone</literal> \telephone + \telephone{number} This is your telephone number. This only appears if the @@ -5427,14 +6291,17 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within - + Terminal input/output -input/outputterminal input/output +input/output +terminal input/output - + + <literal>\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> \typein + Synopsis: \typein[\cmd]{msg} @@ -5449,9 +6316,10 @@ redefined to be the typed input. - + <literal>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> \typeout + Synopsis: \typeout{msg} @@ -5461,7 +6329,7 @@ Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand\renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed. -&latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space +&latex;’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in @@ -5473,6 +6341,7 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in Command line command line + The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; &tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You @@ -5483,23 +6352,27 @@ command; e.g. will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. -*’ promptprompt, ‘*\stopIf &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a -‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop +*’ prompt +prompt, ‘* +\stop +If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a +‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document. - + Document templates document templates + Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional templates are collected at -http://www.howtotex.com/templates. +be useful. Additional template resources are listed +http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. - + <literal>book</literal> template \documentclass{book} @@ -5521,7 +6394,7 @@ The end. - + <literal>beamer</literal> template The beamer class creates slides presentations. @@ -5551,7 +6424,7 @@ The end. - + <literal>tugboat</literal> template TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, @@ -5561,13 +6434,13 @@ The end. \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{ifpdf} \ifpdf - \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black, - urlcolor=black]{hyperref} +\usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black, + urlcolor=black]{hyperref} \else - \usepackage{url} +\usepackage{url} \fi -\title{Example \TUB\ Article} +\title{Example \TUB\ article} % repeat info for each author. \author{First Last} @@ -5575,12 +6448,12 @@ The end. \netaddress{user (at) example dot org} \personalURL{http://example.org/~user/} -\maketitle - \begin{document} +\maketitle + \begin{abstract} -This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. +This is an example article for \TUB{}. \end{abstract} \section{Introduction} @@ -5592,22 +6465,23 @@ We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. -The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: +The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: -{\small -\begin{verbatim} +% verbatim blocks are often better in \small +\begin{verbatim}[\small] \AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW \BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe -\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas +\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe +\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS -\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug +\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP +\TUB \TUG \tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE \Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag \careof \thinskip -\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> <fred> @@ -5615,14 +6489,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: \sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4 \booktitle{Book of Fred} \end{verbatim} -} For more information, see the ltubguid document at: \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat} +(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references). Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - \bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX @@ -5633,17 +6506,17 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - + Concept Index - + - + Command Index - + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html index 08033cf85b3..399a533ae25 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ - +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. --> + -LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2011) +LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2012) - - + + - + - + @@ -78,15 +77,19 @@ ul.no-bullet {list-style: none} +

    LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2012)

    + + + + -

    LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2011)

    -

    Short Table of Contents

    +

    Short Table of Contents

    -

    Table of Contents

    +

    Table of Contents

    -

    2 Overview of LaTeX

    +

    2 Overview of LaTeX

    What is LaTeX?

    @@ -523,8 +549,7 @@ text that can be written in any reasonable editor. It produces at least three files as output:

      -
    1. -The main output file, which is one of: +
    2. The main output file, which is one of:
      .dvi
      @@ -564,16 +589,14 @@ the XeTeX engine (http://tug.org/xetex).

      Many other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) exist, which can produce HTML, XML, and other things.

      -
    3. - +
    4. The “transcript” or ‘.log’ file that contains summary information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. -
    5. - +
    6. An “auxiliary” or ‘.aux’ file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for things such as cross-references. @@ -603,7 +626,7 @@ explicitly directed to do otherwise. Next: , Previous: Overview, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      3 Starting & ending

      +

      3 Starting & ending

      @@ -634,7 +657,7 @@ and the \begin{document} commands (this area is called the Next: , Previous: Starting & ending, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      4 Document classes

      +

      4 Document classes

      @@ -665,7 +688,7 @@ classes are available as add-ons; see Overview):

      Standard options are described below.

      - @@ -677,7 +700,7 @@ classes are available as add-ons; see Overview): Up: Document classes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      4.1 Document class options

      +

      4.1 Document class options

      @@ -817,7 +840,7 @@ by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with Next: , Previous: Document classes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      5 Typefaces

      +

      5 Typefaces

      @@ -826,11 +849,11 @@ Next: , Previous: -• Font styles:   Select roman, italics etc. +• Font styles:  Select roman, italics etc. -• Font sizes:   Select point size. +• Font sizes:  Select point size. -• Low-level font commands:   Select encoding, family, series, shape. +• Low-level font commands:  Select encoding, family, series, shape. @@ -842,7 +865,7 @@ and a style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here. Next: , Up: Typefaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      5.1 Font styles

      +

      5.1 Font styles

      @@ -850,19 +873,21 @@ Next: , Up: The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.

      -

      These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. +

      This first group of commands is typically used like +\textit{italic text}. The corresponding command in +parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no arguments. The +scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command +or the end of the current group.

      The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif.

      -

      You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, -\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. +

      You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for +instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}.

      -
      +

      These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the +

      \textrm (\rmfamily)
      @@ -1044,7 +1069,7 @@ things. Next: , Previous: Font styles, Up: Typefaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      5.2 Font sizes

      +

      5.2 Font sizes

      @@ -1052,7 +1077,8 @@ Next:

      Document class options). +‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class +options).

      @@ -1092,7 +1118,7 @@ these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. Previous: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      5.3 Low-level font commands

      +

      5.3 Low-level font commands

      @@ -1200,21 +1226,21 @@ followed by \selectfont. Next: , Previous: Typefaces, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      6 Layout

      +

      6 Layout

      Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.

      - - - - - @@ -1226,7 +1252,7 @@ Next: , Previous: < Next: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

      -

      6.1 \onecolumn

      +

      6.1 \onecolumn

      @@ -1241,7 +1267,7 @@ single-column output. This is the default. Next: , Previous: \onecolumn, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

      -

      6.2 \twocolumn

      +

      6.2 \twocolumn

      @@ -1324,7 +1350,7 @@ and the main text. Default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. Next: , Previous: \twocolumn, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

      -

      6.3 \flushbottom

      +

      6.3 \flushbottom

      @@ -1343,7 +1369,7 @@ page. Next: , Previous: \flushbottom, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

      -

      6.4 \raggedbottom

      +

      6.4 \raggedbottom

      @@ -1359,7 +1385,7 @@ stretched. Previous: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

      -

      6.5 Page layout parameters

      +

      6.5 Page layout parameters

      @@ -1473,7 +1499,7 @@ same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at ‘10p Next: , Previous: Layout, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      7 Sectioning

      +

      7 Sectioning

      Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: @@ -1514,10 +1540,8 @@ Next: , section title can appear in two other places:

        -
      1. -The table of contents. -
      2. -The running head at the top of the page. +
      3. The table of contents. +
      4. The running head at the top of the page.

      You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. @@ -1568,18 +1592,18 @@ The setting Next: , Previous: Sectioning, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      8 Cross references

      +

      8 Cross references

      One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.”

      - - - @@ -1591,7 +1615,7 @@ the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” Next: , Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

      -

      8.1 \label

      +

      8.1 \label

      Synopsis: @@ -1640,7 +1664,7 @@ a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: Next: , Previous: \label, Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

      -

      8.2 \pageref{key}

      +

      8.2 \pageref{key}

      @@ -1663,7 +1687,7 @@ the place in the text where the corresponding Previous: \pageref, Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

      -

      8.3 \ref{key}

      +

      8.3 \ref{key}

      @@ -1690,7 +1714,7 @@ such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare nu Next: , Previous: Cross references, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9 Environments

      +

      9 Environments

      @@ -1706,61 +1730,61 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - @@ -1772,7 +1796,7 @@ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: Next: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.1 abstract

      +

      9.1 abstract

      @@ -1794,7 +1818,7 @@ Next: , Up: , Previous: abstract, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.2 array

      +

      9.2 array

      @@ -1862,7 +1886,7 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. Next: , Previous: array, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.3 center

      +

      9.3 center

      @@ -1883,7 +1907,7 @@ margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the string \\.

      - @@ -1895,7 +1919,7 @@ string \\. Up: center   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.3.1 \centering

      +

      9.3.1 \centering

      @@ -1930,7 +1954,7 @@ second line \\ Next: , Previous: center, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.4 description

      +

      9.4 description

      @@ -1970,7 +1994,7 @@ plain typewriter}]. Next: , Previous: description, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.5 displaymath

      +

      9.5 displaymath

      @@ -2004,7 +2028,7 @@ equation number, use the equation environment (see , Previous: displaymath, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.6 document

      +

      9.6 document

      @@ -2019,7 +2043,7 @@ It is required in every LaTeX document. See St Next: , Previous: document, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.7 enumerate

      +

      9.7 enumerate

      @@ -2068,7 +2092,8 @@ that item.

      The enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can -use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase +use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & +\renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters:

      @@ -2085,12 +2110,24 @@ letters: Next: , Previous: enumerate, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.8 eqnarray

      +

      9.8 eqnarray

      - + + + + +

      First, a caveat: the eqnarray environment has some infelicities +which cannot be overcome; the article “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars +Madsen describes them in detail +(http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). The bottom +line is that it is better to use the align environment (and +others) from the amsmath package. +

      +

      Nevertheless, here is a description of eqnarray: +

      \begin{eqnarray}  (or eqnarray*)
       formula1 \\
      @@ -2130,7 +2167,7 @@ zero width.
       Next: , Previous: eqnarray, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.9 equation

      +

      9.9 equation

      @@ -2156,7 +2193,7 @@ on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin. Next: , Previous: equation, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.10 figure

      +

      9.10 figure

      @@ -2176,6 +2213,8 @@ Figures will not be split between two pages.

      When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns).

      + +

      The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float: @@ -2196,10 +2235,15 @@ FAQ: http://w

      h

      (Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment -appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is -automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, -use the float and use its H placement letter. (That -package also provides other options.) +appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; t is +automatically added. +

      + + +

      To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, you can +\usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it +defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere.

      p
      @@ -2207,13 +2251,21 @@ package also provides other options.) containing no text, only floats.

      +
      !
      +

      Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX +ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear +and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page. +The ! specifier does not mean “put the float here”; +see above. +

      +

      The standard report and article classes use the default placement tbp.

      -

      The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. -you wish. +

      The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, +etc. you wish.

      The \caption command specifies caption text for the @@ -2221,6 +2273,9 @@ figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text (see Tables of contents).

      +

      Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and +non-float text: +

      The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at @@ -2234,6 +2289,25 @@ the bottom; default ‘.3’. default ‘.5’.

      +
      \textfraction + +
      +

      Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a +different page. The default is ‘.2’. +

      +
      +
      \topfraction + +
      +

      Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default ‘.7’. +

      +
      + +

      Parameters relating to vertical space around floats: +

      +
      \floatsep
      @@ -2254,25 +2328,36 @@ default ‘.5’.

      Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. +

      +
      + +

      Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page:

      - -
      \textfraction - +
      +
      \bottomnumber +
      -

      Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too -much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a -different page. The default is ‘.2’. +

      Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; +default 1.

      -
      \topfraction - +
      \topnumber +
      -

      Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before -floats; default is ‘.7’. +

      Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; +default 2.

      +
      \totalnumber + +
      +

      Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. +

      +

      The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats: +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats. +


      @@ -2281,7 +2366,7 @@ floats; default is ‘.7’. Next: , Previous: figure, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.11 flushleft

      +

      9.11 flushleft

      @@ -2300,7 +2385,7 @@ consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string \\.

      - @@ -2312,7 +2397,7 @@ right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. Up: flushleft   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.11.1 \raggedright

      +

      9.11.1 \raggedright

      @@ -2336,7 +2421,7 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. Next: , Previous: flushleft, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.12 flushright

      +

      9.12 flushright

      @@ -2355,7 +2440,7 @@ consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.

      - @@ -2367,7 +2452,7 @@ left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. Up: flushright   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.12.1 \raggedleft

      +

      9.12.1 \raggedleft

      @@ -2391,7 +2476,7 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. Next: , Previous: flushright, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.13 itemize

      +

      9.13 itemize

      @@ -2420,7 +2505,7 @@ There must be at least one \item command within the environment.

      1. • (bullet) -
      2. -- (bold en-dash) +
      3. -- (bold en-dash)
      4. * (asterisk)
      5. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period)
      @@ -2562,7 +2647,7 @@ see \parskip): Next: , Previous: itemize, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.14 letter environment: writing letters

      +

      9.14 letter environment: writing letters

      This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. @@ -2575,7 +2660,7 @@ Next: , Previous: , Previous: letter, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.15 list

      +

      9.15 list

      @@ -2611,7 +2696,7 @@ empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. Next: , Previous: list, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.16 math

      +

      9.16 math

      @@ -2636,7 +2721,7 @@ See Math formulas. Next: , Previous: math, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.17 minipage

      +

      9.17 minipage

      @@ -2681,7 +2766,7 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. Next: , Previous: minipage, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18 picture

      +

      9.18 picture

      @@ -2764,33 +2849,33 @@ be the lower left corner of the box.

      The picture commands are described in the following sections.

      - - - - - - - - - - - - - - @@ -2802,7 +2887,7 @@ be the lower left corner of the box. Next: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.1 \circle

      +

      9.18.1 \circle

      @@ -2823,7 +2908,7 @@ draws a solid circle. Next: , Previous: \circle, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.2 \makebox

      +

      9.18.2 \makebox

      \makebox(width,height)[position]{...} @@ -2864,7 +2949,7 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: Next: , Previous: \makebox (picture), Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.3 \framebox

      +

      9.18.3 \framebox

      Synopsis: @@ -2891,7 +2976,7 @@ and the contents of the box. Next: , Previous: \framebox (picture), Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.4 \dashbox

      +

      9.18.4 \dashbox

      @@ -2916,7 +3001,7 @@ multiples of the dlen. Next: , Previous: \dashbox, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.5 \frame

      +

      9.18.5 \frame

      Synopsis: @@ -2937,7 +3022,7 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. Next: , Previous: \frame, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.6 \line

      +

      9.18.6 \line

      Synopsis: @@ -2962,7 +3047,7 @@ see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN. Next: , Previous: \line, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.7 \linethickness

      +

      9.18.7 \linethickness

      The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness @@ -2980,7 +3065,7 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. Next: , Previous: \linethickness, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.8 \thicklines

      +

      9.18.8 \thicklines

      The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for @@ -2995,7 +3080,7 @@ cf. \linethickness and , Previous: \thicklines, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.9 \thinlines

      +

      9.18.9 \thinlines

      The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for @@ -3010,7 +3095,7 @@ cf. \linethickness and , Previous: \thinlines, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.10 \multiput

      +

      9.18.10 \multiput

      Synopsis: @@ -3031,7 +3116,7 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position Next: , Previous: \multiput, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.11 \oval

      +

      9.18.11 \oval

      Synopsis: @@ -3071,7 +3156,7 @@ boxes with rounded corners. Next: , Previous: \oval, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.12 \put

      +

      9.18.12 \put

      @@ -3088,7 +3173,7 @@ argument at the given coordinates. Next: , Previous: \put, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.13 \shortstack

      +

      9.18.13 \shortstack

      Synopsis: @@ -3123,7 +3208,7 @@ positions are: Previous: \shortstack, Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.18.14 \vector

      +

      9.18.14 \vector

      Synopsis: @@ -3144,7 +3229,7 @@ length and slope. The x and y values must lie between Next: , Previous: picture, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.19 quotation

      +

      9.19 quotation

      @@ -3174,7 +3259,7 @@ normally. Next: , Previous: quotation, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.20 quote

      +

      9.20 quote

      @@ -3203,11 +3288,11 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph. Next: , Previous: quote, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.21 tabbing

      +

      9.21 tabbing

      - +

      Synopsis: @@ -3358,7 +3443,7 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ Next: , Previous: tabbing, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.22 table

      +

      9.22 table

      @@ -3398,7 +3483,7 @@ you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table. Next: , Previous: table, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.23 tabular

      +

      9.23 tabular

      @@ -3412,7 +3497,7 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ \end{tabular} -

      or +

      or

      \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
      @@ -3445,7 +3530,8 @@ the environment.
       
      t

      align on top row -

      +

      +
      b

      align on bottom row

      @@ -3477,13 +3563,19 @@ intercolumn material.
      @{text}

      This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space -between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in -text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression -causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all -subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep -command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not -suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be -used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. +before the adjacent item must be included in text. +

      +

      To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given +column, you have to load the array package and use the +>{...} specifier. +

      + +

      An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression causes an +extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent +columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. +Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed +by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only +in an @-expression in the cols argument.

      p{wd}
      @@ -3493,12 +3585,9 @@ used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. appear in the item, except in the following situations:

        -
      1. -inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. -
      2. -inside an explicit \parbox. -
      3. -in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft +
      4. inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. +
      5. inside an explicit \parbox. +
      6. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a p-column element.
      @@ -3547,16 +3636,17 @@ in the tabular and array environments; default is &lsq
      -

      These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: +

      The following commands can be used inside a tabular +environment:

      - - - - @@ -3568,7 +3658,7 @@ in the tabular and array environments; default is &lsq Next: , Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.23.1 \multicolumn

      +

      9.23.1 \multicolumn

      Synopsis: @@ -3603,7 +3693,7 @@ for flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument, Next: , Previous: \multicolumn, Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.23.2 \cline

      +

      9.23.2 \cline

      Synopsis: @@ -3624,7 +3714,7 @@ which are specified in the mandatory argument. Next: , Previous: \cline, Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.23.3 \hline

      +

      9.23.3 \hline

      The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the @@ -3640,7 +3730,7 @@ of a table. Previous: \hline, Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.23.4 \vline

      +

      9.23.4 \vline

      The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full @@ -3656,7 +3746,7 @@ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an Next: , Previous: tabular, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.24 thebibliography

      +

      9.24 thebibliography

      @@ -3689,13 +3779,13 @@ commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc.

      - - - - @@ -3707,7 +3797,7 @@ less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. Next: , Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.24.1 \bibitem

      +

      9.24.1 \bibitem

      @@ -3737,7 +3827,7 @@ associated label. Next: , Previous: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.24.2 \cite

      +

      9.24.2 \cite

      @@ -3764,7 +3854,7 @@ citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce Next: , Previous: \cite, Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.24.3 \nocite

      +

      9.24.3 \nocite

      \nocite{key_list} @@ -3780,7 +3870,7 @@ which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the ‘.aux’ Previous: \nocite, Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.24.4 Using BibTeX

      +

      9.24.4 Using BibTeX

      @@ -3839,7 +3929,7 @@ BibTeX format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and Next: , Previous: thebibliography, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.25 theorem

      +

      9.25 theorem

      @@ -3865,7 +3955,7 @@ possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem Next: , Previous: theorem, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.26 titlepage

      +

      9.26 titlepage

      @@ -3896,7 +3986,7 @@ produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment. Next: , Previous: titlepage, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.27 verbatim

      +

      9.27 verbatim

      @@ -3922,7 +4012,7 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter.

      The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt).

      - @@ -3933,7 +4023,7 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter. Up: verbatim   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.27.1 \verb

      +

      9.27.1 \verb

      @@ -3963,7 +4053,7 @@ verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. Previous: verbatim, Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

      -

      9.28 verse

      +

      9.28 verse

      @@ -3995,7 +4085,7 @@ stanzas. Next: , Previous: Environments, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10 Line breaking

      +

      10 Line breaking

      @@ -4009,21 +4099,21 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the \\ command, and you can always manually force breaks.

      - - - - - - - - @@ -4035,7 +4125,7 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the Next: , Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.1 \\[*][morespace]

      +

      10.1 \\[*][morespace]

      @@ -4056,7 +4146,7 @@ except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. Next: , Previous: \\, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.2 \obeycr & \restorecr

      +

      10.2 \obeycr & \restorecr

      @@ -4076,7 +4166,7 @@ in the output. Next: , Previous: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.3 \newline

      +

      10.3 \newline

      @@ -4092,7 +4182,7 @@ mode. Next: , Previous: \newline, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.4 \- (discretionary hyphen)

      +

      10.4 \- (discretionary hyphen)

      @@ -4115,7 +4205,7 @@ that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. Next: , Previous: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.5 \fussy

      +

      10.5 \fussy

      The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes TeX @@ -4133,7 +4223,7 @@ words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. Next: , Previous: \fussy, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.6 \sloppy

      +

      10.6 \sloppy

      The declaration \sloppy makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose @@ -4149,7 +4239,7 @@ interword spacing. Next: , Previous: \sloppy, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.7 \hyphenation

      +

      10.7 \hyphenation

      @@ -4178,7 +4268,7 @@ misses the hyphenations in these words): Previous: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      10.8 \linebreak & \nolinebreak

      +

      10.8 \linebreak & \nolinebreak

      @@ -4208,7 +4298,7 @@ from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from Next: , Previous: Line breaking, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      11 Page breaking

      +

      11 Page breaking

      @@ -4217,15 +4307,15 @@ accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.

      - - - - - @@ -4237,7 +4327,7 @@ but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. Next: , Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      11.1 \cleardoublepage

      +

      11.1 \cleardoublepage

      @@ -4255,7 +4345,7 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand Next: , Previous: \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      11.2 \clearpage

      +

      11.2 \clearpage

      @@ -4271,7 +4361,7 @@ figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. Next: , Previous: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      11.3 \newpage

      +

      11.3 \newpage

      @@ -4287,7 +4377,7 @@ floats (see \clearpage above). Next: , Previous: \newpage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      11.4 \enlargethispage

      +

      11.4 \enlargethispage

      @@ -4311,7 +4401,7 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit Previous: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking   [Contents][Index]

      -

      11.5 \pagebreak & \nopagebreak

      +

      11.5 \pagebreak & \nopagebreak

      @@ -4325,8 +4415,8 @@ Previous: \enlar

      By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For -\linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out +(prevents) a page break at the current position. With +\pagebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.

      With the optional argument priority, you can convert the @@ -4342,7 +4432,7 @@ insistent the request is. Next: , Previous: Page breaking, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      12 Footnotes

      +

      12 Footnotes

      Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced @@ -4351,15 +4441,15 @@ produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the \footnotetext commands.

      - - - - - @@ -4371,7 +4461,7 @@ produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the Next: , Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      12.1 \footnote

      +

      12.1 \footnote

      Synopsis: @@ -4396,7 +4486,7 @@ tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.) Next: , Previous: \footnote, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      12.2 \footnotemark

      +

      12.2 \footnotemark

      With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the @@ -4421,7 +4511,7 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with Next: , Previous: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      12.3 \footnotetext

      +

      12.3 \footnotetext

      Synopsis: @@ -4445,7 +4535,7 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode. Next: , Previous: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      12.4 Symbolic footnotes

      +

      12.4 Symbolic footnotes

      If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing @@ -4470,7 +4560,7 @@ redefine \@fnsymbol. Previous: Symbolic footnotes, Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      12.5 Footnote parameters

      +

      12.5 Footnote parameters

      @@ -4505,28 +4595,28 @@ footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10ptCounters, Previous: Footnotes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13 Definitions

      +

      13 Definitions

      LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.

      - - - - - - - - @@ -4538,7 +4628,7 @@ Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.1 \newcommand & \renewcommand

      +

      13.1 \newcommand & \renewcommand

      @@ -4591,7 +4681,7 @@ text of the nth argument. Next: , Previous: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.2 \newcounter

      +

      13.2 \newcounter

      @@ -4617,7 +4707,7 @@ will be reset whenever countername is incremented. Next: , Previous: \newcounter, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.3 \newlength

      +

      13.3 \newlength

      @@ -4643,7 +4733,7 @@ for more information about lengths in general. Next: , Previous: \newlength, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.4 \newsavebox

      +

      13.4 \newsavebox

      Synopsis: @@ -4663,7 +4753,7 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. Next: , Previous: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.5 \newenvironment & \renewenvironment

      +

      13.5 \newenvironment & \renewenvironment

      @@ -4720,7 +4810,7 @@ may not contain any argument parameters. Next: , Previous: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.6 \newtheorem

      +

      13.6 \newtheorem

      @@ -4767,7 +4857,7 @@ not both. Next: , Previous: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.7 \newfont

      +

      13.7 \newfont

      @@ -4793,7 +4883,7 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through ‘.fd’ Previous: \newfont, Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      13.8 \protect

      +

      13.8 \protect

      @@ -4817,7 +4907,7 @@ be preceded by \protect.

      @@ -4829,7 +4919,7 @@ be preceded by \protect. Next: , Previous: Definitions, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14 Counters

      +

      14 Counters

      @@ -4849,21 +4939,21 @@ subsubsection - - - - - - - - @@ -4875,7 +4965,7 @@ subsubsection Next: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.1 \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters

      +

      14.1 \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters

      All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for instance, \alph{enumi}. @@ -4935,7 +5025,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger Next: , Previous: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.2 \usecounter{counter}

      +

      14.2 \usecounter{counter}

      @@ -4958,7 +5048,7 @@ the list items. Next: , Previous: \usecounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.3 \value{counter}

      +

      14.3 \value{counter}

      @@ -4985,7 +5075,7 @@ be used anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: Next: , Previous: \value, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.4 \setcounter{counter}{value}

      +

      14.4 \setcounter{counter}{value}

      @@ -5007,7 +5097,7 @@ Next: Next: , Previous: \setcounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.5 \addtocounter{counter}{value}

      +

      14.5 \addtocounter{counter}{value}

      The \addtocounter command increments counter by the @@ -5021,7 +5111,7 @@ amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. Next: , Previous: \addtocounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.6 \refstepcounter{counter}

      +

      14.6 \refstepcounter{counter}

      The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as @@ -5036,7 +5126,7 @@ current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. Next: , Previous: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.7 \stepcounter{counter}

      +

      14.7 \stepcounter{counter}

      The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and @@ -5050,7 +5140,7 @@ resets all subsidiary counters. Previous: \stepcounter, Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

      -

      14.8 \day \month \year: Predefined counters

      +

      14.8 \day \month \year: Predefined counters

      @@ -5072,24 +5162,24 @@ current day (see \today). Next: , Previous: Counters, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15 Lengths

      +

      15 Lengths

      A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument.

      - - - - - - @@ -5101,7 +5191,7 @@ length as an argument. Next: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15.1 \setlength{\len}{value}

      +

      15.1 \setlength{\len}{value}

      @@ -5118,7 +5208,7 @@ understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), poin Next: , Previous: \setlength, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15.2 \addtolength{\len}{amount}

      +

      15.2 \addtolength{\len}{amount}

      @@ -5134,7 +5224,7 @@ may be negative. Next: , Previous: \addtolength, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15.3 \settodepth

      +

      15.3 \settodepth

      \settodepth{\gnat}{text} @@ -5150,7 +5240,7 @@ equal to the depth of the text argument. Next: , Previous: \settodepth, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15.4 \settoheight

      +

      15.4 \settoheight

      \settoheight{\gnat}{text} @@ -5167,14 +5257,13 @@ equal to the height of the text argument. Next: , Previous: \settoheight, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15.5 \settowidth{\len}{text}

      +

      15.5 \settowidth{\len}{text}

      The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument.

      -
      @@ -5182,7 +5271,7 @@ to the width of the text argument. Previous: \settowidth, Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

      -

      15.6 Predefined lengths

      +

      15.6 Predefined lengths

      @@ -5199,8 +5288,8 @@ Previous: \settowidth

      These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the -text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + +commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width, etc., of +the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say

      @@ -5214,7 +5303,7 @@ natural size, e.g., say Next: , Previous: Lengths, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      16 Making paragraphs

      +

      16 Making paragraphs

      @@ -5224,13 +5313,13 @@ paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command.

      - - - - @@ -5242,7 +5331,7 @@ a sectioning command. Next: , Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

      -

      16.1 \indent

      +

      16.1 \indent

      @@ -5264,7 +5353,7 @@ mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt\parskip, Previous: \indent, Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

      -

      16.2 \noindent

      +

      16.2 \noindent

      @@ -5280,7 +5369,7 @@ the middle of a paragraph. Next: , Previous: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

      -

      16.3 \parskip

      +

      16.3 \parskip

      @@ -5295,7 +5384,7 @@ before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. Previous: \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs   [Contents][Index]

      -

      16.4 Marginal notes

      +

      16.4 Marginal notes

      @@ -5315,12 +5404,9 @@ where the \marginpar occurs. will be placed

        -
      • -in the right margin for one-sided layout; -
      • -in the outside margin for two-sided layout; -
      • -in the nearest margin for two-column layout. +
      • in the right margin for one-sided layout; +
      • in the outside margin for two-sided layout; +
      • in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
      @@ -5374,7 +5460,7 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. Next: , Previous: Making paragraphs, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17 Math formulas

      +

      17 Math formulas

      @@ -5436,17 +5522,17 @@ below summations. For example - - - - - - @@ -5458,7 +5544,7 @@ below summations. For example Next: , Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17.1 Subscripts & superscripts

      +

      17.1 Subscripts & superscripts

      @@ -5480,7 +5566,7 @@ superscript. Next: , Previous: Subscripts & superscripts, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17.2 Math symbols

      +

      17.2 Math symbols

      @@ -6747,7 +6833,7 @@ the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. Next: , Previous: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17.3 Math functions

      +

      17.3 Math functions

      @@ -6969,7 +7055,7 @@ spacing. Next: , Previous: Math functions, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17.4 Math accents

      +

      17.4 Math accents

      @@ -7005,7 +7091,7 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text
      -

      Math hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}. +

      Math háček (check) accent: \check{x}.

      \ddot @@ -7052,6 +7138,12 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text

      Math dotless j.

      +
      \mathring + +
      +
      +

      Math ring accent: x*.

      +
      \tilde
      @@ -7090,7 +7182,7 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text Next: , Previous: Math accents, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17.5 Spacing in math mode

      +

      17.5 Spacing in math mode

      @@ -7127,7 +7219,7 @@ commands for use in math mode: Previous: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

      -

      17.6 Math miscellany

      +

      17.6 Math miscellany

      @@ -7231,7 +7323,7 @@ descenders. Next: , Previous: Math formulas, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      18 Modes

      +

      18 Modes

      @@ -7243,12 +7335,9 @@ Next: , Previous: modes:

        -
      • -Paragraph mode -
      • -Math mode -
      • -Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short +
      • Paragraph mode +
      • Math mode +
      • Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short

      LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a @@ -7286,7 +7375,7 @@ in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. Next: , Previous: Modes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19 Page styles

      +

      19 Page styles

      @@ -7294,13 +7383,13 @@ Next: , Previous: -• \maketitle:   Generate a title page. +• \maketitle:  Generate a title page. -• \pagenumbering:   Set the style used for page numbers. +• \pagenumbering:  Set the style used for page numbers. -• \pagestyle:   Change the headings/footings style. +• \pagestyle:  Change the headings/footings style. -• \thispagestyle:   Change the headings/footings style for this page. +• \thispagestyle:  Change the headings/footings style for this page. @@ -7312,7 +7401,7 @@ the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. Next: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.1 \maketitle

      +

      19.1 \maketitle

      @@ -7371,7 +7460,7 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. Next: , Previous: \maketitle, Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.2 \pagenumbering

      +

      19.2 \pagenumbering

      @@ -7409,7 +7498,7 @@ Next: , Prev Next: , Previous: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.3 \pagestyle

      +

      19.3 \pagestyle

      @@ -7475,7 +7564,7 @@ the page. Previous: \pagestyle, Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

      -

      19.4 \thispagestyle{style}

      +

      19.4 \thispagestyle{style}

      The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the @@ -7490,7 +7579,7 @@ changes to style for the current page only. Next: , Previous: Page styles, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20 Spaces

      +

      20 Spaces

      LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. @@ -7501,31 +7590,31 @@ more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in

      - - - - - - - - - - @@ -7537,7 +7626,7 @@ Vertical space Next: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.1 \hspace

      +

      20.1 \hspace

      Synopsis: @@ -7564,7 +7653,7 @@ form. Next: , Previous: \hspace, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.2 \hfill

      +

      20.2 \hfill

      The \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has @@ -7584,7 +7673,7 @@ equivalent to \hfill. Next: , Previous: \hfill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.3 \SPACE

      +

      20.3 \SPACE

      @@ -7606,7 +7695,7 @@ are equivalent to \ . Next: , Previous: \SPACE, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.4 \@

      +

      20.4 \@

      The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a @@ -7615,15 +7704,15 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without \@:

      -
      … in C\@.  Pascal, though …
      -… in C.  Pascal, though …
      +
      … in C\@. Pascal, though …
      +… in C. Pascal, though …
       

      produces

      -

      … in C. Pascal, though … -… in C. Pascal, though … +

      … in C. Pascal, though … +… in C. Pascal, though …

      @@ -7634,7 +7723,7 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without Next: , Previous: \AT, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.5 \thinspace

      +

      20.5 \thinspace

      \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that @@ -7649,7 +7738,7 @@ in ’”. Next: , Previous: \thinspace, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.6 \/

      +

      20.6 \/

      The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a @@ -7677,7 +7766,7 @@ with pdfTeX. Next: , Previous: \/, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.7 \hrulefill

      +

      20.7 \hrulefill

      The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can @@ -7692,7 +7781,7 @@ rule. Next: , Previous: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.8 \dotfill

      +

      20.8 \dotfill

      @@ -7707,7 +7796,7 @@ with dots instead of just white space. Next: , Previous: \dotfill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.9 \addvspace

      +

      20.9 \addvspace

      @@ -7728,7 +7817,7 @@ of the total vertical space equal to length. Next: , Previous: \addvspace, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip

      +

      20.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip

      These commands produce a given amount of space.

      @@ -7766,7 +7855,7 @@ quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). Next: , Previous: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.11 \vfill

      +

      20.11 \vfill

      The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which @@ -7781,7 +7870,7 @@ can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to Previous: \vfill, Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

      -

      20.12 \vspace[*]{length}

      +

      20.12 \vspace[*]{length}

      Synopsis: @@ -7805,7 +7894,7 @@ space is not removed. Next: , Previous: Spaces, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21 Boxes

      +

      21 Boxes

      @@ -7813,23 +7902,23 @@ Next: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.1 \mbox{text}

      +

      21.1 \mbox{text}

      @@ -7857,7 +7946,7 @@ lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. Next: , Previous: \mbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.2 \fbox and \framebox

      +

      21.2 \fbox and \framebox

      @@ -7893,7 +7982,7 @@ argument.

      Next: , Previous: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.3 lrbox

      +

      21.3 lrbox

      \begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} @@ -7911,7 +8000,7 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox. Next: , Previous: lrbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.4 \makebox

      +

      21.4 \makebox

      Synopsis: @@ -7953,7 +8042,7 @@ see \makebox (picture). Next: , Previous: \makebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.5 \parbox

      +

      21.5 \parbox

      Synopsis: @@ -8014,7 +8103,7 @@ for this to work. Next: , Previous: \parbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.6 \raisebox

      +

      21.6 \raisebox

      Synopsis: @@ -8041,7 +8130,7 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth. Next: , Previous: \raisebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.7 \savebox

      +

      21.7 \savebox

      Synopsis: @@ -8063,7 +8152,7 @@ declared with \newsavebox (see \newsa Next: , Previous: \savebox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}

      +

      21.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}

      Synopsis: @@ -8086,7 +8175,7 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled Previous: \sbox, Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

      -

      21.9 \usebox{\boxcmd

      +

      21.9 \usebox{\boxcmd

      Synopsis: @@ -8106,23 +8195,23 @@ Previous: \sbox, Up: , Previous: Boxes, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22 Special insertions

      +

      22 Special insertions

      LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.

      - - - - - - @@ -8134,7 +8223,7 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. Next: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.1 Reserved characters

      +

      22.1 Reserved characters

      @@ -8190,7 +8279,7 @@ with ", so the previous example could also be written as Next: , Previous: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.2 Text symbols

      +

      22.2 Text symbols

      @@ -8647,7 +8736,7 @@ has the ascender height. Next: , Previous: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.3 Accents

      +

      22.3 Accents

      @@ -8821,7 +8910,7 @@ descenders. See also \underline in Math -

      Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in ‘o<’. +

      Produces a háček (check, caron) accent, as in ‘ǒ’.

      @@ -8834,7 +8923,7 @@ descenders. See also \underline in Math Next: , Previous: Accents, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.4 Non-English characters

      +

      22.4 Non-English characters

      @@ -8944,7 +9033,7 @@ used in languages other than English. Next: , Previous: Non-English characters, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.5 \rule

      +

      22.5 \rule

      Synopsis: @@ -8978,7 +9067,7 @@ rectangles. The arguments are: Previous: \rule, Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

      -

      22.6 \today

      +

      22.6 \today

      The \today command produces today’s date, in the format @@ -8999,7 +9088,7 @@ of other date formats. Next: , Previous: Special insertions, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23 Splitting the input

      +

      23 Splitting the input

      @@ -9010,11 +9099,11 @@ there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when you run LaTeX.

      - - - @@ -9026,7 +9115,7 @@ when you run LaTeX. Next: , Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23.1 \include

      +

      23.1 \include

      Synopsis: @@ -9056,7 +9145,7 @@ read by another \include command. Next: , Previous: \include, Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23.2 \includeonly

      +

      23.2 \includeonly

      Synopsis: @@ -9081,7 +9170,7 @@ effective. Previous: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

      -

      23.3 \input

      +

      23.3 \input

      Synopsis: @@ -9107,7 +9196,7 @@ is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). Next: , Previous: Splitting the input, Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

      -

      24 Front/back matter

      +

      24 Front/back matter

      The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note. -packages, loadingloading additional packages\usepackageAdditional packages are loaded like this: +packages, loading +loading additional packages +\usepackage +Additional packages are loaded like this: -\usepackage[options]{pkg} - + +
      \usepackage[options]{pkg}
      +
      + To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a comma, or use multiple \usepackage commands. -global optionsoptions, globalAny options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown +global options +options, global +Any options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with \usepackage. - -Typefaces -Layout -Document classes -Top - - -Typefaces - -typefacesfonts +TypefacesLayoutDocument classesTop +Typefaces + +typefaces +fonts + Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. - -Font styles -Font styles - Select roman, italics etc. - - -Font sizes -Font sizes - Select point size. - - -Low-level font commands -Low-level font commands - Select encoding, family, series, shape. - - - - - -Font styles -Font sizes -Typefaces - -
      -Font styles - -font stylestypeface stylesstyles of text +Font styles
      Select roman, italics etc.
      +
      Font sizes
      Select point size.
      +
      Low-level font commands
      Select encoding, family, series, shape.
      +
      + + +Font stylesFont sizesTypefaces +
      Font styles + +font styles +typeface styles +styles of text + The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. -These commands are used like \textit{italic text}. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. +This first group of commands is typically used like +\textit{italic text}. The corresponding command in +parenthesis is the &textldquo;declaration form&textrdquo;, which takes no arguments. The +scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command +or the end of the current group. The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. -You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance, -\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. - -\textrm (\rmfamily) -\textrm\rmfamilyRoman. - -\textit (\itshape) -\textit\itshapeItalics. - -\emph -\emphemphasisEmphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). - -\textmd (\mdseries) -\textmd\mdseriesMedium weight (default). - -\textbf (\bfseries) -\textbf\bfseriesBoldface. -\textup (\upshape) -\textup\upshapeUpright (default). The opposite of slanted. -\textsl (\slshape) -\textsl\slshapeSlanted. -\textsf (\sffamily) -\textsf\sffamilySans serif. -\textsc (\scshape) -\textsc\scshapeSmall caps. -\texttt (\ttfamily) -\texttt\ttfamilyTypewriter. -\textnormal (\normalfont) -\textnormal\normalfontMain document font. -\mathrm -\mathrmRoman, for use in math mode. -\mathbf -\mathbfBoldface, for use in math mode. -\mathsf -\mathsfSans serif, for use in math mode. -\mathtt -\mathttTypewriter, for use in math mode. - -\mathit -(\mit) -Italics, for use in math mode. - -\mathnormal -\mathnormalFor use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. -\mathcal -\mathcal`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. -
      +You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for +instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. + +These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the + +\textrm (\rmfamily) +\textrm +\rmfamily +Roman. + +\textit (\itshape) +\textit +\itshape +Italics. + +\emph +\emph +emphasis +Emphasis (switches between \textit and \textrm). + +\textmd (\mdseries) +\textmd +\mdseries +Medium weight (default). + +\textbf (\bfseries) +\textbf +\bfseries +Boldface. +\textup (\upshape) +\textup +\upshape +Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. +\textsl (\slshape) +\textsl +\slshape +Slanted. +\textsf (\sffamily) +\textsf +\sffamily +Sans serif. +\textsc (\scshape) +\textsc +\scshape +Small caps. +\texttt (\ttfamily) +\texttt +\ttfamily +Typewriter. +\textnormal (\normalfont) +\textnormal +\normalfont +Main document font. +\mathrm +\mathrm +Roman, for use in math mode. +\mathbf +\mathbf +Boldface, for use in math mode. +\mathsf +\mathsf +Sans serif, for use in math mode. +\mathtt +\mathtt +Typewriter, for use in math mode. + +\mathit +(\mit) +Italics, for use in math mode. + +\mathnormal +\mathnormal +For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. +\mathcal +\mathcal +&textlsquo;Calligraphic&textrsquo; letters, for use in math mode. +
      In addition, the command -\mathversion{bold} -\mathversioncan be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in -formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. +\mathversion{bold} +\mathversion +can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in +formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. &latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are used -differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} -instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different +differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...} +instead of \cmd{...}. These are two very different things. -\bf\bf -bold fontSwitch to bold face. + +\bf\bf +bold font +Switch to bold face. -\cal\cal -script letters for mathcalligraphic letters for mathSwitch to calligraphic letters for math. +\cal\cal +script letters for math +calligraphic letters for math +Switch to calligraphic letters for math. -\em\em -emphasisEmphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). +\em\em +emphasis +Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). -\it\it -italic fontItalics. +\it\it +italic font +Italics. -\rm\rm -roman fontRoman. +\rm\rm +roman font +Roman. -\sc\sc -small caps fontSmall caps. +\sc\sc +small caps font +Small caps. -\sf\sf -sans serif fontSans serif. +\sf\sf +sans serif font +Sans serif. -\sl\sl -slanted fontoblique fontSlanted (oblique). +\sl\sl +slanted font +oblique font +Slanted (oblique). -\tt\tt -typewriter fontmonospace fontfixed-width fontTypewriter (monospace, fixed-width). +\tt\tt +typewriter font +monospace font +fixed-width font +Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). -
      +
      - -Font sizes -Low-level font commands -Font styles -Typefaces - -
      -Font sizes -font sizestypeface sizessizes of text +Font sizesLow-level font commandsFont stylesTypefaces +
      Font sizes +font sizes +typeface sizes +sizes of text + The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used (in points) with the 10pt, 11pt, and -12pt document size options, respectively (see Document class options). - -\tiny\scriptsize\footnotesize\small\normalsize\large\Large\LARGE\huge\Huge -36 -7 -7 -7 - Command 10pt 11pt 12pt - \tiny - 5 6 6 - \scriptsize - 7 8 8 - \footnotesize - 8 9 10 - \small - 9 10 10.95 - \normalsize (default) - 10 10.95 12 - \large - 12 12 14.4 - \Large - 14.4 14.4 17.28 - \LARGE - 17.28 17.28 20.74 - \huge - 20.74 20.74 24.88 - \Huge - 24.88 24.88 24.88 - - -The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of +12pt document size options, respectively (Document class +options). + +\tiny +\scriptsize +\footnotesize +\small +\normalsize +\large +\Large +\LARGE +\huge +\Huge + +\normalsize (default)24.8824.8824.88 +Command 10pt 11pt 12pt +\tiny +5 6 6 +\scriptsize +7 8 8 +\footnotesize +8 9 10 +\small +9 10 10.95 +\normalsize (default) +10 10.95 12 +\large +12 12 14.4 +\Large +14.4 14.4 17.28 +\LARGE +17.28 17.28 20.74 +\huge +20.74 20.74 24.88 +\Huge +24.88 24.88 24.88 + + +The commands as listed here are &textldquo;declaration forms&textrdquo;. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of -these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. +these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}.
      - -Low-level font commands -Font sizes -Typefaces - -
      -Low-level font commands -low-level font commandsfont commands, low-level +Low-level font commandsFont sizesTypefaces +
      Low-level font commands +low-level font commands +font commands, low-level + These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available ones. -\fontencoding{enc} -\fontencodingSelect font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. +
      +\fontencoding{enc} +\fontencoding +Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1 and T1. -\fontfamily{family} -\fontfamilySelect font family. Valid families include: +\fontfamily{family} +\fontfamily +Select font family. Valid families include: - cmr for Computer Modern Roman - - cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif - - cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter - - + +cmr for Computer Modern Roman +cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif +cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter + and numerous others. -\fontseries{series} -\fontseriesSelect font series. Valid series include: - - m Medium (normal) - - b Bold - - c Condensed - - bc Bold condensed - - bx Bold extended - - +\fontseries{series} +\fontseries +Select font series. Valid series include: + + +m Medium (normal) +b Bold +c Condensed +bc Bold condensed +bx Bold extended + and various other combinations. -\fontshape{shape} -\fontshapeSelect font shape. Valid shapes are: - - n Upright (normal) - - it Italic - - sl Slanted (oblique) - - sc Small caps - - ui Upright italics - - ol Outline - - +\fontshape{shape} +\fontshape +Select font shape. Valid shapes are: + + +n Upright (normal) +it Italic +sl Slanted (oblique) +sc Small caps +ui Upright italics +ol Outline + The two last shapes are not available for most font families. -\fontsize{size}{skip} -\fontsize\baselineskipSet font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and +\fontsize{size}{skip} +\fontsize +\baselineskip +Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named \baselineskip. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. -\baselinestretchsetspace packagedouble spacingThe line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the +\baselinestretch +setspace package +double spacing +The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter when the type size changes; the -default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, +default is 1. However, the best way to &textldquo;double space&textrdquo; a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the setspace package; see -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace. -\linespread\linespread{factor} -Equivalent to -\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and +\linespread +\linespread{factor} +Equivalent to +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as described just above. -\selectfontThe changes made by calling the font commands described above do +\selectfont +The changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until \selectfont is called. -\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} -\usefontThe same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, +\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} +\usefont +The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. -
      +
      - -Layout -Sectioning -Typefaces -Top - - -Layout -layout commands +LayoutSectioningTypefacesTop +Layout +layout commands + Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page. - -\onecolumn -\onecolumn - Use one-column layout. - - -\twocolumn -\twocolumn - Use two-column layout. - - -\flushbottom -\flushbottom - Make all text pages the same height. - - -\raggedbottom -\raggedbottom - Allow text pages of differing height. - - -Page layout parameters -Page layout parameters - \headheight \footskip. - - - - - -\onecolumn -\twocolumn -Layout - -
      -<code>\onecolumn</code> -\onecolumnone-column output +\onecolumn
      Use one-column layout.
      +
      \twocolumn
      Use two-column layout.
      +
      \flushbottom
      Make all text pages the same height.
      +
      \raggedbottom
      Allow text pages of differing height.
      +
      Page layout parameters
      \headheight \footskip.
      +
      + + +\onecolumn\twocolumnLayout +
      \onecolumn +\onecolumn +one-column output + The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default.
      - -\twocolumn -\flushbottom -\onecolumn -Layout - -
      -<code>\twocolumn</code> -\twocolumnmulticolumn texttwo-column output +\twocolumn\flushbottom\onecolumnLayout +
      \twocolumn +\twocolumn +multicolumn text +two-column output + Synopsis: -\twocolumn[text1col] - + +
      \twocolumn[text1col]
      +
      + The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces two-column output. If the optional text1col argument is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting @@ -888,269 +824,255 @@ starts. These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: -\columnsep\columnsep -The distance between columns (35pt by default). + +\columnsep\columnsep +The distance between columns (35pt by default). -\columnseprule\columnseprule -The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. +\columnseprule\columnseprule +The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. -\columnwidth\columnwidth -The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in +\columnwidth\columnwidth +The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth in single-column text. -
      + These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: -\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction -Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied + +\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by floats. Default .7, can be usefully redefined to (say) .9 to avoid going to float pages so soon. -\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction -The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats, for a two-column float page. Default .5. -\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep -Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float page. Default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt documents, 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for 12pt. -\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep -Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. Default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. -
      +
      - -\flushbottom -\raggedbottom -\twocolumn -Layout - -
      -<code>\flushbottom</code> +\flushbottom\raggedbottom\twocolumnLayout +
      \flushbottom + +\flushbottom -\flushbottom The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. This is the default if twocolumn mode is selected -(see Document class options). +(Document class options).
      - -\raggedbottom -Page layout parameters -\flushbottom -Layout - -
      -<code>\raggedbottom</code> -\raggedbottomstretch, omitting vertical +\raggedbottomPage layout parameters\flushbottomLayout +
      \raggedbottom +\raggedbottom +stretch, omitting vertical + The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
      - -Page layout parameters -\raggedbottom -Layout - -
      -Page layout parameters +Page layout parameters\raggedbottomLayout +
      Page layout parameters + +page layout parameters +parameters, page layout +layout, page parameters for +header, parameters for +footer, parameters for +running header and footer -page layout parametersparameters, page layoutlayout, page parameters forheader, parameters forfooter, parameters forrunning header and footer -\headheight\headheight -Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is + +\headheight\headheight +Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is 30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\headsep\headsep -Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +\headsep\headsep +Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. Default is 25pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\footskip\footskip -Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +\footskip\footskip +Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. Default is 30pt, except in the book class, where it varies with the type size. -\linewidth\linewidth -Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list -(see list). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth by +\linewidth\linewidth +Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list +(list). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth by the sum of \leftmargin and \rightmargin -(see itemize). The default varies with the font size, paper +(itemize). The default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an article document in -10pt, it's set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that +10pt, it&textrsquo;s set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that becomes 229.5pt. -\textheight\textheight -The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with +\textheight\textheight +The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with the font size, document class, etc. For an article or -report document in 10pt, it's set to -43\baselineskip; for book, it's 41\baselineskip. -For 11pt, it's 38\baselineskip and for 12pt, +report document in 10pt, it&textrsquo;s set to +43\baselineskip; for book, it&textrsquo;s 41\baselineskip. +For 11pt, it&textrsquo;s 38\baselineskip and for 12pt, 36\baselineskip. -\textwidth\textwidth -The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies -as usual. For an article or report document, it's +\textwidth\textwidth +The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies +as usual. For an article or report document, it&textrsquo;s 345pt at 10pt, 360pt at 11pt, and -390pt at 12pt. For a book document, it's +390pt at 12pt. For a book document, it&textrsquo;s 4.5in at 10pt, and 5in at 11pt or 12pt. In multi-column output, \textwidth remains the width of the entire page body, while \columnwidth is the width of one column -(see \twocolumn). +(\twocolumn). -In lists (see list), \textwidth remains the width of the +In lists (list), \textwidth remains the width of the entire page body (and \columnwidth the width of the entire column), while \linewidth may decrease for nested lists. -Inside a minipage (see minipage) or \parbox -(see \parbox), all the width-related parameters are set to the +Inside a minipage (minipage) or \parbox +(\parbox), all the width-related parameters are set to the specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox. -\hsizeFor completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used +\hsize +For completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal &latex; documents. -\topmargin\topmargin -Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the +\topmargin\topmargin +Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and then divided by two. -\topskip\topskip -Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +\topskip\topskip +Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at 10pt. -
      +
      - -Sectioning -Cross references -Layout -Top - - -Sectioning -sectioning +SectioningCross referencesLayoutTop +Sectioning +sectioning + Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: -\part\part -\chapter\chapter -(report and book class only) -\section\section -\subsection\subsection -\subsubsection\subsubsection -\paragraph\paragraph -\subparagraph\subparagraph -
      + +\part\part +\chapter\chapter +(report and book class only) +\section\section +\subsection\subsection +\subsubsection\subsubsection +\paragraph\paragraph +\subparagraph\subparagraph + All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., -\chapter[toctitle]{title} - + +
      \chapter[toctitle]{title}
      +
      + In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the section title can appear in two other places: - + + The table of contents. - - + The running head at the top of the page. - - + You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. -*-form of sectioning commandsAlso, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print +*-form of sectioning commands +Also, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. For instance: -\section*{Preamble} - -\appendixappendix, creatingThe \appendix command changes the way following sectional units + +
      \section*{Preamble}
      +
      + +\appendix +appendix, creating +The \appendix command changes the way following sectional units are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is something like -\chapter{A Chapter} + +
      \chapter{A Chapter}
       &dots;
       \appendix
      -\chapter{The First Appendix}
      -
      -secnumdepth countersection numbers, printingThe secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers.
      +\chapter{The First Appendix}
      +
      + +secnumdepth counter +section numbers, printing +The secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} - + +
      \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level}
      +
      + + suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where -chapter is level zero. (See \setcounter.) +chapter is level zero. (\setcounter.)
      - -Cross references -Environments -Sectioning -Top - - -Cross references -cross references +Cross referencesEnvironmentsSectioningTop +Cross references +cross references + One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer -the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” +the reader to them, as in &textldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&textrdquo; - -\label -\label - Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. - - -\pageref -\pageref - Refer to a page number. - - -\ref -\ref - Refer to a section, figure or similar. - - - - - -\label -\pageref -Cross references - -
      -<code>\label</code> -\label +\label
      Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
      +
      \pageref
      Refer to a page number.
      +
      \ref
      Refer to a section, figure or similar.
      +
      + + +\label\pagerefCross references +
      \label +\label + Synopsis: -\label{key} - + +
      \label{key}
      +
      + A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key. @@ -1162,290 +1084,183 @@ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: -ch -for chapters -sec -for lower-level sectioning commands -fig -for figures -tab -for tables -eq -for equations -
      + +ch +for chapters +sec +for lower-level sectioning commands +fig +for figures +tab +for tables +eq +for equations +
      Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark or fig.snark.
      - -\pageref -\ref -\label -Cross references - -
      -<code>\pageref{<var>key</var>}</code> -\pagerefcross referencing with page numberpage number, cross referencing +\pageref\ref\labelCross references +
      \pageref{key} +\pageref +cross referencing with page number +page number, cross referencing + Synopsis: -\pageref{key} - -The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of + +
      \pageref{key}
      +
      + +The \pageref{key} command produces the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding -\label{key} command appears. +\label{key} command appears.
      - -\ref -\pageref -Cross references - -
      -<code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> -\refcross referencing, symbolicsection number, cross referencingequation number, cross referencingfigure number, cross referencingfootnote number, cross referencing +\ref\pagerefCross references +
      \ref{key} +\ref +cross referencing, symbolic +section number, cross referencing +equation number, cross referencing +figure number, cross referencing +footnote number, cross referencing + Synopsis: -\ref{key} - + +
      \ref{key}
      +
      + The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote, figure, &dots;, of the corresponding -\label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, -such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. +\label command (\label). It does not produce any text, +such as the word &textlsquo;Section&textrsquo; or &textlsquo;Figure&textrsquo;, just the bare number itself.
      - -Environments -Line breaking -Cross references -Top - - -Environments -environments -\begin\end +EnvironmentsLine breakingCross referencesTop +Environments +environments + +\begin +\end + &latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: -\begin{envname} + +
      \begin{envname}
       ...
      -\end{envname}
      -
      +\end{envname}
      +
      + - -abstract -abstract - Produce an abstract. - - -array -array - Math arrays. - - -center -center - Centered lines. - - -description -description - Labelled lists. - - -displaymath -displaymath - Formulas that appear on their own line. - - -document -document - Enclose the whole document. - - -enumerate -enumerate - Numbered lists. - - -eqnarray -eqnarray - Sequences of aligned equations. - - -equation -equation - Displayed equation. - - -figure -figure - Floating figures. - - -flushleft -flushleft - Flushed left lines. - - -flushright -flushright - Flushed right lines. - - -itemize -itemize - Bulleted lists. - - -letter -letter - Letters. - - -list -list - Generic list environment. - - -math -math - In-line math. - - -minipage -minipage - Miniature page. - - -picture -picture - Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. - - -quotation -quotation - Indented environment with paragraph indentation. - - -quote -quote - Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. - - -tabbing -tabbing - Align text arbitrarily. - - -table -table - Floating tables. - - -tabular -tabular - Align text in columns. - - -thebibliography -thebibliography - Bibliography or reference list. - - -theorem -theorem - Theorems, lemmas, etc. - - -titlepage -titlepage - For hand crafted title pages. - - -verbatim -verbatim - Simulating typed input. - - -verse -verse - For poetry and other things. - - - - - -abstract -array -Environments - -
      -<code>abstract</code> - -abstract environmentabstracts +abstract
      Produce an abstract.
      +
      array
      Math arrays.
      +
      center
      Centered lines.
      +
      description
      Labelled lists.
      +
      displaymath
      Formulas that appear on their own line.
      +
      document
      Enclose the whole document.
      +
      enumerate
      Numbered lists.
      +
      eqnarray
      Sequences of aligned equations.
      +
      equation
      Displayed equation.
      +
      figure
      Floating figures.
      +
      flushleft
      Flushed left lines.
      +
      flushright
      Flushed right lines.
      +
      itemize
      Bulleted lists.
      +
      letter
      Letters.
      +
      list
      Generic list environment.
      +
      math
      In-line math.
      +
      minipage
      Miniature page.
      +
      picture
      Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
      +
      quotation
      Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
      +
      quote
      Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
      +
      tabbing
      Align text arbitrarily.
      +
      table
      Floating tables.
      +
      tabular
      Align text in columns.
      +
      thebibliography
      Bibliography or reference list.
      +
      theorem
      Theorems, lemmas, etc.
      +
      titlepage
      For hand crafted title pages.
      +
      verbatim
      Simulating typed input.
      +
      verse
      For poetry and other things.
      +
      + + +abstractarrayEnvironments +
      abstract + +abstract environment +abstracts + Synopsis: -\begin{abstract} + +
      \begin{abstract}
       ...
      -\end{abstract}
      -
      +\end{abstract}
      +
      + Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs.
      - -array -center -abstract -Environments - -
      -<code>array</code> -array environmentarrays, math +arraycenterabstractEnvironments +
      array +array environment +arrays, math + Synopsis: -\begin{array}{template} -col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\ + +
      \begin{array}{template}
      +col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\
       ...
      -\end{array}
      -
      +\end{array}
      +
      + Math arrays are produced with the array environment, normally -within an equation environment (see equation). It has a +within an equation environment (equation). It has a single mandatory template argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: -c -centered -l -flush left -r -flush right -
      - -\\ (for array)Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include + +c +centered +l +flush left +r +flush right +
      + +\\ (for array) +Column entries are separated by &. Column entries may include other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with \\. -@{...}In the template, the construct @{text} puts text +&arobase;{...} +In the template, the construct &arobase;{text} puts text between columns in each row. -Here's an example: +Here&textrsquo;s an example: -\begin{equation} - \begin{array}{lrc} + +
      \begin{equation}
      +  \begin{array}{lrc}
         left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
         left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
      -  \end{array}
      -\end{equation}
      -
      -\arraycolsepThe \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space
      -separating columns; the default is 5pt.  See tabular, for other
      +  \end{array}
      +\end{equation}
      +
      + +\arraycolsep +The \arraycolsep parameter defines half the width of the space +separating columns; the default is 5pt. tabular, for other parameters which affect formatting in array environments, namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch. @@ -1453,45 +1268,38 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth and \arraystretch.
      - -center -description -array -Environments - -
      -<code>center</code> +centerdescriptionarrayEnvironments +
      center + +center environment +centering text, environment for -center environmentcentering text, environment for Synopsis: -\begin{center} + +
      \begin{center}
       line1 \\
       line2 \\
      -\end{center}
      -
      -\\ (for center)The center environment allows you to create a paragraph
      +\end{center}
      +
      + +\\ (for center) +The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the string \\. - -\centering -\centering - Declaration form of the center environment. - - - - - -\centering -center - - -<code>\centering</code> - -\centeringcentering text, declaration for +\centering
      Declaration form of the center environment.
      +
      + + +\centeringcenter +\centering + +\centering +centering text, declaration for + The \centering declaration corresponds to the center environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Thus, the text of a figure or @@ -1500,446 +1308,511 @@ command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats -paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of +paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command (of an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. -Here's an example: +Here&textrsquo;s an example: -\begin{quote} + +
      \begin{quote}
       \centering
       first line \\
       second line \\
      -\end{quote}
      -
      +\end{quote}
      +
      +
      - -description -displaymath -center -Environments - -
      -<code>description</code> +descriptiondisplaymathcenterEnvironments +
      description + +description environment +labelled lists, creating +description lists, creating -description environmentlabelled lists, creatingdescription lists, creating Synopsis: -\begin{description} + +
      \begin{description}
       \item [label1] item1
       \item [label2] item2
       ...
      -\end{description}
      -
      -\itemThe description environment is used to make labelled lists.  Each
      +\end{description}
      +
      + +\item +The description environment is used to make labelled lists. Each label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may contain multiple paragraphs. -bold typewriter, avoidingtypewriter labels in listsAnother variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if -you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you'll get -bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This +bold typewriter, avoiding +typewriter labels in lists +Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt, you&textrsquo;ll get +bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]. This may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use -\tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt -plain typewriter}]. +\tt, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt +plain typewriter}]. -For details about list spacing, see itemize. +For details about list spacing, see itemize.
      - -displaymath -document -description -Environments - -
      -<code>displaymath</code> +displaymathdocumentdescriptionEnvironments +
      displaymath + +displaymath environment -displaymath environment Synopsis: -\begin{displaymath} + +
      \begin{displaymath}
       math
      -\end{displaymath}
      -
      -or
      +\end{displaymath}
      +
      + +or -\[math\] - + +
      \[math\]
      +
      + The displaymath environment (\[...\] is a synonym) typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default. The global fleqn option makes equations flush left; see -Document class options. +Document class options. No equation number is added to displaymath text; to get an -equation number, use the equation environment (see equation). +equation number, use the equation environment (equation).
      - -document -enumerate -displaymath -Environments - -
      -<code>document</code> +documentenumeratedisplaymathEnvironments +
      document + +document environment -document environment The document environment encloses the body of a document. -It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting & ending. +It is required in every &latex; document. Starting & ending.
      - -enumerate -eqnarray -document -Environments - -
      -<code>enumerate</code> +enumerateeqnarraydocumentEnvironments +
      enumerate + +enumerate environment +lists of items, numbered -enumerate environmentlists of items, numbered Synopsis: -\begin{enumerate} + +
      \begin{enumerate}
       \item item1
       \item item2
       ...
      -\end{enumerate}
      -
      +\end{enumerate}
      +
      + The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as -itemize (see itemize) and description -(see description). +itemize (itemize) and description +(description). -\itemEach item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. +\item +Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: - 1., 2., &dots; - - (a), (b), &dots; - - i., ii., &dots; - - A., B., &dots; - - - -\enumi\enumii\enumiii\enumivThe enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi -through \enumiv counters (see Counters). If the optional + +1., 2., &dots; +(a), (b), &dots; +i., ii., &dots; +A., B., &dots; + + +\enumi +\enumii +\enumiii +\enumiv +The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi +through \enumiv counters (Counters). If the optional argument to \item is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. -\labelenumi\labelenumii\labelenumiii\labelenumivThe enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi +\labelenumi +\labelenumii +\labelenumiii +\labelenumiv +The enumerate environment uses the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv to produce the default label. So, you can -use \renewcommand to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase +use \renewcommand to change the labels (\newcommand & +\renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters: -\Alph example\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}} - +\Alph example + +
      \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
      +
      +
      - -eqnarray -equation -enumerate -Environments - -
      -<code>eqnarray</code> +eqnarrayequationenumerateEnvironments +
      eqnarray + +eqnarray environment +equations, aligning +aligning equations -eqnarray environmentequations, aligningaligning Equations -\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*) +align environment, from amsmath +amsmath package, replacing eqnarray +Madsen, Lars +First, a caveat: the eqnarray environment has some infelicities +which cannot be overcome; the article &textldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars +Madsen describes them in detail +(http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). The bottom +line is that it is better to use the align environment (and +others) from the amsmath package. + +Nevertheless, here is a description of eqnarray: + + +
      \begin{eqnarray}  (or eqnarray*)
       formula1 \\
       formula2 \\
       ...
      -\end{eqnarray}
      -
      -\\ (for eqnarray)The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of
      +\end{eqnarray}
      +
      + +\\ (for eqnarray) +The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and consecutive items within a row separated by an &. -\\* (for eqnarray)\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal +\\* (for eqnarray) +\\* can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. -\nonumberequation numbers, omittingAn equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +\nonumber +equation numbers, omitting +An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a \nonumber command. Alternatively, The *-form of the -environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will +environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}) will omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as eqnarray. -\lefteqnThe command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across +\lefteqn +The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width.
      - -equation -figure -eqnarray -Environments - -
      -<code>equation</code> +equationfigureeqnarrayEnvironments +
      equation + +equation environment +equations, environment for +formulas, environment for -equation environmentequations, environment forformulas, environment for Synopsis: -\begin{equation} + +
      \begin{equation}
       math
      -\end{equation}
      -
      +\end{equation}
      +
      + The equation environment starts a displaymath -environment (see displaymath), e.g., centering the math text +environment (displaymath), e.g., centering the math text on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin.
      - -figure -flushleft -equation -Environments - -
      -<code>figure</code> -figureinserting figuresfigures, inserting -\begin{figure[*]}[placement] +figureflushleftequationEnvironments +
      figure +figure +inserting figures +figures, inserting + + +
      \begin{figure[*]}[placement]
       figbody
      -\label{label}
      -\caption[loftitle]{text}
      -\end{figure}
      -
      +\label{label}
      +\caption[loftitle]{text}
      +\end{figure}
      +
      + Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. +instead &textldquo;floated&textrdquo; to a convenient place, such as the top of a page. Figures will not be split between two pages. When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns). +placement of floats +specifier, float placement The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your figure. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float: -t -(Top)—at the top of a text page. +
      +t +(Top)&textmdash;at the top of a text page. -b -(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not +b +(Bottom)&textmdash;at the bottom of a text page. However, b is not allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the -FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. - -h -float package(Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment -appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t is -automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, -use the float and use its H placement letter. (That -package also provides other options.) - -p -(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page +FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. + +h +float package +(Here)&textmdash;at the position in the text where the figure environment +appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; t is +automatically added. + +here, putting floats +float package +To absolutely force a figure to appear &textldquo;here&textrdquo;, you can +\usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it +defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere. + +p +(Page of floats)&textmdash;on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. -
      +! +Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, &latex; +ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear +and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page. +The ! specifier does not mean &textldquo;put the float here&textrdquo;; +see above. + + The standard report and article classes use the default placement tbp. -The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc. -you wish. +The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, +etc.&noeos; you wish. -\captionThe \caption command specifies caption text for the +\caption +The \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text -(see Tables of contents). +(Tables of contents). - -\bottomfractionThe maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at +Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and +non-float text: + + +\bottomfraction +The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at the bottom; default .3. -\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction -The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; default .5. -\floatsep\floatsep -Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +\textfraction\textfraction +Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a +different page. The default is .2. + +\topfraction\topfraction +Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default .7. + + +Parameters relating to vertical space around floats: + + +\floatsep\floatsep +Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt. -\intextsep\intextsep -Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +\intextsep\intextsep +Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt styles, 14pt plus4pt minus4pt for 12pt. -\textfloatsep\textfloatsep -Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +\textfloatsep\textfloatsep +Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. + + +Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page: -\textfraction\textfraction -Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too -much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a -different page. The default is .2. + +\bottomnumber\bottomnumber +Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; +default 1. -\topfraction\topfraction -Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before -floats; default is .7. +\topnumber\topnumber +Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; +default 2. -
      +\totalnumber\totalnumber +Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. + +The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats: +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats. +
      - -flushleft -flushright -figure -Environments - -
      -<code>flushleft</code> -flushleft environmentleft-justifying text, environment forragged right text, environment for -\begin{flushleft} +flushleftflushrightfigureEnvironments +
      flushleft +flushleft environment +left-justifying text, environment for +ragged right text, environment for + + +
      \begin{flushleft}
       line1 \\
       line2 \\
       ...
      -\end{flushleft}
      -
      -\\ for flushleftThe flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph
      +\end{flushleft}
      +
      + +\\ for flushleft +The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged right Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - -\raggedright -\raggedright - Declaration form of the flushleft environment. - - - - - -\raggedright -flushleft - - -<code>\raggedright</code> -\raggedrightragged right textleft-justifying textjustification, ragged right +\raggedright
      Declaration form of the flushleft environment.
      +
      + + +\raggedrightflushleft +\raggedright +\raggedright +ragged right text +left-justifying text +justification, ragged right + The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; -formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit.
      - -flushright -itemize -flushleft -Environments - -
      -<code>flushright</code> -flushright environmentragged left text, environment forright-justifying text, environment for -\begin{flushright} +flushrightitemizeflushleftEnvironments +
      flushright +flushright environment +ragged left text, environment for +right-justifying text, environment for + + +
      \begin{flushright}
       line1 \\
       line2 \\
       ...
      -\end{flushright}
      -
      -\\ (for flushright)The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph
      +\end{flushright}
      +
      + +\\ (for flushright) +The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - -\raggedleft -\raggedleft - Declaration form of the flushright environment. - - - - - -\raggedleft -flushright - - -<code>\raggedleft</code> -\raggedleftragged left textjustification, ragged leftright-justifying text +\raggedleft
      Declaration form of the flushright environment.
      +
      + + +\raggedleftflushright +\raggedleft +\raggedleft +ragged left text +justification, ragged left +right-justifying text + The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; -formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the +formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit.
      - -itemize -letter -flushright -Environments - -
      -<code>itemize</code> -itemize environment\itemlists of itemsunordered listsbulleted lists +itemizeletterflushrightEnvironments +
      itemize +itemize environment +\item +lists of items +unordered lists +bulleted lists + Synopsis: -\begin{itemize} + +
      \begin{itemize}
       \item item1
       \item item2
       ...
      -\end{itemize}
      -
      -The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted”
      +\end{itemize}
      +
      + +The itemize environment produces an &textldquo;unordered&textrdquo;, &textldquo;bulleted&textrdquo; list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making -environments, such as enumerate (see enumerate). +environments, such as enumerate (enumerate). Each item of an itemize list begins with an \item command. There must be at least one \item command within the environment. By default, the marks at each level look like this: - • (bullet) - - -- (bold en-dash) - - * (asterisk) - - . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) - - - -\labelitemi\labelitemii\labelitemiii\labelitemivThe itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi + +• (bullet) +-- (bold en-dash) +* (asterisk) +. (centered dot, rendered here as a period) + + +\labelitemi +\labelitemii +\labelitemiii +\labelitemiv +The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to produce the default label. So, you can use \renewcommand to change the labels. For instance, to have the first level use diamonds: -\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} - -\leftmargin\leftmargini\leftmarginii\leftmarginiii\leftmarginiv\leftmarginv\leftmarginviThe \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define + +
      \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
      +
      + +\leftmargin +\leftmargini +\leftmarginii +\leftmarginiii +\leftmarginiv +\leftmarginv +\leftmarginvi +The \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin is set to the appropriate \leftmarginN when a new level of @@ -1949,106 +1822,106 @@ nesting is entered. 2.5em (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: -\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em - + +
      \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
      +
      + Some parameters that affect list formatting: -\itemindent\itemindent -Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. + +\itemindent\itemindent +Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. -\labelsep\labelsep -Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em. +\labelsep\labelsep +Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em. -\labelwidth\labelwidth -Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode. +\labelwidth\labelwidth +Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode. -\listparindent\listparindent -Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a +\listparindent\listparindent +Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a list item; default 0pt. -\rightmargin\rightmargin -Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the +\rightmargin\rightmargin +Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the enclosing environment; default 0pt, except in the quote, quotation, and verse environments, where it is set equal to \leftmargin. -
      + Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather loose, by default). -\itemsep\itemsep -Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt + +\itemsep\itemsep +Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt for 12pt. -\parsep\parsep -Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults +\parsep\parsep +Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults are the same as \itemsep. -\topsep\topsep -Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. +\topsep\topsep +Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt for 10pt documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt for 11pt, and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt for 12pt. These are reduced for nested lists. -\partopsep\partopsep -Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a +\partopsep\partopsep +Extra space added to \topsep when the list environment starts a paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt for 10pt documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt for 11pt, and 3pt plus2pt minus2pt for 12pt. -
      + -\parskip exampleEspecially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide +\parskip example +Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, -see \parskip): - -\newenvironment{itemize*}% - {\begin{itemize}% - \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}% - \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}% - \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}% - {\end{itemize}} - - -
      - -letter -list -itemize -Environments - -
      -<code>letter</code> environment: writing letters -letter -This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. - - -
      - -list -math -letter -Environments - -
      -<code>list</code> -listlists of items, generic +\parskip): + + +
      \newenvironment{itemize*}%
      +  {\begin{itemize}%
      +    \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
      +    \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
      +    \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
      +  {\end{itemize}}
      +
      + + +
      +letterlistitemizeEnvironments +
      letter environment: writing letters +letter + +This environment is used for creating letters. Letters. + + +
      +listmathletterEnvironments +
      list +list +lists of items, generic + The list environment is a generic environment which is used for defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in macros. -\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing} + +
      \begin{list}{labeling}{spacing}
       \item item1
       \item item2
       ...
      -\end{list}
      -
      +\end{list}
      +
      + The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item). This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the @@ -2056,92 +1929,93 @@ label. It can and usually does contain other &latex; commands. The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be -empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. +empty, i.e., {}, which leaves the default spacing. The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by -\linewidth (see Page layout parameters). +\linewidth (Page layout parameters).
      - -math -minipage -list -Environments - -
      -<code>math</code> +mathminipagelistEnvironments +
      math + +math environment +in-line formulas -math environmentin-line formulas Synopsis: -\begin{math} + +
      \begin{math}
       math
      -\end{math}
      -
      +\end{math}
      +
      + The math environment inserts the given math within the running text. \(...\)) and $...$ are synonyms. -See Math formulas. +Math formulas.
      - -minipage -picture -math -Environments - -
      -<code>minipage</code> +minipagepicturemathEnvironments +
      minipage + +minipage environment +minipage, creating a -minipage environmentminipage, creating a -\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} + +
      \begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
       text
      -\end{minipage}
      -
      +\end{minipage}
      +
      + The minipage environment typesets its body text in a block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the -\parbox command (see \parbox), but unlike \parbox, +\parbox command (\parbox), but unlike \parbox, other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. -The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). +The arguments are the same as for \parbox (\parbox). -indentation of paragraphs, in minipageparagraph indentation, in minipage\parindentBy default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage +indentation of paragraphs, in minipage +paragraph indentation, in minipage +\parindent +By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as -\setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. +\setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. -footnotes in figuresfigures, footnotes inFootnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is +footnotes in figures +figures, footnotes in +Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary -footnote counter (see Counters). +footnote counter (Counters). -However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using +However, don&textrsquo;t put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
      - -picture -quotation -minipage -Environments - -
      -<code>picture</code> +picturequotationminipageEnvironments +
      picture + +picture +creating pictures +pictures, creating -picturecreating picturespictures, creating -\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) + +
      \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
       &dots; picture commands &dots;
      -\end{picture}
      -
      -\unitlengthThe picture environment allows you to create just about any
      +\end{picture}
      +
      + +\unitlength +The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal -point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or +point and a minus sign&textmdash;a number like 5, 0.3 or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 @@ -2159,7 +2033,7 @@ the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this -argument's x- and y-coordinates. +argument&textrsquo;s x- and y-coordinates. The picture environment also has an optional position argument, following the size argument, that can change the @@ -2169,9 +2043,11 @@ coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command -\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) - -produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 + +
      \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
      +
      + +produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the @@ -2179,112 +2055,57 @@ origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. -The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the +The environment&textrsquo;s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; &latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even -off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by &latex; in determining +off the page. The picture&textrsquo;s nominal size is used by &latex; in determining how much room to leave for it. Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put command. The command -\put (11.3,-.3){...} - -puts the object specified by ... in the + +
      \put (11.3,-.3){...}
      +
      + +puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. -lR boxThe \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything -that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox) in the text argument of +lR box +The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything +that can go in an \mbox (\mbox) in the text argument of the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. The picture commands are described in the following sections. - -\circle -\circle - Draw a circle. - - -\makebox (picture) -\makebox (picture) - Draw a box of the specified size. - - -\framebox (picture) -\framebox (picture) - Draw a box with a frame around it. - - -\dashbox -\dashbox - Draw a dashed box. - - -\frame -\frame - Draw a frame around an object. - - -\line -\line - Draw a straight line. - - -\linethickness -\linethickness - Set the line thickness. - - -\thicklines -\thicklines - A heavier line thickness. - - -\thinlines -\thinlines - The default line thickness. - - -\multiput -\multiput - Draw multiple instances of an object. - - -\oval -\oval - Draw an ellipse. - - -\put -\put - Place an object at a specified place. - - -\shortstack -\shortstack - Make a pile of objects. - - -\vector -\vector - Draw a line with an arrow. - - - - - -\circle -\makebox (picture) -picture - - -<code>\circle</code> -\circle -\circle[*]{diameter} - +\circle
      Draw a circle.
      +
      \makebox (picture)
      Draw a box of the specified size.
      +
      \framebox (picture)
      Draw a box with a frame around it.
      +
      \dashbox
      Draw a dashed box.
      +
      \frame
      Draw a frame around an object.
      +
      \line
      Draw a straight line.
      +
      \linethickness
      Set the line thickness.
      +
      \thicklines
      A heavier line thickness.
      +
      \thinlines
      The default line thickness.
      +
      \multiput
      Draw multiple instances of an object.
      +
      \oval
      Draw an ellipse.
      +
      \put
      Place an object at a specified place.
      +
      \shortstack
      Make a pile of objects.
      +
      \vector
      Draw a line with an arrow.
      +
      + + +\circle\makebox (picture)picture +\circle +\circle + + +
      \circle[*]{diameter}
      +
      + The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command draws a solid circle. @@ -2293,16 +2114,11 @@ draws a solid circle.
      - -\makebox (picture) -\framebox (picture) -\circle -picture - - -<code>\makebox</code> -\makebox (picture) -\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} +\makebox (picture)\framebox (picture)\circlepicture +\makebox +\makebox (picture) + +\makebox(width,height)[position]{...} The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a @@ -2311,61 +2127,58 @@ the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: -t -Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. +
      +t +Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. -b -Moves the item to the bottom. +b +Moves the item to the bottom. -l -Moves the item to the left. +l +Moves the item to the left. -r -Moves the item to the right. +r +Moves the item to the right. -
      + -See \makebox. +\makebox.
      - -\framebox (picture) -\dashbox -\makebox (picture) -picture - - -<code>\framebox</code> -\framebox +\framebox (picture)\dashbox\makebox (picture)picture +\framebox +\framebox + Synopsis: -\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} - + +
      \framebox(width,height)[pos]{...}
      +
      + The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. -\fboxrule\fboxsepThe \framebox command produces a rule of thickness +\fboxrule +\fboxsep +The \framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents of the box.
      - -\dashbox -\frame -\framebox (picture) -picture - - -<code>\dashbox</code> - -\dashbox +\dashbox\frame\framebox (picture)picture +\dashbox + +\dashbox + Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: -\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} - + +
      \dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text}
      +
      + \dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a picture environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. @@ -2376,38 +2189,32 @@ multiples of the dlen.
      - -\frame -\line -\dashbox -picture - - -<code>\frame</code> -\frame +\frame\line\dashboxpicture +\frame +\frame + Synopsis: -\frame{text} - + +
      \frame{text}
      +
      + The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the object.
      - -\line -\linethickness -\frame -picture - - -<code>\line</code> -\line +\line\linethickness\framepicture +\line +\line + Synopsis: -\line(xslope,yslope){length} - + +
      \line(xslope,yslope){length}
      +
      + The \line command draws a line with the given length and slope xslope/yslope. @@ -2418,16 +2225,11 @@ see the curve2e and many many other packages on CTAN.
      - -\linethickness -\thicklines -\line -picture - - -<code>\linethickness</code> -\linethickness -The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness +\linethickness\thicklines\linepicture +\linethickness +\linethickness + +The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be dim, which must be a positive length. @@ -2436,48 +2238,35 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. - -\thicklines -\thinlines -\linethickness -picture - - -<code>\thicklines</code> -\thicklines +\thicklines\thinlines\linethicknesspicture +\thicklines +\thicklines + The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. +cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. - -\thinlines -\multiput -\thicklines -picture - - -<code>\thinlines</code> -\thinlines +\thinlines\multiput\thicklinespicture +\thinlines +\thinlines + The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. +cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. - -\multiput -\oval -\thinlines -picture - - -<code>\multiput</code> -\multiput +\multiput\oval\thinlinespicture +\multiput +\multiput + Synopsis: -\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} - +
      +
      \multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj}
      +
      + The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position (x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, @@ -2485,96 +2274,86 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position - -\oval -\put -\multiput -picture - - -<code>\oval</code> -\oval +\oval\put\multiputpicture +\oval +\oval + Synopsis: -\oval(width,height)[portion] - + +
      \oval(width,height)[portion]
      +
      + The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the oval via the following: -t -selects the top portion; -b -selects the bottom portion; -r -selects the right portion; -l -selects the left portion. -
      - -The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a -maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like + +t +selects the top portion; +b +selects the bottom portion; +r +selects the right portion; +l +selects the left portion. +
      + +The &textldquo;corners&textrdquo; of the oval are made with quarter circles with a +maximum radius of 20pt, so large &textldquo;ovals&textrdquo; will look more like boxes with rounded corners.
      - -\put -\shortstack -\oval -picture - - -<code>\put</code> - -\put -\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } +\put\shortstack\ovalpicture +\put + +\put + +\put(x coord,y coord){ ... } The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates. - -\shortstack -\vector -\put -picture - - -<code>\shortstack</code> -\shortstack +\shortstack\vector\putpicture +\shortstack +\shortstack + Synopsis: -\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} - + +
      \shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...}
      +
      + The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid positions are: -r -Move the objects to the right of the stack. -l -Move the objects to the left of the stack -c -Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) -
      + +r +Move the objects to the right of the stack. +l +Move the objects to the left of the stack +c +Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) +
      -\\ (for \shortstack objects)Objects are separated with \\. +\\ (for \shortstack objects) +Objects are separated with \\.
      - -\vector -\shortstack -picture - - -<code>\vector</code> -\vector +\vector\shortstackpicture +\vector +\vector + Synopsis: -\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} - + +
      \vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}
      +
      + The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive. @@ -2582,22 +2361,22 @@ length and slope. The x and y values must lie between
      - -quotation -quote -picture -Environments - -
      -<code>quotation</code> +quotationquotepictureEnvironments +
      quotation + +quotation +quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text -quotationquoted text with paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text with paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text Synopsis: -\begin{quotation} + +
      \begin{quotation}
       text
      -\end{quotation}
      -
      +\end{quotation}
      +
      + The margins of the quotation environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. @@ -2607,22 +2386,22 @@ normally.
      - -quote -tabbing -quotation -Environments - -
      -<code>quote</code> +quotetabbingquotationEnvironments +
      quote + +quote +quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting -quotequoted text without paragraph indentation, displayingdisplaying quoted text without paragraph indentationparagraph indentations in quoted text, omitting Snyopsis: -\begin{quote} + +
      \begin{quote}
       text
      -\end{quote}
      -
      +\end{quote}
      +
      + The margins of the quote environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. @@ -2631,24 +2410,24 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
      - -tabbing -table -quote -Environments - -
      -<code>tabbing</code> +tabbingtablequoteEnvironments +
      tabbing + +tabbing environment +tab stops, using +lining text up using tab stops +alignment via tabbing -tabbing environmenttab stops, usinglining text up in columns using tab stopsalignment via tabbing Synopsis: -\begin{tabbing} + +
      \begin{tabbing}
       row1col1 \= row1col2 \= row1col3 \= row1col4 \\
       row2col1 \>                \> row2col3 \\
       ...
      -\end{tabbing}
      -
      +\end{tabbing}
      +
      + The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where @@ -2659,70 +2438,77 @@ environment. The following commands can be used inside a tabbing enviroment: -\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) -End a line. + +\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) +End a line. -\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) -Sets a tab stop at the current position. +\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) +Sets a tab stop at the current position. -\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) -\>Advances to the next tab stop. +\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) +\> +Advances to the next tab stop. -\<\< -Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing +\<\< +Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. -\+\+ -Moves the left margin of the next and all the +\+\+ +Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\-\- -Moves the left margin of the next and all the +\-\- +Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\' (tabbing)\' (tabbing) -Moves everything that you have typed so far in the +\&textrsquo; (tabbing)\' (tabbing) +Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the right -of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. +of the previous column, flush against the current column&textrsquo;s tab stop. -\` (tabbing)\` (tabbing) -Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab -stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column -because there's no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the -text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} +\&textlsquo; (tabbing)\` (tabbing) +Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab +stop 0. However, it can&textrsquo;t move text to the right of the last column +because there&textrsquo;s no tab stop there. The \` command moves all the +text that follows it, up to the \\ or \end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between the \` and the command that ends the line. -\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) -\a' (acute accent in tabbing)\a` (grave accent in tabbing)\a= (macron accent in tabbing)In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and -\` do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead, +\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) +\a&textrsquo; (acute accent in tabbing) +\a&textlsquo; (grave accent in tabbing) +\a= (macron accent in tabbing) +In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and +\` do not produce accents as usual (Accents). Instead, the commands \a=, \a' and \a` are used. -\kill\kill -Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ +\kill\kill +Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \- commands in that line remain in effect. -\poptabs\poptabs -\poptabsRestores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. +\poptabs\poptabs +\poptabs +Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. -\pushtabs\pushtabs -Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing +\pushtabs\pushtabs +Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. -\tabbingsep\tabbingsep -Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. +\tabbingsep\tabbingsep +Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'. -
      + This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: -\begin{tabbing} + +
      \begin{tabbing}
       function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
                \> begin \= \+ \\
                      \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
      @@ -2730,37 +2516,37 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
                         else \+ \\
                               fact := 1; \-\- \\
                   end;\\
      -\end{tabbing}
      -
      +\end{tabbing}
      +
      +
      - -table -tabular -tabbing -Environments - -
      -<code>table</code> +tabletabulartabbingEnvironments +
      table + +table +tables, creating +creating tables -tabletables, creatingcreating tables Synopsis: - \begin{table}[placement] + +
       \begin{table}[placement]
       
         body of the table
       
      - \caption{table title}
      - \end{table}
      -
      + \caption{table title}
      + \end{table}
      +
      + Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are -usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page. +usually &textldquo;floated&textrdquo; to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables will not be split between two pages. The optional argument [placement] determines where &latex; will try to place your table. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put a float; these are the same as that used with the figure -environment, and described there (see figure). +environment, and described there (figure). The standard report and article classes use the default placement [tbp]. @@ -2770,166 +2556,162 @@ you wish. The \caption command allows you to title your table.
      - -tabular -thebibliography -table -Environments - -
      -<code>tabular</code> -tabular environmentlines in tableslining text up in tables +tabularthebibliographytableEnvironments +
      tabular +tabular environment +lines in tables +lining text up in tables + Synopsis: -\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} + +
      \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
       column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
       ...
      -\end{tabular}
      -
      -        or
      +\end{tabular}
      +
      + + +or -\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} + +
      \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
       column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
       ...
      -\end{tabular*}
      -
      +\end{tabular*}
      +
      + These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. -\\ for tabular\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, -except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline +\\ for tabular +\\ must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +except for the last, where it is optional&textmdash;unless an \hline command (to put a rule below the table) follows. The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: -width -Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be +
      +width +Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified width. -pos -Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of +pos +Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of the environment. -
      t -align on top row -b -align on bottom row -
      + +t +align on top row + +b +align on bottom row +
      -cols -Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the +cols +Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and intercolumn material. -l -A column of left-aligned items. +
      +l +A column of left-aligned items. -r -A column of right-aligned items. +r +A column of right-aligned items. -c -A column of centered items. +c +A column of centered items. -| -A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. +| +A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. -@{text} -This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the +&arobase;{text} +This inserts text in every row. An &arobase;-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space -between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in -text. An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression -causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all -subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep -command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not -suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be -used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. - -p{wd} -Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width +before the adjacent item must be included in text. + +To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given +column, you have to load the array package and use the +>{...} specifier. + + +\extracolsep +An \extracolsep{wd} command in an &arobase;-expression causes an +extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent +columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. +Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed +by an &arobase;-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only +in an &arobase;-expression in the cols argument. + +p{wd} +Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument of a -\parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not +\parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not appear in the item, except in the following situations: - + + inside an environment like minipage, array, or tabular. - - + inside an explicit \parbox. - - + in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a p-column element. - - + -*{num}{cols} -Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a +*{num}{cols} +Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression. -
      -
      +
      + Parameters that control formatting: -\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth -Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and + +\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth +Thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments; the default is .4pt. -\arraystretch\arraystretch -Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array +\arraystretch\arraystretch +Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular and array environments; default is 1, for no scaling. -\doublerulesep\doublerulesep -Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || +\doublerulesep\doublerulesep +Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by || in the tabular and array environments; default is 2pt. -\tabcolsep\tabcolsep -Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt. +\tabcolsep\tabcolsep +Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt. -
      + -These commands can be used inside a tabular environment: +The following commands can be used inside a tabular +environment: - -\multicolumn -\multicolumn - Make an item spanning several columns. - - -\cline -\cline - Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. - - -\hline -\hline - Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. - - -\vline -\vline - Draw a vertical line. - - - - - -\multicolumn -\cline -tabular - - -<code>\multicolumn</code> -\multicolumn +\multicolumn
      Make an item spanning several columns.
      +
      \cline
      Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
      +
      \hline
      Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
      +
      \vline
      Draw a vertical line.
      +
      + + +\multicolumn\clinetabular +\multicolumn +\multicolumn + Synopsis: -\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text} - +
      +
      \multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
      +
      + The \multicolumn command makes an entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos, @@ -2937,138 +2719,110 @@ specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centered, lr for flushright. The third mandatory argument, text, specifies what text to put in the entry. -Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; +Here&textrsquo;s an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; \multicolumn is used for the heading: -\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} -\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr + +
      \begin{tabular}{r&arobase;{--}l}
      +\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
          0x80&0x7FF   \cr
         0x800&0xFFFF  \cr
       0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
      -\end{tabular}
      -
      +\end{tabular}
      +
      + - -\cline -\hline -\multicolumn -tabular - - -<code>\cline</code> -\cline +\cline\hline\multicolumntabular +\cline +\cline + Synopsis: -\cline{i-j} - + +
      \cline{i-j}
      +
      + The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are specified in the mandatory argument.
      - -\hline -\vline -\cline -tabular - - -<code>\hline</code> -\hline +\hline\vline\clinetabular +\hline +\hline + The \hline command draws a horizontal line the width of the -enclosing tabular or array environment. It's most +enclosing tabular or array environment. It&textrsquo;s most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. - -\vline -\hline -tabular - - -<code>\vline</code> -\vline +\vline\hlinetabular +\vline +\vline + The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an -@-expression. +&arobase;-expression.
      - -thebibliography -theorem -tabular -Environments - -
      -<code>thebibliography</code> +thebibliographytheoremtabularEnvironments +
      thebibliography + +thebibliography +bibliography, creating (manually) -thebibliographybibliography, creating (manually) Synopsis: -\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} -\bibitem[label]{cite_key} + +
      \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
      +\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
       ...
      -\end{thebibliography}
      -
      +\end{thebibliography}
      +
      + The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or reference list. In the article class, this reference list is labelled -“References”; in the report class, it is labelled -“Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes) +&textldquo;References&textrdquo;; in the report class, it is labelled +&textldquo;Bibliography&textrdquo;. You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command \refname. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: -\renewcommand{\refname}{} - + +
      \renewcommand{\refname}{}
      +
      + The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. - -\bibitem -\bibitem - Specify a bibliography item. - - -\cite -\cite - Refer to a bibliography item. - - -\nocite -\nocite - Include an item in the bibliography. - - -Using BibTeX -Using BibTeX - Automatic generation of bibliographies. - - - - - -\bibitem -\cite -thebibliography - - -<code>\bibitem</code> - -\bibitem +\bibitem
      Specify a bibliography item.
      +
      \cite
      Refer to a bibliography item.
      +
      \nocite
      Include an item in the bibliography.
      +
      Using BibTeX
      Automatic generation of bibliographies.
      +
      + + +\bibitem\citethebibliography +\bibitem + +\bibitem + Synopsis: -\bibitem[label]{cite_key} - + +
      \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
      +
      + The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label. If the label argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the enumi counter. The @@ -3076,93 +2830,88 @@ automatically generated using the enumi counter. The symbols not containing a comma. This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the -item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by -the \begin{document} command, the item's label is +item&textrsquo;s cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by +the \begin{document} command, the item&textrsquo;s label is associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key with a \cite command (see next section) to produce the associated label.
      - -\cite -\nocite -\bibitem -thebibliography - - -<code>\cite</code> - -\cite +\cite\nocite\bibitemthebibliography +\cite + +\cite + Synopsis: -\cite[subcite]{keys - + +
      \cite[subcite]{keys
      +
      + The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references associated with keys by entries in the .aux file. The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the -citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce -`[Knuth, p. 314]'. +citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce +&textlsquo;[Knuth, p. 314]&textrsquo;.
      - -\nocite -Using BibTeX -\cite -thebibliography - - -<code>\nocite</code> -\nocite -\nocite{key_list} +\nociteUsing BibTeX\citethebibliography +\nocite +\nocite + +\nocite{key_list} The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list, which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file. - -Using BibTeX -\nocite -thebibliography - - -Using Bib&tex; - -using Bib&tex;bib&tex;, usingbibliography, creating (automatically)\bibliographystyle\bibliography +Using BibTeX\nocitethebibliography +Using Bib&tex; + +using Bib&tex; +bib&tex;, using +bibliography, creating (automatically) +\bibliographystyle +\bibliography + If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of -titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the -thebibliography environment (see thebibliography). Instead, +titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don&textrsquo;t use the +thebibliography environment (thebibliography). Instead, you include the lines -\bibliographystyle{bibstyle} -\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2} - + +
      \bibliographystyle{bibstyle}
      +\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2}
      +
      + The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be produced: bibstyle refers to a file bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are: -alpha -Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of +
      +alpha +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. -plain -Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. -unsrt -Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. -abbrv -Like plain, but more compact labels. -
      +
      plain +Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +unsrt +Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. +abbrv +Like plain, but more compact labels. + In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib. The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files @@ -3173,72 +2922,71 @@ Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and
      - -theorem -titlepage -thebibliography -Environments - -
      -<code>theorem</code> +theoremtitlepagethebibliographyEnvironments +
      theorem + +theorem environment +theorems, typesetting -theorem environmenttheorems, typesetting Synopsis: -\begin{theorem} + +
      \begin{theorem}
       theorem-text
      -\end{theorem}
      -
      -The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in
      +\end{theorem}
      +
      + +The theorem environment produces &textldquo;Theorem n&textrdquo; in boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem -(see \newtheorem). +(\newtheorem).
      - -titlepage -verbatim -theorem -Environments - -
      -<code>titlepage</code> +titlepageverbatimtheoremEnvironments +
      titlepage + +titlepage environment +making a title page +title pages, creating -titlepage environmentmaking a title pagetitle pages, creating Synopsis: -\begin{titlepage} + +
      \begin{titlepage}
       text
      -\end{titlepage}
      -
      +\end{titlepage}
      +
      + The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The \today command may be useful on title pages -(see \today). +(\today). -You can use the \maketitle command (see \maketitle) to +You can use the \maketitle command (\maketitle) to produce a standard title page without a titlepage environment.
      - -verbatim -verse -titlepage -Environments - -
      -<code>verbatim</code> +verbatimversetitlepageEnvironments +
      verbatim + +verbatim environment +verbatim text +simulating typed text +typed text, simulating +code, typesetting +computer programs, typesetting -verbatim environmentverbatim textsimulating typed texttyped text, simulatingcode, typesettingcomputer programs, typesetting Synopsis: -\begin{verbatim} + +
      \begin{verbatim}
       literal-text
      -\end{verbatim}
      -
      +\end{verbatim}
      +
      + The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the \ character produces a printed \. It turns &latex; @@ -3248,59 +2996,59 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter. The verbatim uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). - -\verb -\verb - The macro form of the verbatim environment. - - - - -\verb -verbatim - - -<code>\verb</code> - -\verbverbatim text, inline +\verb
      The macro form of the verbatim environment.
      +
      + +\verbverbatim +\verb + +\verb +verbatim text, inline + Synopsis: -\verbcharliteral-textchar + +
      \verbcharliteral-textchar
       \verb*charliteral-textchar
      -
      +
      + The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (\tt) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb or \verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. -visible spaceThe *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a -“visible space” character. +visible space +The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a +&textldquo;visible space&textrdquo; character. + +(Namely, {\tt\char&textlsquo;\ }.) +
      - -verse -verbatim -Environments - -
      -<code>verse</code> +verseverbatimEnvironments +
      verse + +verse environment +poetry, an environment for -verse environmentpoetry, an environment for Synopsis: -\begin{verse} + +
      \begin{verse}
       line1 \\
       line2 \\
       ...
      -\end{verse}
      -
      +\end{verse}
      +
      + The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. -\\ for verseThe margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not +\\ for verse +The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. @@ -3308,15 +3056,11 @@ stanzas.
      - -Line breaking -Page breaking -Environments -Top - - -Line breaking -line breakingbreaking lines +Line breakingPage breakingEnvironmentsTop +Line breaking +line breaking +breaking lines + The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines @@ -3327,57 +3071,23 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the \\ command, and you can always manually force breaks. - -\\ -\\ - Start a new line. - - -\obeycr & \restorecr -\obeycr & \restorecr - Make each input line start a new output line. - - -\newline -\newline - Break the line - - -\- (hyphenation) -\- (hyphenation) - Insert explicit hyphenation. - - -\fussy -\fussy - Be fussy about line breaking. - - -\sloppy -\sloppy - Be sloppy about line breaking. - - -\hyphenation -\hyphenation - Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word. - - -\linebreak & \nolinebreak -\linebreak & \nolinebreak - Forcing & avoiding line breaks. - - - - - -\\ -\obeycr & \restorecr -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\\</code>[*][<var>morespace</var>] -\\ force line breaknew line, startingline break, forcing +\\
      Start a new line.
      +
      \obeycr & \restorecr
      Make each input line start a new output line.
      +
      \newline
      Break the line
      +
      \- (hyphenation)
      Insert explicit hyphenation.
      +
      \fussy
      Be fussy about line breaking.
      +
      \sloppy
      Be sloppy about line breaking.
      +
      \hyphenation
      Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word.
      +
      \linebreak & \nolinebreak
      Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
      +
      + + +\\\obeycr & \restorecrLine breaking +
      \\[*][morespace] +\\ force line break +new line, starting +line break, forcing + The \\ command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a @@ -3388,15 +3098,12 @@ except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line.
      - -\obeycr & \restorecr -\newline -\\ -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code> -\obeycr\restorecrnew line, output as input +\obeycr & \restorecr\newline\\Line breaking +
      \obeycr & \restorecr +\obeycr +\restorecr +new line, output as input + The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (^^M, internally) the same as \\ (followed by \relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line @@ -3406,30 +3113,22 @@ in the output.
      - -\newline -\- (hyphenation) -\obeycr & \restorecr -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\newline</code> -\newlinenew line, starting (paragraph mode) +\newline\- (hyphenation)\obeycr & \restorecrLine breaking +
      \newline +\newline +new line, starting (paragraph mode) + The \newline command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode.
      - -\- (hyphenation) -\fussy -\newline -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen) -\- (hyphenation)hyphenation, forcing +\- (hyphenation)\fussy\newlineLine breaking +
      \- (discretionary hyphen) +\- (hyphenation) +hyphenation, forcing + The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an @@ -3443,54 +3142,41 @@ that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.
      - -\fussy -\sloppy -\- (hyphenation) -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\fussy</code> -\fussy +\fussy\sloppy\- (hyphenation)Line breaking +
      \fussy +\fussy + The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command -(see \sloppy. +(\sloppy.
      - -\sloppy -\hyphenation -\fussy -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\sloppy</code> +\sloppy\hyphenation\fussyLine breaking +
      \sloppy The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. -Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). +Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (\fussy).
      - -\hyphenation -\linebreak & \nolinebreak -\sloppy -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\hyphenation</code> -\hyphenationhyphenation, defining +\hyphenation\linebreak & \nolinebreak\sloppyLine breaking +
      \hyphenation +\hyphenation +hyphenation, defining + Synopsis: -\hyphenation{word-one word-two} - + +
      \hyphenation{word-one word-two}
      +
      + The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points with a - character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no @@ -3498,23 +3184,26 @@ inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words): -\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} - + +
      \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
      +
      +
      - -\linebreak & \nolinebreak -\hyphenation -Line breaking - -
      -<code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code> -\linebreak\nolinebreakline breaks, forcingline breaks, preventing +\linebreak & \nolinebreak\hyphenationLine breaking +
      \linebreak & \nolinebreak +\linebreak +\nolinebreak +line breaks, forcing +line breaks, preventing + Synopses: -\linebreak[priority] + +
      \linebreak[priority]
       \nolinebreak[priority]
      -
      +
      + By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces (prevents) a line break at the current position. For \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it @@ -3527,57 +3216,30 @@ from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from
      - -Page breaking -Footnotes -Line breaking -Top - - -Page breaking -page breakingbreaking pages +Page breakingFootnotesLine breakingTop +Page breaking +page breaking +breaking pages + &latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - -\cleardoublepage -\cleardoublepage - Start a new right-hand page. - - -\clearpage -\clearpage - Start a new page. - - -\newpage -\newpage - Start a new page. - - -\enlargethispage -\enlargethispage - Enlarge the current page a bit. - - -\pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\pagebreak & \nopagebreak - Forcing & avoiding page breaks. - - - - - -\cleardoublepage -\clearpage -Page breaking - -
      -<code>\cleardoublepage</code> - -\cleardoublepagestarting on a right-hand page +\cleardoublepage
      Start a new right-hand page.
      +
      \clearpage
      Start a new page.
      +
      \newpage
      Start a new page.
      +
      \enlargethispage
      Enlarge the current page a bit.
      +
      \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
      Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
      +
      + + +\cleardoublepage\clearpagePage breaking +
      \cleardoublepage + +\cleardoublepage +starting on a right-hand page + The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand @@ -3585,49 +3247,39 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
      - -\clearpage -\newpage -\cleardoublepage -Page breaking - -
      -<code>\clearpage</code> -\clearpageflushing floats and starting a pagestarting a new page and clearing floats +\clearpage\newpage\cleardoublepagePage breaking +
      \clearpage +\clearpage +flushing floats and starting a page +starting a new page and clearing floats + The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
      - -\newpage -\enlargethispage -\clearpage -Page breaking - -
      -<code>\newpage</code> -\newpagenew page, startingstarting a new page +\newpage\enlargethispage\clearpagePage breaking +
      \newpage +\newpage +new page, starting +starting a new page + The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see \clearpage above).
      - -\enlargethispage -\pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\newpage -Page breaking - -
      -<code>\enlargethispage</code> -\enlargethispageenlarge current page -\enlargethispage{size} +\enlargethispage\pagebreak & \nopagebreak\newpagePage breaking +
      \enlargethispage +\enlargethispage +enlarge current page + +\enlargethispage{size} -\enlargethispage*{size} +\enlargethispage*{size} Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one +amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one additional line. The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as @@ -3636,22 +3288,23 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
      - -\pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\enlargethispage -Page breaking - -
      -<code>\pagebreak</code> & <code>\nopagebreak</code> -\pagebreak\nopagebreakpage break, forcingpage break, preventing +\pagebreak & \nopagebreak\enlargethispagePage breaking +
      \pagebreak & \nopagebreak +\pagebreak +\nopagebreak +page break, forcing +page break, preventing + Synopses: -\pagebreak[priority] + +
      \pagebreak[priority]
       \nopagebreak[priority]
      -
      +
      + By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For -\linebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out +(prevents) a page break at the current position. With +\pagebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. With the optional argument priority, you can convert the @@ -3662,61 +3315,34 @@ insistent the request is.
      - -Footnotes -Definitions -Page breaking -Top - - -Footnotes -footnotes, creating +FootnotesDefinitionsPage breakingTop +Footnotes +footnotes, creating + Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the \footnotetext commands. - -\footnote -\footnote - Insert a footnote. - - -\footnotemark -\footnotemark - Insert footnote mark only. - - -\footnotetext -\footnotetext - Insert footnote text only. - - -Symbolic footnotes -Symbolic footnotes - Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. - - -Footnote parameters -Footnote parameters - Parameters for footnote formatting. - - - - - -\footnote -\footnotemark -Footnotes - -
      -<code>\footnote</code> -\footnote +\footnote
      Insert a footnote.
      +
      \footnotemark
      Insert footnote mark only.
      +
      \footnotetext
      Insert footnote text only.
      +
      Symbolic footnotes
      Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes.
      +
      Footnote parameters
      Parameters for footnote formatting.
      +
      + + +\footnote\footnotemarkFootnotes +
      \footnote +\footnote + Synopsis: -\footnote[number]{text} - + +
      \footnote[number]{text}
      +
      + The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. @@ -3728,15 +3354,10 @@ tables or in a tabular environment. (See following sections.)
      - -\footnotemark -\footnotetext -\footnote -Footnotes - -
      -<code>\footnotemark</code> -\footnotemark +\footnotemark\footnotetext\footnoteFootnotes +
      \footnotemark +\footnotemark + With no optional argument, the \footnotemark command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, @@ -3745,25 +3366,25 @@ with the \footnotetext command. This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote with -\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] - + +
      \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
      +
      + + after the first \footnote command.
      - -\footnotetext -Symbolic footnotes -\footnotemark -Footnotes - -
      -<code>\footnotetext</code> -\footnotetext +\footnotetextSymbolic footnotes\footnotemarkFootnotes +
      \footnotetext +\footnotetext + Synopsis: -\footnotetext[number]{text} - + +
      \footnotetext[number]{text}
      +
      + The \footnotetext command places text at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must @@ -3773,314 +3394,270 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode.
      - -Symbolic footnotes -Footnote parameters -\footnotetext -Footnotes - -
      -Symbolic footnotes +Symbolic footnotesFootnote parameters\footnotetextFootnotes +
      Symbolic footnotes -footnotes, symbolic instead of numberedIf you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered +If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing numbers, redefine \thefootnote like this: -\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} - -\fnsymbol, and footnotes\@fnsymbolThe \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols -(see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to -use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also -redefine \@fnsymbol. + +
      \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
      +
      + +\fnsymbol, and footnotes +\&arobase;fnsymbol +The \fnsymbol command produces a predefined series of symbols +(\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you&textrsquo;ll need to also +redefine \&arobase;fnsymbol.
      - -Footnote parameters -Symbolic footnotes -Footnotes - -
      -Footnote parameters +Footnote parametersSymbolic footnotesFootnotes +
      Footnote parameters + +footnote parameters +parameters, for footnotes -footnote parametersparameters, for footnotes -\footnoterule\footnoterule -Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's + +\footnoterule\footnoterule +Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and 0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except slides, where it does not appear). -\footnotesep\footnotesep -The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +\footnotesep\footnotesep +The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize -fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between +fonts (Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt for 11pt, and 8.4pt for 12pt. -
      +
      - -Definitions -Counters -Footnotes -Top - - -Definitions -definitions +DefinitionsCountersFootnotesTop +Definitions +definitions + &latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. - -\newcommand & \renewcommand -\newcommand & \renewcommand - (Re)define a new command. - - -\newcounter -\newcounter - Define a new counter. - - -\newlength -\newlength - Define a new length. - - -\newsavebox -\newsavebox - Define a new box. - - -\newenvironment & \renewenvironment -\newenvironment & \renewenvironment - Define a new environment. - - -\newtheorem -\newtheorem - Define a new theorem-like environment. - - -\newfont -\newfont - Define a new font name. - - -\protect -\protect - Using tricky commands. - - - - - -\newcommand & \renewcommand -\newcounter -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newcommand</code> & <code>\renewcommand</code> -\newcommandcommands, defining new onesdefining a new commandnew commands, defining +\newcommand & \renewcommand
      (Re)define a new command.
      +
      \newcounter
      Define a new counter.
      +
      \newlength
      Define a new length.
      +
      \newsavebox
      Define a new box.
      +
      \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
      Define a new environment.
      +
      \newtheorem
      Define a new theorem-like environment.
      +
      \newfont
      Define a new font name.
      +
      \protect
      Using tricky commands.
      +
      + + +\newcommand & \renewcommand\newcounterDefinitions +
      \newcommand & \renewcommand +\newcommand +commands, defining new ones +defining a new command +new commands, defining + \newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: - \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} -\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} - \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} -\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} - + +
        \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
      +\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
      +  \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
      +\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
      +
      -cmd -The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it + +
      +cmd +The command name beginning with \. For \newcommand, it must not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for \renewcommand, it must already be defined. -nargs -An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +nargs +An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no arguments. -default -If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +default +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command&textrsquo;s first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified in the call) is the string def. -defn -The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a +defn +The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a construct of the form #n in defn is replaced by the text of the nth argument. -
      +
      - -\newcounter -\newlength -\newcommand & \renewcommand -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newcounter</code> -\newcountercounters, defining new +\newcounter\newlength\newcommand & \renewcommandDefinitions +
      \newcounter +\newcounter +counters, defining new + Synopsis: -\newcounter{cnt}[countername] - + +
      \newcounter{cnt}[countername]
      +
      + The \newcounter command defines a new counter named cnt. The new counter is initialized to zero. Given the optional argument [countername], cnt will be reset whenever countername is incremented. -See Counters, for more information about counters. +Counters, for more information about counters.
      - -\newlength -\newsavebox -\newcounter -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newlength</code> -\newlengthlengths, defining new +\newlength\newsavebox\newcounterDefinitions +
      \newlength +\newlength +lengths, defining new + Synopsis: -\newlength{\arg} - + +
      \newlength{\arg}
      +
      + The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument as a length command with a value of 0in. The argument must -be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error +be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}. An error occurs if \foo is already defined. -See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and +Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general.
      - -\newsavebox -\newenvironment & \renewenvironment -\newlength -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newsavebox</code> -\newsavebox +\newsavebox\newenvironment & \renewenvironment\newlengthDefinitions +
      \newsavebox +\newsavebox + Synopsis: -\newsavebox{cmd} - + +
      \newsavebox{cmd}
      +
      + Defines \cmd, which must be a command name not already defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
      - -\newenvironment & \renewenvironment -\newtheorem -\newsavebox -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newenvironment</code> & <code>\renewenvironment</code> -\newenvironment\renewenvironmentenvironments, definingdefining new environmentsredefining environments +\newenvironment & \renewenvironment\newtheorem\newsaveboxDefinitions +
      \newenvironment & \renewenvironment +\newenvironment +\renewenvironment +environments, defining +defining new environments +redefining environments + Synopses: - \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} - \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef} -\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} - + +
        \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
      +  \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef}
      +\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
      +
      + These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, -\begin{env} &dots; \end{env}. +\begin{env} &dots; \end{env}. -env -The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env +
      +env +The name of the environment. For \newenvironment, env must not be an existing environment, and the command \env must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be the name of an existing environment. -nargs -An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of +nargs +An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. -default -If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default +default +If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default gives the default value for that argument. -begdef -The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a +begdef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}; a construct of the form #n in begdef is replaced by the text of the nth argument. -enddef -The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It +enddef +The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}. It may not contain any argument parameters. -
      +
      - -\newtheorem -\newfont -\newenvironment & \renewenvironment -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newtheorem</code> -\newtheoremtheorems, definingdefining new theorems -\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] -\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} - +\newtheorem\newfont\newenvironment & \renewenvironmentDefinitions +
      \newtheorem +\newtheorem +theorems, defining +defining new theorems + + +
      \newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within]
      +\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label}
      +
      + This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: -newenv -The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an +
      +newenv +The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an existing environment or otherwise defined. -label -The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +label +The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the number. For example, Theorem. -numbered_like -(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; +numbered_like +(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. -within -(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. +within +(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the within counter. -
      + At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, not both.
      - -\newfont -\protect -\newtheorem -Definitions - -
      -<code>\newfont</code> -\newfontfonts, new commands fordefining new fonts +\newfont\protect\newtheoremDefinitions +
      \newfont +\newfont +fonts, new commands for +defining new fonts + Synopsis: -\newfont{cmd}{fontname} - + +
      \newfont{cmd}{fontname}
      +
      + Defines a control sequence \cmd, which must not already be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. @@ -4090,319 +3667,238 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files.
      - -\protect -\newfont -Definitions - -
      -<code>\protect</code> -\protect -fragile commandsmoving argumentsFootnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and +\protect\newfontDefinitions +
      \protect +\protect + +fragile commands +moving arguments +Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it must be preceded by \protect. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments must have their own \protect. Some examples of moving arguments are \caption -(see figure), \thanks (see \maketitle), and -expressions in tabular and array environments -(see tabular). +(figure), \thanks (\maketitle), and +&hyphenbreak;expressions in tabular and array environments +(tabular). -robust commandsCommands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not +robust commands +Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not be preceded by \protect. See also: -http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect + +http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect +
      - -Counters -Lengths -Definitions -Top - - -Counters -counters, a list ofvariables, a list of +CountersLengthsDefinitionsTop +Counters +counters, a list of +variables, a list of + Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or command that produces the number, except with no \. -(enumienumiv are used for the nested enumerate -environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;'s +(enumi&textndash;enumiv are used for the nested enumerate +environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document classes to control numbering. -part paragraph figure enumi + +
      part            paragraph       figure          enumi
       chapter         subparagraph    table           enumii
       section         page            footnote        enumiii
       subsection      equation        mpfootnote      enumiv
       subsubsection
      -
      +
      + - -\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol -\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol - Print value of a counter. - - -\usecounter -\usecounter - Use a specified counter in a list environment. - - -\value -\value - Use the value of a counter in an expression. - - -\setcounter -\setcounter - Set the value of a counter. - - -\addtocounter -\addtocounter - Add a quantity to a counter. - - -\refstepcounter -\refstepcounter - Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. - - -\stepcounter -\stepcounter - Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. - - -\day \month \year -\day \month \year - Numeric date values. - - - - - -\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol -\usecounter -Counters - -
      -<code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters +\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
      Print value of a counter.
      +
      \usecounter
      Use a specified counter in a list environment.
      +
      \value
      Use the value of a counter in an expression.
      +
      \setcounter
      Set the value of a counter.
      +
      \addtocounter
      Add a quantity to a counter.
      +
      \refstepcounter
      Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
      +
      \stepcounter
      Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
      +
      \day \month \year
      Numeric date values.
      +
      + + +\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol\usecounterCounters +
      \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for -instance, \alph{enumi}. +instance, \alph{enumi}. -\alph\alph -prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', &enddots; + +\alph\alph +prints counter using lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\Alph\Alph -uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', &enddots; +\Alph\Alph +uses uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\arabic\arabic -uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', &enddots; +\arabic\arabic +uses Arabic numbers: &textlsquo;1&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;2&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\roman\roman -uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', &enddots; +\roman\roman +uses lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\roman\roman -uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', &enddots; +\roman\roman +uses uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots; -\fnsymbol\fnsymbol -prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine +\fnsymbol\fnsymbol +prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. -The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: -asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel + +Here are the symbols: +$\ast$ $\dagger$ $\ddagger$ $\S$ $\P$ $\parallel$ +$\ast\ast$ $\dagger\dagger$ $\ddagger\ddagger$ + +The symbols mostly aren&textrsquo;t supported in Info, but here are the names: + +
      asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
       double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
      -
      -
      + + +
      - -\usecounter -\value -\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol -Counters - -
      -<code>\usecounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> -\usecounterlist items, specifying counternumbered items, specifying counter +\usecounter\value\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbolCounters +
      \usecounter{counter} +\usecounter +list items, specifying counter +numbered items, specifying counter + Synopsis: -\usecounter{counter} - + +
      \usecounter{counter}
      +
      + The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the list environment to specify counter to be used to number the list items.
      - -\value -\setcounter -\usecounter -Counters - -
      -<code>\value{<var>counter</var>}</code> -\valuecounters, getting value of +\value\setcounter\usecounterCounters +
      \value{counter} +\value +counters, getting value of + Synopsis: -\value{counter} - + +
      \value{counter}
      +
      + The \value command produces the value of counter. It can be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example: -\setcounter{myctr}{3} -\addtocounter{myctr}{1} -\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} - - -
      - -\setcounter -\addtocounter -\value -Counters - -
      -<code>\setcounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> -\setcountercounters, settingsetting counters + +
      \setcounter{myctr}{3}
      +\addtocounter{myctr}{1}
      +\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
      +
      + + +
      +\setcounter\addtocounter\valueCounters +
      \setcounter{counter}{value} +\setcounter +counters, setting +setting counters + Synopsis: -\setcounter{\counter}{value} - + +
      \setcounter{\counter}{value}
      +
      + The \setcounter command sets the value of \counter to the value argument.
      - -\addtocounter -\refstepcounter -\setcounter -Counters - -
      -<code>\addtocounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> -\addtocounter +\addtocounter\refstepcounter\setcounterCounters +
      \addtocounter{counter}{value} +\addtocounter + The \addtocounter command increments counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative.
      - -\refstepcounter -\stepcounter -\addtocounter -Counters - -
      -<code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> -\refstepcounter +\refstepcounter\stepcounter\addtocounterCounters +
      \refstepcounter{counter} +\refstepcounter + The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as -\stepcounter See \stepcounter, except it also defines the +\stepcounter \stepcounter, except it also defines the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter.
      - -\stepcounter -\day \month \year -\refstepcounter -Counters - -
      -<code>\stepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code> -\stepcounter +\stepcounter\day \month \year\refstepcounterCounters +
      \stepcounter{counter} +\stepcounter + The \stepcounter command adds one to counter and resets all subsidiary counters.
      - -\day \month \year -\stepcounter -Counters - -
      -<code>\day \month \year</code>: Predefined counters -\day\month\year +\day \month \year\stepcounterCounters +
      \day \month \year: Predefined counters +\day +\month +\year + &latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, -1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year +1&textndash;31), month of the year (\month, 1&textndash;12), and year (\year, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. The related command \today produces a string representing the -current day (see \today). +current day (\today).
      - -Lengths -Making paragraphs -Counters -Top - - -Lengths -lengths, defining and using +LengthsMaking paragraphsCountersTop +Lengths +lengths, defining and using + A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. - -\setlength -\setlength - Set the value of a length. - - -\addtolength -\addtolength - Add a quantity to a length. - - -\settodepth -\settodepth - Set a length to the depth of something. - - -\settoheight -\settoheight - Set a length to the height of something. - - -\settowidth -\settowidth - Set a length to the width of something. - - -Predefined lengths -Predefined lengths - Lengths that are, like, predefined. - - - - - -\setlength -\addtolength -Lengths - -
      -<code>\setlength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code> -\setlengthlengths, setting +\setlength
      Set the value of a length.
      +
      \addtolength
      Add a quantity to a length.
      +
      \settodepth
      Set a length to the depth of something.
      +
      \settoheight
      Set a length to the height of something.
      +
      \settowidth
      Set a length to the width of something.
      +
      Predefined lengths
      Lengths that are, like, predefined.
      +
      + + +\setlength\addtolengthLengths +
      \setlength{\len}{value} +\setlength +lengths, setting + The \setlength sets the value of \len to the value argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points @@ -4410,47 +3906,33 @@ understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), poin
      - -\addtolength -\settodepth -\setlength -Lengths - -
      -\addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>} -\addtolengthlengths, adding to -The \addtolength command increments a “length command” +\addtolength\settodepth\setlengthLengths +
      \addtolength{\len}{amount} +\addtolength +lengths, adding to + +The \addtolength command increments a &textldquo;length command&textrdquo; \len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which may be negative.
      - -\settodepth -\settoheight -\addtolength -Lengths - -
      -<code>\settodepth</code> -\settodepth -\settodepth{\gnat}{text} +\settodepth\settoheight\addtolengthLengths +
      \settodepth +\settodepth + +\settodepth{\gnat}{text} The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command equal to the depth of the text argument.
      - -\settoheight -\settowidth -\settodepth -Lengths - -
      -<code>\settoheight</code> -\settoheight -\settoheight{\gnat}{text} +\settoheight\settowidth\settodepthLengths +
      \settoheight +\settoheight + +\settoheight{\gnat}{text} The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command equal to the height of the text argument. @@ -4458,94 +3940,67 @@ equal to the height of the text argument.
      - -\settowidth -Predefined lengths -\settoheight -Lengths - -
      -<code>\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> -\settowidth +\settowidthPredefined lengths\settoheightLengths +
      \settowidth{\len}{text} +\settowidth + The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument. -
      - -Predefined lengths -\settowidth -Lengths - -
      -Predefined lengths -lengths, predefinedpredefined lengths +Predefined lengths\settowidthLengths +
      Predefined lengths +lengths, predefined +predefined lengths + \width -\width +\width + \height -\height +\height + \depth -\depth +\depth + \totalheight -\totalheight +\totalheight + These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the -text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + +commands (Boxes). They specify the natural width, etc., of +the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say -\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} +\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
      - -Making paragraphs -Math formulas -Lengths -Top - - -Making paragraphs -making paragraphsparagraphs -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not +Making paragraphsMath formulasLengthsTop +Making paragraphs +making paragraphs +paragraphs + +A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines&textmdash;lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command. - -\indent -\indent - Indent this paragraph. - - -\noindent -\noindent - Do not indent this paragraph. - - -\parskip -\parskip - Space added before paragraphs. - - -Marginal notes -Marginal notes - Putting remarks in the margin. - - - - - -\indent -\noindent -Making paragraphs - -
      -<code>\indent</code> -\indent\parindentindent, forcing +\indent
      Indent this paragraph.
      +
      \noindent
      Do not indent this paragraph.
      +
      \parskip
      Space added before paragraphs.
      +
      Marginal notes
      Putting remarks in the margin.
      +
      + + +\indent\noindentMaking paragraphs +
      \indent +\indent +\parindent +indent, forcing + \indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the \parindent length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would @@ -4557,47 +4012,40 @@ mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt
      - -\noindent -\parskip -\indent -Making paragraphs - -
      -<code>\noindent</code> -\noindentindent, suppressing +\noindent\parskip\indentMaking paragraphs +
      \noindent +\noindent +indent, suppressing + When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
      - -\parskip -Marginal notes -\noindent -Making paragraphs - -
      -<code>\parskip</code> -\parskipvertical space before paragraphs +\parskipMarginal notes\noindentMaking paragraphs +
      \parskip +\parskip +vertical space before paragraphs + \parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt.
      - -Marginal notes -\parskip -Making paragraphs - -
      -Marginal notes -marginal notesnotes in the marginremarks in the margin\marginpar +Marginal notes\parskipMaking paragraphs +
      Marginal notes +marginal notes +notes in the margin +remarks in the margin +\marginpar + Synopsis: -\marginpar[left]{right} - + +
      \marginpar[left]{right}
      +
      + The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text where the \marginpar occurs. @@ -4605,18 +4053,18 @@ where the \marginpar occurs. When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text will be placed - + + in the right margin for one-sided layout; - - + in the outside margin for two-sided layout; - - + in the nearest margin for two-column layout. - - + -\reversemarginpar\normalmarginparThe command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes +\reversemarginpar +\normalmarginpar +The command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them in the default position. @@ -4624,25 +4072,26 @@ in the default position. margin, and right is used for the right margin. The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. +hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. These parameters affect the formatting of the note: -\marginparpush\marginparpush -Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for + +\marginparpush\marginparpush +Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for 12pt documents, 5pt else. -\marginparsep\marginparsep -Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +\marginparsep\marginparsep +Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default 11pt for 10pt documents, 10pt else. -\marginparwidth\marginparwidth -Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document +\marginparwidth\marginparwidth +Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document is 90pt, 83pt for 11pt, and 68pt for 12pt; 17pt more in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the default is 48pt. -
      + The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes from falling off the bottom of the page. @@ -4653,1050 +4102,1081 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
      - -Math formulas -Modes -Making paragraphs -Top - - -Math formulas -math formulasformulas, mathmath mode, entering -math environmentdisplaymath environmentequation environmentThere are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: - -math -For formulas that appear right in the text. -displaymath -For formulas that appear on their own line. -equation -The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation +Math formulasModesMaking paragraphsTop +Math formulas +math formulas +formulas, math +math mode, entering + +math environment +displaymath environment +equation environment +There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: + +
      +math +For formulas that appear right in the text. +displaymath +For formulas that appear on their own line. +equation +The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation number in the right margin. -
      + -\(\)\[\]The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, +\( +\) +\[ +\] +The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: -\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} -\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} - -$In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even + +
      \(...\)   instead of   \begin{math}...\end{math}
      +\[...\]   instead of   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
      +
      + +$ +In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even shorter form: -$ ... $ instead of \(...\) - -\boldmath\unboldmathThe \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in + +
      $ ... $   instead of   \(...\)
      +
      + +\boldmath +\unboldmath +The \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the \unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used outside of math mode. -\displaystyleThe \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the +\displaystyle +The \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example -$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ - + +
      $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
      +
      + - -Subscripts & superscripts -Subscripts & superscripts - Also known as exponent or index. - - -Math symbols -Math symbols - Various mathematical squiggles. - - -Math functions -Math functions - Math function names like sin and exp. - - -Math accents -Math accents - Accents in math. - - -Spacing in math mode -Spacing in math mode - Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. - - -Math miscellany -Math miscellany - Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. - - - - - -Subscripts & superscripts -Math symbols -Math formulas - -
      -Subscripts & superscripts -superscriptsubscriptexponent_^ +Subscripts & superscripts
      Also known as exponent or index.
      +
      Math symbols
      Various mathematical squiggles.
      +
      Math functions
      Math function names like sin and exp.
      +
      Math accents
      Accents in math.
      +
      Spacing in math mode
      Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
      +
      Math miscellany
      Stuff that doesn&textrsquo;t fit anywhere else.
      +
      + + +Subscripts & superscriptsMath symbolsMath formulas +
      Subscripts & superscripts +superscript +subscript +exponent +_ +^ + To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type -_{exp}. To get exp to appear as a -superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles +_{exp}. To get exp to appear as a +superscript, you type ^{exp}. &latex; handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript.
      - -Math symbols -Math functions -Subscripts & superscripts -Math formulas - -
      -Math symbols -math symbolssymbols, mathgreek letters -&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to +Math symbolsMath functionsSubscripts & superscriptsMath formulas +
      Math symbols +math symbols +symbols, math +greek letters + +&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you&textrsquo;re likely to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. -\|\| -\| + +\|\| +\| -\aleph\aleph -\aleph +\aleph\aleph +\aleph -\alpha\alpha -\alpha +\alpha\alpha +\alpha -\amalg\amalg -\amalg (binary operation) +\amalg\amalg +\amalg (binary operation) -\angle\angle -\angle +\angle\angle +\angle -\approx\approx -\approx (relation) +\approx\approx +\approx (relation) -\ast\ast -\ast (binary operation) +\ast\ast +\ast (binary operation) -\asymp\asymp -\asymp (relation) +\asymp\asymp +\asymp (relation) -\backslash\backslash -\ (delimiter) +\backslash\backslash +\ (delimiter) -\beta\beta -\beta +\beta\beta +\beta -\bigcap\bigcap -\bigcap +\bigcap\bigcap +\bigcap -\bigcirc\bigcirc -\bigcirc (binary operation) +\bigcirc\bigcirc +\bigcirc (binary operation) -\bigcup\bigcup -\bigcup +\bigcup\bigcup +\bigcup -\bigodot\bigodot -\bigodot +\bigodot\bigodot +\bigodot -\bigoplus\bigoplus -\bigoplus +\bigoplus\bigoplus +\bigoplus -\bigotimes\bigotimes -\bigotimes +\bigotimes\bigotimes +\bigotimes -\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown -\bigtriangledown (binary operation) +\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangledown (binary operation) -\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup -\bigtriangleup (binary operation) +\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup +\bigtriangleup (binary operation) -\bigsqcup\bigsqcup -\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup -\biguplus\biguplus -\biguplus +\biguplus\biguplus +\biguplus -\bigcap\bigcap -\bigvee +\bigcap\bigcap +\bigvee -\bigwedge\bigwedge -\bigwedge +\bigwedge\bigwedge +\bigwedge -\bot\bot -\bot +\bot\bot +\bot -\bowtie\bowtie -\bowtie (relation) +\bowtie\bowtie +\bowtie (relation) -\Box\Box -(square open box symbol) +\Box\Box +(square open box symbol) -\bullet\bullet -bullet symbol\bullet (binary operation) +\bullet\bullet +bullet symbol +\bullet (binary operation) -\cap\cap -\cap (binary operation) +\cap\cap +\cap (binary operation) -\cdot\cdot -\cdot (binary operation) +\cdot\cdot +\cdot (binary operation) -\chi\chi -\chi +\chi\chi +\chi -\circ\circ -\circ (binary operation) +\circ\circ +\circ (binary operation) -\clubsuit\clubsuit -\clubsuit +\clubsuit\clubsuit +\clubsuit -\cong\cong -\cong (relation) +\cong\cong +\cong (relation) -\coprod\coprod -\coprod +\coprod\coprod +\coprod -\cup\cup -\cup (binary operation) +\cup\cup +\cup (binary operation) -\dagger\dagger -\dagger (binary operation) +\dagger\dagger +\dagger (binary operation) -\dashv\dashv -\dashv (relation) +\dashv\dashv +\dashv (relation) -\ddagger\ddagger -\dagger (binary operation) +\ddagger\ddagger +\dagger (binary operation) -\Delta\Delta -\Delta +\Delta\Delta +\Delta -\delta\delta -\delta +\delta\delta +\delta -\Diamond\Diamond -bigger \diamond +\Diamond\Diamond +bigger \diamond -\diamond\diamond -\diamond (binary operation) +\diamond\diamond +\diamond (binary operation) -\diamondsuit\diamondsuit -\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit -\div\div -\div (binary operation) +\div\div +\div (binary operation) -\doteq\doteq -\doteq (relation) +\doteq\doteq +\doteq (relation) -\downarrow\downarrow -\downarrow (delimiter) +\downarrow\downarrow +\downarrow (delimiter) -\Downarrow\Downarrow -\Downarrow (delimiter) +\Downarrow\Downarrow +\Downarrow (delimiter) -\ell\ell -\ell +\ell\ell +\ell -\emptyset\emptyset -\emptyset +\emptyset\emptyset +\emptyset -\epsilon\epsilon -\epsilon +\epsilon\epsilon +\epsilon -\equiv\equiv -\equiv (relation) +\equiv\equiv +\equiv (relation) -\eta\eta -\eta +\eta\eta +\eta -\exists\exists -\exists +\exists\exists +\exists -\flat\flat -\flat +\flat\flat +\flat -\forall\forall -\forall +\forall\forall +\forall -\frown\frown -\frown (relation) +\frown\frown +\frown (relation) -\Gamma\Gamma -\Gamma +\Gamma\Gamma +\Gamma -\gamma\gamma -\gamma +\gamma\gamma +\gamma -\ge\ge -\ge +\ge\ge +\ge -\geq\geq -\geq (relation) +\geq\geq +\geq (relation) -\gets\gets -\gets +\gets\gets +\gets -\gg\gg -\gg (relation) +\gg\gg +\gg (relation) -\hbar\hbar -\hbar +\hbar\hbar +\hbar -\heartsuit\heartsuit -\heartsuit +\heartsuit\heartsuit +\heartsuit -\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow -\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow -\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow -\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow -\iff\iff -\iff +\iff\iff +\iff -\Im\Im -\Im +\Im\Im +\Im -\in\in -\in (relation) +\in\in +\in (relation) -\infty\infty -\infty +\infty\infty +\infty -\int\int -\int +\int\int +\int -\iota\iota -\iota +\iota\iota +\iota -\Join\Join -condensed bowtie symbol (relation) +\Join\Join +condensed bowtie symbol (relation) -\kappa\kappa -\kappa +\kappa\kappa +\kappa -\Lambda\Lambda -\Lambda +\Lambda\Lambda +\Lambda -\lambda\lambda -\lambda +\lambda\lambda +\lambda -\land\land -\land +\land\land +\land -\langle\langle -\langle (delimiter) +\langle\langle +\langle (delimiter) -\lbrace\lbrace -\lbrace (delimiter) +\lbrace\lbrace +\lbrace (delimiter) -\lbrack\lbrack -\lbrack (delimiter) +\lbrack\lbrack +\lbrack (delimiter) -\lceil\lceil -\lceil (delimiter) +\lceil\lceil +\lceil (delimiter) -\le\le -\le +\le\le +\le -\leadsto\leadsto - +\leadsto\leadsto + -\Leftarrow\Leftarrow -\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow -\leftarrow\leftarrow -\leftarrow +\leftarrow\leftarrow +\leftarrow -\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown -\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown -\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup -\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup -\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow -\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow -\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow -\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow -\leq\leq -\leq (relation) +\leq\leq +\leq (relation) -\lfloor\lfloor -\lfloor (delimiter) +\lfloor\lfloor +\lfloor (delimiter) -\lhd\lhd -(left-pointing arrow head) +\lhd\lhd +(left-pointing arrow head) -\ll\ll -\ll (relation) +\ll\ll +\ll (relation) -\lnot\lnot -\lnot +\lnot\lnot +\lnot -\longleftarrow\longleftarrow -\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow -\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow -\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow -\longmapsto\longmapsto -\longmapsto +\longmapsto\longmapsto +\longmapsto -\longrightarrow\longrightarrow -\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow -\lor\lor -\lor +\lor\lor +\lor -\mapsto\mapsto -\mapsto +\mapsto\mapsto +\mapsto -\mho\mho - +\mho\mho + -\mid\mid -\mid (relation) +\mid\mid +\mid (relation) -\models\models -\models (relation) +\models\models +\models (relation) -\mp\mp -\mp (binary operation) +\mp\mp +\mp (binary operation) -\mu\mu -\mu +\mu\mu +\mu -\nabla\nabla -\nabla +\nabla\nabla +\nabla -\natural\natural -\natural +\natural\natural +\natural -\ne\ne -\ne +\ne\ne +\ne -\nearrow\nearrow -\nearrow +\nearrow\nearrow +\nearrow -\neg\neg -\neg +\neg\neg +\neg -\neq\neq -\neq (relation) +\neq\neq +\neq (relation) -\ni\ni -\ni (relation) +\ni\ni +\ni (relation) -\not\not -Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. +\not\not +Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. -\notin\notin -\ni +\notin\notin +\ni -\nu\nu -\nu +\nu\nu +\nu -\nwarrow\nwarrow -\nwarrow +\nwarrow\nwarrow +\nwarrow -\odot\odot -\odot (binary operation) +\odot\odot +\odot (binary operation) -\oint\oint -\oint +\oint\oint +\oint -\Omega\Omega -\Omega +\Omega\Omega +\Omega -\omega\omega -\omega +\omega\omega +\omega -\ominus\ominus -\ominus (binary operation) +\ominus\ominus +\ominus (binary operation) -\oplus\oplus -\oplus (binary operation) +\oplus\oplus +\oplus (binary operation) -\oslash\oslash -\oslash (binary operation) +\oslash\oslash +\oslash (binary operation) -\otimes\otimes -\otimes (binary operation) +\otimes\otimes +\otimes (binary operation) -\owns\owns -\owns +\owns\owns +\owns -\parallel\parallel -\parallel (relation) +\parallel\parallel +\parallel (relation) -\partial\partial -\partial +\partial\partial +\partial -\perp\perp -\perp (relation) +\perp\perp +\perp (relation) -\phi\phi -\phi +\phi\phi +\phi -\Pi\Pi -\Pi +\Pi\Pi +\Pi -\pi\pi -\pi +\pi\pi +\pi -\pm\pm -\pm (binary operation) +\pm\pm +\pm (binary operation) -\prec\prec -\prec (relation) +\prec\prec +\prec (relation) -\preceq\preceq -\preceq (relation) +\preceq\preceq +\preceq (relation) -\prime\prime -\prime +\prime\prime +\prime -\prod\prod -\prod +\prod\prod +\prod -\propto\propto -\propto (relation) +\propto\propto +\propto (relation) -\Psi\Psi -\Psi +\Psi\Psi +\Psi -\psi\psi -\psi +\psi\psi +\psi -\rangle\rangle -\rangle (delimiter) +\rangle\rangle +\rangle (delimiter) -\rbrace\rbrace -\rbrace (delimiter) +\rbrace\rbrace +\rbrace (delimiter) -\rbrack\rbrack -\rbrack (delimiter) +\rbrack\rbrack +\rbrack (delimiter) -\rceil\rceil -\rceil (delimiter) +\rceil\rceil +\rceil (delimiter) -\Re\Re -\Re +\Re\Re +\Re -\rfloor\rfloor -\rfloor +\rfloor\rfloor +\rfloor -\rhd\rhd -(binary operation) +\rhd\rhd +(binary operation) -\rho\rho -\rho +\rho\rho +\rho -\Rightarrow\Rightarrow -\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow -\rightarrow\rightarrow -\rightarrow +\rightarrow\rightarrow +\rightarrow -\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown -\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown -\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup -\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup -\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons -\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons -\searrow\searrow -\searrow +\searrow\searrow +\searrow -\setminus\setminus -\setminus (binary operation) +\setminus\setminus +\setminus (binary operation) -\sharp\sharp -\sharp +\sharp\sharp +\sharp -\Sigma\Sigma -\Sigma +\Sigma\Sigma +\Sigma -\sigma\sigma -\sigma +\sigma\sigma +\sigma -\sim\sim -\sim (relation) +\sim\sim +\sim (relation) -\simeq\simeq -\simeq (relation) +\simeq\simeq +\simeq (relation) -\smallint\smallint -\smallint +\smallint\smallint +\smallint -\smile\smile -\smile (relation) +\smile\smile +\smile (relation) -\spadesuit\spadesuit -\spadesuit +\spadesuit\spadesuit +\spadesuit -\sqcap\sqcap -\sqcap (binary operation) +\sqcap\sqcap +\sqcap (binary operation) -\sqcup\sqcup -\sqcup (binary operation) +\sqcup\sqcup +\sqcup (binary operation) -\sqsubset\sqsubset -(relation) +\sqsubset\sqsubset +(relation) -\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq -\sqsubseteq (relation) +\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq +\sqsubseteq (relation) -\sqsupset\sqsupset -(relation) +\sqsupset\sqsupset +(relation) -\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq -\sqsupseteq (relation) +\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq +\sqsupseteq (relation) -\star\star -\star (binary operation) +\star\star +\star (binary operation) -\subset\subset -\subset (relation) +\subset\subset +\subset (relation) -\subseteq\subseteq -\subseteq (relation) +\subseteq\subseteq +\subseteq (relation) -\succ\succ -\succ (relation) +\succ\succ +\succ (relation) -\succeq\succeq -\succeq (relation) +\succeq\succeq +\succeq (relation) -\sum\sum -\sum +\sum\sum +\sum -\supset\supset -\supset (relation) +\supset\supset +\supset (relation) -\supseteq\supseteq -\supseteq (relation) +\supseteq\supseteq +\supseteq (relation) -\surd\surd -\surd +\surd\surd +\surd -\swarrow\swarrow -\swarrow +\swarrow\swarrow +\swarrow -\tau\tau -\tau +\tau\tau +\tau -\theta\theta -\theta +\theta\theta +\theta -\times\times -\times (binary operation) +\times\times +\times (binary operation) -\to\to -\to +\to\to +\to -\top\top -\top +\top\top +\top -\triangle\triangle -\triangle +\triangle\triangle +\triangle -\triangleleft\triangleleft -\triangleleft (binary operation) +\triangleleft\triangleleft +\triangleleft (binary operation) -\triangleright\triangleright -\triangleright (binary operation) +\triangleright\triangleright +\triangleright (binary operation) -\unlhd\unlhd -left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) +\unlhd\unlhd +left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -\unrhd\unrhd -right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) +\unrhd\unrhd +right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -\Uparrow\Uparrow -\Uparrow (delimiter) +\Uparrow\Uparrow +\Uparrow (delimiter) -\uparrow\uparrow -\uparrow (delimiter) +\uparrow\uparrow +\uparrow (delimiter) -\Updownarrow\Updownarrow -\Updownarrow (delimiter) +\Updownarrow\Updownarrow +\Updownarrow (delimiter) -\updownarrow\updownarrow -\updownarrow (delimiter) +\updownarrow\updownarrow +\updownarrow (delimiter) -\uplus\uplus -\uplus (binary operation) +\uplus\uplus +\uplus (binary operation) -\Upsilon\Upsilon -\Upsilon +\Upsilon\Upsilon +\Upsilon -\upsilon\upsilon -\upsilon +\upsilon\upsilon +\upsilon -\varepsilon\varepsilon -\varepsilon +\varepsilon\varepsilon +\varepsilon -\varphi\varphi -\varphi +\varphi\varphi +\varphi -\varpi\varpi -\varpi +\varpi\varpi +\varpi -\varrho\varrho -\varrho +\varrho\varrho +\varrho -\varsigma\varsigma -\varsigma +\varsigma\varsigma +\varsigma -\vartheta\vartheta -\vartheta +\vartheta\vartheta +\vartheta -\vdash\vdash -\vdash (relation) +\vdash\vdash +\vdash (relation) -\vee\vee -\vee (binary operation) +\vee\vee +\vee (binary operation) -\Vert\Vert -\Vert (delimiter) +\Vert\Vert +\Vert (delimiter) -\vert\vert -\vert (delimiter) +\vert\vert +\vert (delimiter) -\wedge\wedge -\wedge (binary operation) +\wedge\wedge +\wedge (binary operation) -\wp\wp -\wp +\wp\wp +\wp -\wr\wr -\wr (binary operation) +\wr\wr +\wr (binary operation) -\Xi\Xi -\Xi +\Xi\Xi +\Xi -\xi\xi -\xi +\xi\xi +\xi -\zeta\zeta -\zeta +\zeta\zeta +\zeta -
      +
      - -Math functions -Math accents -Math symbols -Math formulas - -
      -Math functions -math functionsfunctions, math +Math functionsMath accentsMath symbolsMath formulas +
      Math functions +math functions +functions, math + These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. -\arccos\arccos -\arccos + +\arccos\arccos +\arccos -\arcsin\arcsin -\arcsin +\arcsin\arcsin +\arcsin -\arctan\arctan -\arctan +\arctan\arctan +\arctan -\arg\arg -\arg +\arg\arg +\arg -\bmod\bmod -Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) +\bmod\bmod +Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) -\cos\cos -\cos +\cos\cos +\cos -\cosh\cosh -\cosh +\cosh\cosh +\cosh -\cot\cot -\cos +\cot\cot +\cos -\coth\coth -\cosh +\coth\coth +\cosh -\csc\csc -\csc +\csc\csc +\csc -\deg\deg -\deg +\deg\deg +\deg -\det\det -\deg +\det\det +\deg -\dim\dim -\dim +\dim\dim +\dim -\exp\exp -\exp +\exp\exp +\exp -\gcd\gcd -\gcd +\gcd\gcd +\gcd -\hom\hom -\hom +\hom\hom +\hom -\inf\inf -\inf +\inf\inf +\inf -\ker\ker -\ker +\ker\ker +\ker -\lg\lg -\lg +\lg\lg +\lg -\lim\lim -\lim +\lim\lim +\lim -\liminf\liminf -\liminf +\liminf\liminf +\liminf -\limsup\limsup -\limsup +\limsup\limsup +\limsup -\ln\ln -\ln +\ln\ln +\ln -\log\log -\log +\log\log +\log -\max\max -\max +\max\max +\max -\min\min -\min +\min\min +\min -\pmod\pmod -parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) +\pmod\pmod +parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) -\Pr\Pr -\Pr +\Pr\Pr +\Pr -\sec\sec -\sec +\sec\sec +\sec -\sin\sin -\sin +\sin\sin +\sin -\sinh\sinh -\sinh +\sinh\sinh +\sinh -\sup\sup -\sup +\sup\sup +\sup -\tan\tan -\tan +\tan\tan +\tan -\tanh\tanh -\tanh +\tanh\tanh +\tanh -
      +
      - -Math accents -Spacing in math mode -Math functions -Math formulas - -
      -Math accents -math accentsaccents, mathematical +Math accentsSpacing in math modeMath functionsMath formulas +
      Math accents +math accents +accents, mathematical + &latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text -(see Accents). +(Accents). + + +\acute\acute +acute accent, math +Math acute accent: \acute{x}. -\acute\acute -acute accent, mathMath acute accent: \acute{x}. +\bar\bar +bar-over accent, math +macron accent, math +Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. -\bar\bar -bar-over accent, mathmacron accent, mathMath bar-over accent: \bar{x}. +\breve\breve +breve accent, math +Math breve accent: \breve{x}. -\breve\breve -breve accent, mathMath breve accent: \breve{x}. +\check\check +check accent, math +hacek accent, math +Math hacek (check) accent: \check{x}. -\check\check -check accent, mathhác<ek accent, mathMath hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}. +\ddot\ddot +double dot accent, math +Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. -\ddot\ddot -double dot accent, mathMath dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. +\dot\dot +overdot accent, math +dot over accent, math +Math dot accent: \dot{x}. -\dot\dot -overdot accent, mathdot over accent, mathMath dot accent: \dot{x}. +\grave\grave +grave accent, math +Math grave accent: \grave{x}. -\grave\grave -grave accent, mathMath grave accent: \grave{x}. +\hat\hat +hat accent, math +circumflex accent, math +Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. -\hat\hat -hat accent, mathcircumflex accent, mathMath hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. +\imath\imath +dotless i, math +Math dotless i. -\imath\imath -dotless i, mathMath dotless i. +\jmath\jmath +dotless j, math +Math dotless j. -\jmath\jmath -dotless j, mathMath dotless j. +\mathring\mathring +ring accent, math +Math ring accent: x. -\tilde\tilde -tilde accent, mathMath tilde accent: \tilde{x}. +\tilde\tilde +tilde accent, math +Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}. -\vec\vec -vector symbol, mathMath vector symbol: \vec{x}. +\vec\vec +vector symbol, math +Math vector symbol: \vec{x}. -\widehat\widehat -wide hat accent, mathMath wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. +\widehat\widehat +wide hat accent, math +Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. -\widehat\widehat -wide tile accent, mathMath wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. +\widehat\widehat +wide tile accent, math +Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. -
      +
      - -Spacing in math mode -Math miscellany -Math accents -Math formulas - -
      -Spacing in math mode -spacing within math modemath mode, spacing +Spacing in math modeMath miscellanyMath accentsMath formulas +
      Spacing in math mode +spacing within math mode +math mode, spacing + In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, &latex; provides the following commands for use in math mode: -\; -\;A thick space (5\over18\,quad). -\: -\> -\:\>Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). -\, -\,A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. -\! -A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). -
      - - -
      - -Math miscellany -Spacing in math mode -Math formulas - -
      -Math miscellany -math miscellany -\*\* -discretionary multiplicationmultiplication symbol, discretionary line breakA “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is +
      +\; +\; +A thick space (5\over18\,quad). +\: +\> +\: +\> +Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). +\, +\, +A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. +\! +A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad). +
      + + +
      +Math miscellanySpacing in math modeMath formulas +
      Math miscellany +math miscellany + + + +\*\* +discretionary multiplication +multiplication symbol, discretionary line break +A &textldquo;discretionary&textrdquo; multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. -\cdots\cdots -A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. +\cdots\cdots +A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. + +As in: &textlsquo;$\cdots$&textrsquo;. + -\ddots\ddots -A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. +\ddots\ddots +A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. -\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} -\fracProduces the fraction num divided by den. +\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} +\frac +Produces the fraction num divided by den. -\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 -\rightnull delimiterThe two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter, +\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 +\right +null delimiter +The two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]. -\overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} -Generates a brace over text. +\overbrace{text}\overbrace{text} +Generates a brace over text. For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. -\overline{text}\overline{text} -Generates a horizontal line over tex. +\overline{text}\overline{text} +Generates a horizontal line over tex. For exampe, \overline{x+y}. -\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} -Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The +\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} +Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as -$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. - -\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} -Puts text above relation. For example, -\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. - -\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} -Generates math with a brace underneath. - -\underline{text}\underline{text} -Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be +$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$. + +In &tex;, the result looks like this: +$\root 3 \of x+y$. + + +\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} +Puts text above relation. For example, +\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. + +In &tex;, the result looks like this: +$\buildrel f \over \longrightarrow$. + + +\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} +Generates math with a brace underneath. + +In &tex;, the result looks like this: +$\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}$. + + +\underline{text}\underline{text} +Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. + +In &tex;, the result looks like this: +$\underline{xyz}$ + -\vdots\vdots -\vdotsProduces a vertical ellipsis. +\vdots\vdots +\vdots +Produces a vertical ellipsis. + +In &tex;, the result looks like this: +$\vdots$. + - +
      - -Modes -Page styles -Math formulas -Top - - -Modes -modesparagraph modemath modeleft-to-right modelR mode +ModesPage stylesMath formulasTop +Modes +modes +paragraph mode +math mode +left-to-right mode +lR mode + When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: - + + Paragraph mode - - + Math mode - - + Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - - + &latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when &latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. -“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in +&textldquo;Paragraph mode&textrdquo; is the most common; it&textrsquo;s the one &latex; is in when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in -“math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR -mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it +&textldquo;math mode&textrdquo; when it&textrsquo;s generating a mathematical formula. In &textldquo;LR +mode&textrdquo;, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words @@ -5711,169 +5191,152 @@ There are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in -“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out -in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. +&textldquo;inner paragraph mode&textrdquo;. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out +in, is called &textldquo;outer paragraph mode&textrdquo;. - -Page styles -Spaces -Modes -Top - - -Page styles -styles, pagepage styles +Page stylesSpacesModesTop +Page styles +styles, page +page styles + The \documentclass command determines the size and position of -the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. +the page&textrsquo;s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. - -\maketitle -\maketitle - Generate a title page. - - -\pagenumbering -\pagenumbering - Set the style used for page numbers. - - -\pagestyle -\pagestyle - Change the headings/footings style. - - -\thispagestyle -\thispagestyle - Change the headings/footings style for this page. - - - - - -\maketitle -\pagenumbering -Page styles - -
      -<code>\maketitle</code> -titles, making\maketitle +\maketitle
      Generate a title page.
      +
      \pagenumbering
      Set the style used for page numbers.
      +
      \pagestyle
      Change the headings/footings style.
      +
      \thispagestyle
      Change the headings/footings style for this page.
      +
      + + +\maketitle\pagenumberingPage styles +
      \maketitle +titles, making +\maketitle + The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title -page—except in the article class, where the title is placed +page&textmdash;except in the article class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations: -\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} -author, for titlepage\\ for \author\and for \authorThe \author command declares the document author(s), where the + +\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} +author, for titlepage +\\ for \author +\and for \author +The \author command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use -\\ to separate lines within a single author's entry—for -example, to give the author's institution or address. +\\ to separate lines within a single author&textrsquo;s entry&textmdash;for +example, to give the author&textrsquo;s institution or address. -\date{text}\date{text} -date, for titlepageThe \date command declares text to be the document's -date. With no \date command, the current date (see \today) +\date{text}\date{text} +date, for titlepage +The \date command declares text to be the document&textrsquo;s +date. With no \date command, the current date (\today) is used. -\thanks{text}\thanks{text} -thanks, for titlepagecredit footnoteThe \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, +\thanks{text}\thanks{text} +thanks, for titlepage +credit footnote +The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. -\title{text}\title{text} -title, for titlepage\\ for \titleThe \title command declares text to be the title of the +\title{text}\title{text} +title, for titlepage +\\ for \title +The \title command declares text to be the title of the document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. -
      +
      - -\pagenumbering -\pagestyle -\maketitle -Page styles - -
      -<code>\pagenumbering</code> -\pagenumberingpage numbering style +\pagenumbering\pagestyle\maketitlePage styles +
      \pagenumbering +\pagenumbering +page numbering style + Synopsis: -\pagenumbering{style} - + +
      \pagenumbering{style}
      +
      + Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style: -arabic -arabic numerals -roman -lowercase Roman numerals -Roman -uppercase Roman numerals -alph -lowercase letters -Alph -uppercase letters -
      - - -
      - -\pagestyle -\thispagestyle -\pagenumbering -Page styles - -
      -<code>\pagestyle</code> -\pagestyleheader stylefooter stylerunning header and footer style + +arabic +arabic numerals +roman +lowercase Roman numerals +Roman +uppercase Roman numerals +alph +lowercase letters +Alph +uppercase letters +
      + + +
      +\pagestyle\thispagestyle\pagenumberingPage styles +
      \pagestyle +\pagestyle +header style +footer style +running header and footer style + Synopsis: -\pagestyle{style} - + +
      \pagestyle{style}
      +
      + The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: -plain -Just a plain page number. +
      +plain +Just a plain page number. -empty -Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. +empty +Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. -headings -Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what +headings +Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what goes in the headers. -myheadings -Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the +myheadings +Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the \markright commands. -
      + Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: -\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} -Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” + +\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} +Sets both the left and the right heading. A &textldquo;left-hand heading&textrdquo; (left) is generated by the last \markboth command before -the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is +the end of the page, while a &textldquo;right-hand heading&textrdquo; (right is generated by the first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. -\markright{right}\markright{right} -Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. +\markright{right}\markright{right} +Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. -
      +
      - -\thispagestyle -\pagestyle -Page styles - -
      -<code>\thispagestyle{<var>style</var>}</code> -\thispagestyle +\thispagestyle\pagestylePage styles +
      \thispagestyle{style} +\thispagestyle + The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the \pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it changes to style for the current page only. @@ -5881,100 +5344,45 @@ changes to style for the current page only.
      - -Spaces -Boxes -Page styles -Top - - -Spaces -spaces +SpacesBoxesPage stylesTop +Spaces +spaces + &latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. -Another space-producing command is \, to produce a “thin” +Another space-producing command is \, to produce a &textldquo;thin&textrdquo; space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is -more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in math mode). +more often useful in math mode (Spacing in math mode). -Horizontal space - -\hspace -\hspace - Fixed horizontal space. - - -\hfill -\hfill - Stretchable horizontal space. - - -\SPACE -\SPACE - Normal interword space. - - -\AT -\AT - Ending a sentence. - - -\thinspace -\thinspace - One-sixth of an em. - - -\/ -\/ - Per-character italic correction. - - -\hrulefill -\hrulefill - Stretchable horizontal rule. - - -\dotfill -\dotfill - Stretchable horizontal dots. - - -Vertical space - -\addvspace -\addvspace - Add arbitrary vertical space if needed. - - -\bigskip \medskip \smallskip -\bigskip \medskip \smallskip - Fixed vertical spaces. - - -\vfill -\vfill - Infinitely stretchable vertical space. - - -\vspace -\vspace - Add arbitrary vertical space. - - - - - -\hspace -\hfill -Spaces - -
      -<code>\hspace</code> -\hspace +
      Horizontal space
      +
      \hspace
      Fixed horizontal space.
      +
      \hfill
      Stretchable horizontal space.
      +
      \SPACE
      Normal interword space.
      +
      \AT
      Ending a sentence.
      +
      \thinspace
      One-sixth of an em.
      +
      \/
      Per-character italic correction.
      +
      \hrulefill
      Stretchable horizontal rule.
      +
      \dotfill
      Stretchable horizontal dots.
      +
      +Vertical space
      +
      \addvspace
      Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
      +
      \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
      Fixed vertical spaces.
      +
      \vfill
      Infinitely stretchable vertical space.
      +
      \vspace
      Add arbitrary vertical space.
      +
      + + +\hspace\hfillSpaces +
      \hspace +\hspace + Synopsis: -\hspace[*]{length} - + +
      \hspace[*]{length}
      +
      + The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length argument can be expressed in any terms that &latex; understands: points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both @@ -5987,36 +5395,29 @@ form.
      - -\hfill -\SPACE -\hspace -Spaces - -
      -<code>\hfill</code> +\hfill\SPACE\hspaceSpaces +
      \hfill -\hfillThe \hfill fill command produces a “rubber length” which has +\hfill +The \hfill fill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. -\fillThe \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, +\fill +The \fill parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the glue value 0pt plus1fill); thus, \hspace\fill is equivalent to \hfill.
      - -\SPACE -\AT -\hfill -Spaces - -
      -<code>\SPACE</code> -\SPACE\TAB\NEWLINE -The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's -useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example +\SPACE\AT\hfillSpaces +
      \SPACE +\SPACE +\TAB +\NEWLINE + +The \ (space) command produces a normal interword space. It&textrsquo;s +useful after punctuation which shouldn&textrsquo;t end a sentence. For example Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental. It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a nice system. @@ -6026,117 +5427,97 @@ are equivalent to \ .
      - -\AT -\thinspace -\SPACE -Spaces - -
      -<code>\@</code> -\@ -The \@ command makes the following punctuation character end a +\AT\thinspace\SPACESpaces +
      \&arobase; +\&arobase; + +The \&arobase; command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without -\@: +\&arobase;: -&dots; in C\@. Pascal, though &dots; -&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; - -produces + +
      &dots; in C\&arobase;. Pascal, though &dots;
      +&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots;
      +
      + +produces -&dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots; -&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots; +&dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots; +&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots;
      - -\thinspace -\/ -\AT -Spaces - -
      -<code>\thinspace</code> -\thinspace +\thinspace\/\ATSpaces +
      \thinspace +\thinspace + \thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as -in '. +in &textrsquo;&textrdquo;.
      - -\/ -\hrulefill -\thinspace -Spaces - -
      -<code>\/</code> -\/ +\/\hrulefill\thinspaceSpaces +
      \/ +\/ + The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character typically has a large italic correction value. -If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to +If the following character is a period or comma, it&textrsquo;s not necessary to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as normal letters, it can help. Compare -f: f; (in the &tex; output, the `f's are nicely separated) + +{\it f\/: f\/;} + +f: f; (in the &tex; output, the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;s are nicely separated) with f: f;. Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare -pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the `f') + +pdf\/\TeX{} + +pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;) with pdf&tex;.
      - -\hrulefill -\dotfill -\/ -Spaces - -
      -<code>\hrulefill</code> -\hrulefill -The \hrulefill fill command produces a “rubber length” which can +\hrulefill\dotfill\/Spaces +
      \hrulefill +\hrulefill + +The \hrulefill fill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule.
      - -\dotfill -\addvspace -\hrulefill -Spaces - -
      -<code>\dotfill</code> +\dotfill\addvspace\hrulefillSpaces +
      \dotfill -\dotfill -The \dotfill command produces a “rubber length” that fills +\dotfill + +The \dotfill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; that fills with dots instead of just white space.
      - -\addvspace -\bigskip \medskip \smallskip -\dotfill -Spaces - -
      -<code>\addvspace</code> -\addvspacevertical spacespace, inserting vertical -\addvspace{length} +\addvspace\bigskip \medskip \smallskip\dotfillSpaces +
      \addvspace +\addvspace +vertical space +space, inserting vertical + +\addvspace{length} The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same @@ -6146,62 +5527,56 @@ of the total vertical space equal to length.
      - -\bigskip \medskip \smallskip -\vfill -\addvspace -Spaces - -
      -<code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code> +\bigskip \medskip \smallskip\vfill\addvspaceSpaces +
      \bigskip \medskip \smallskip These commands produce a given amount of space. -\bigskip -\bigskip\bigskipamountThe same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line +
      +\bigskip +\bigskip +\bigskipamount +The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line space (with stretch and shrink). -\medskip -\medskip\medskipamountThe same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily +\medskip +\medskip +\medskipamount +The same as \vspace{medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). -\smallskip -\smallskip\smallskipamountThe same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a +\smallskip +\smallskip +\smallskipamount +The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). -
      + The \...amount parameters are determined by the document class.
      - -\vfill -\vspace -\bigskip \medskip \smallskip -Spaces - -
      -<code>\vfill</code> -\vfill +\vfill\vspace\bigskip \medskip \smallskipSpaces +
      \vfill +\vfill + The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which -can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to -\vspace{\fill} (see \hfill). +can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It&textrsquo;s equivalent to +\vspace{\fill} (\hfill).
      - -\vspace -\vfill -Spaces - -
      -<code>\vspace[*]{<var>length</var>}</code> -\vspace +\vspace\vfillSpaces +
      \vspace[*]{length} +\vspace + Synopsis: -\vspace[*]{length} - + +
      \vspace[*]{length}
      +
      + The \vspace command adds the vertical space length, i.e., a rubber length. length can be negative or positive. @@ -6212,97 +5587,51 @@ space is not removed.
      - -Boxes -Special insertions -Spaces -Top - - -Boxes - -boxes -All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be +BoxesSpecial insertionsSpacesTop +Boxes + +boxes + +All the predefined length parameters (Predefined lengths) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. - -\mbox -\mbox - Horizontal boxes. - - -\fbox and \framebox -\fbox and \framebox - Put a frame around a box. - - -lrbox -lrbox - An environment like \sbox. - - -\makebox -\makebox - Box, adjustable position. - - -\parbox -\parbox - Box with text in paragraph mode. - - -\raisebox -\raisebox - Raise or lower text. - - -\savebox -\savebox - Like \makebox, but save the text for later use. - - -\sbox -\sbox - Like \mbox, but save the text for later use. - - -\usebox -\usebox - Print saved text. - - - - - -\mbox -\fbox and \framebox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\mbox{<var>text}</var></code> -\mbox -hyphenation, preventingThe \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the +\mbox
      Horizontal boxes.
      +
      \fbox and \framebox
      Put a frame around a box.
      +
      lrbox
      An environment like \sbox.
      +
      \makebox
      Box, adjustable position.
      +
      \parbox
      Box with text in paragraph mode.
      +
      \raisebox
      Raise or lower text.
      +
      \savebox
      Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
      +
      \sbox
      Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
      +
      \usebox
      Print saved text.
      +
      + + +\mbox\fbox and \frameboxBoxes +
      \mbox{text} +\mbox + +hyphenation, preventing +The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation.
      - -\fbox and \framebox -lrbox -\mbox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\fbox</code> and <code>\framebox</code> +\fbox and \frameboxlrbox\mboxBoxes +
      \fbox and \framebox + +\fbox +\framebox -\fbox\framebox Synopses: -\fbox{text} -\framebox[width][position]{text} - + +
      \fbox{text}
      +\framebox[width][position]{text}
      +
      + The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. @@ -6311,25 +5640,22 @@ specification of the box width with the optional width argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional position argument. -\fboxrule\fboxsepBoth commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default +\fboxrule +\fboxsep +Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default .4pt), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default 3pt) between the rule and the contents of the box. -See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the +\framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the picture environment.
      - -lrbox -\makebox -\fbox and \framebox -Boxes - -
      -<code>lrbox</code> -lrbox -\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} +lrbox\makebox\fbox and \frameboxBoxes +
      lrbox +lrbox + +\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox} This is the environment form of \sbox. @@ -6338,69 +5664,65 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox.
      - -\makebox -\parbox -lrbox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\makebox</code> -\makebox +\makebox\parboxlrboxBoxes +
      \makebox +\makebox + Synopsis: -\makebox[width][position]{text} - + +
      \makebox[width][position]{text}
      +
      + The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional width argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the optional position argument, which may take the following values: -c -Centered (default). -l -Flush left. -r -Flush right. -s -Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain +
      +c +Centered (default). +l +Flush left. +r +Flush right. +s +Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain stretchable space for this to work. -
      + \makebox is also used within the picture environment -see \makebox (picture). +\makebox (picture).
      - -\parbox -\raisebox -\makebox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\parbox</code> -\parbox +\parbox\raisebox\makeboxBoxes +
      \parbox +\parbox + Synopsis: -\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} - + +
      \parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
      +
      + The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you -shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a +shouldn&textrsquo;t use any paragraph-making environments inside a \parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a -minipage environment (see minipage). +minipage environment (minipage). \parbox has two mandatory arguments: -width -the width of the parbox; -text -the text that goes inside the parbox. -
      + +width +the width of the parbox; +text +the text that goes inside the parbox. +
      The optional position argument allows you to align either the top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding @@ -6411,32 +5733,30 @@ text (default is top). The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. -t -text is placed at the top of the box. -c -text is centered in the box. -b -text is placed at the bottom of the box. -s -stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space +
      +t +text is placed at the top of the box. +c +text is centered in the box. +b +text is placed at the bottom of the box. +s +stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space for this to work. -
      +
      - -\raisebox -\savebox -\parbox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\raisebox</code> -\raisebox +\raisebox\savebox\parboxBoxes +
      \raisebox +\raisebox + Synopsis: -\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} - + +
      \raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text}
      +
      + The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed @@ -6449,347 +5769,409 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth.
      - -\savebox -\sbox -\raisebox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\savebox</code> -\savebox +\savebox\sbox\raiseboxBoxes +
      \savebox +\savebox + Synopsis: -\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} - + +
      \savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text}
      +
      + This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox -(see \makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, +(\makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been -declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). +declared with \newsavebox (\newsavebox).
      - -\sbox -\usebox -\savebox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\sbox{<var>\boxcmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> -\sbox +\sbox\usebox\saveboxBoxes +
      \sbox{\boxcmd}{text} +\sbox + Synopsis: -\sbox{\boxcmd}{text} - + +
      \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
      +
      + \sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox -(see \mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being +(\mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with -\newsavebox (see \newsavebox). +\newsavebox (\newsavebox).
      - -\usebox -\sbox -Boxes - -
      -<code>\usebox{<var>\boxcmd</var></code> -\usebox +\usebox\sboxBoxes +
      \usebox{\boxcmd +\usebox + Synopsis: -\usebox{\boxcmd} - + +
      \usebox{\boxcmd}
      +
      + \usebox producesthe box most recently saved in the bin -\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see \savebox). +\boxcmd by a \savebox command (\savebox).
      - -Special insertions -Splitting the input -Boxes -Top - - -Special insertions +Special insertionsSplitting the inputBoxesTop +Special insertions &latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. - -Reserved characters -Reserved characters - Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - - -Text symbols -Text symbols - Inserting other non-letter symbols in text. - - -Accents -Accents - Inserting accents. - - -Non-English characters -Non-English characters - Inserting other non-English characters. - - -\rule -\rule - Inserting lines and rectangles. - - -\today -\today - Inserting today's date. - - - - - -Reserved characters -Text symbols -Special insertions - -
      -Reserved characters -reserved characterscharacters, reserved +Reserved characters
      Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
      +
      Text symbols
      Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
      +
      Accents
      Inserting accents.
      +
      Non-English characters
      Inserting other non-English characters.
      +
      \rule
      Inserting lines and rectangles.
      +
      \today
      Inserting today&textrsquo;s date.
      +
      + + +Reserved charactersText symbolsSpecial insertions +
      Reserved characters +reserved characters +characters, reserved + The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called -“reserved characters” or “special characters”. - -# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { } - -\#\$\%\&\_\{\}Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; +&textldquo;reserved characters&textrdquo; or &textldquo;special characters&textrdquo;. + + +
      # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
      +
      + +\# +\$ +\% +\& +\_ +\{ +\} +Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex; will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a \ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce $ in your output. -\backslashOne exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has +\backslash +One exception to this rule is \ itself, because \\ has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in your file, and a typewriter \ is -produced by using \ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). +produced by using \ in a verbatim command (verbatim). -\~\^Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over -the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents); to get +\~ +\^ +Also, \~ and \^ place tilde and circumflex accents over +the following letter, as in o and o (Accents); to get a standalone ~ or ^, you can again use a verbatim command. -\symbolaccessing any character of a font +\symbol +accessing any character of a font + Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character used in the \verb* command has the code -decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. +decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}. You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written as -\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
      - -Text symbols -Accents -Reserved characters -Special insertions - -
      -Text symbols +Text symbolsAccentsReserved charactersSpecial insertions +
      Text symbols -text symbolstextcomp package&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +text symbols +textcomp package +&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. -\copyright\copyright -\textcopyright\textcopyright -copyright symbolThe copyright symbol, ©right;. - -\dag\dag -dagger, in textThe dagger symbol (in text). - -\ddag\ddag -double dagger, in textThe double dagger symbol (in text). - -\LaTeX\LaTeX -&latex; logologo, &latex;The &latex; logo. - -\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) -\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») -\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) -\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) -double guillemetssingle guillemetsleft angle quotation marksright angle quotation marksdouble angle quotation markssingle angle quotation marksFrench quotation marksquotation marks, FrenchDouble and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: + + +\copyright\copyright +\textcopyright\textcopyright +copyright symbol +The copyright symbol, ©right;. + +\dag\dag +dagger, in text +The dagger symbol (in text). + +\ddag\ddag +double dagger, in text +The double dagger symbol (in text). + +\LaTeX\LaTeX +&latex; logo +logo, &latex; +The &latex; logo. + +\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) +\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») +\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) +\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) +double guillemets +single guillemets +left angle quotation marks +right angle quotation marks +double angle quotation marks +single angle quotation marks +French quotation marks +quotation marks, French +Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: «, », ‹, ›. -\ldots\ldots -\dots\dots -\textellipsis\textellipsis -ellipsisAn ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `&dots;'. \ldots +\ldots\ldots +\dots\dots +\textellipsis\textellipsis +ellipsis +An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): &textlsquo;&dots;&textrsquo;. \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. -\lq\lq -left quoteopening quoteLeft (opening) quote: `. - -\P\P -\textparagraph\textparagraph -paragraph symbolpilcrowParagraph sign (pilcrow). - -\pounds\pounds -\textsterling\textsterling -pounds symbolsterling symbolEnglish pounds sterling: £. - -\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) -\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) -double low-9 quotation marksingle low-9 quotation marklow-9 quotation marks, single and doubleDouble and single quotation marks on the baseline: +\lq\lq +left quote +opening quote +Left (opening) quote: &textlsquo;. + +\P\P +\textparagraph\textparagraph +paragraph symbol +pilcrow +Paragraph sign (pilcrow). + +\pounds\pounds +\textsterling\textsterling +pounds symbol +sterling symbol +English pounds sterling: £. + +\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) +\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) +double low-9 quotation mark +single low-9 quotation mark +low-9 quotation marks, single and double +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚. -\rq\rq -right quoteclosing quoteRight (closing) quote: '. - -\S\S -section symbolSection symbol. - -\TeX\TeX -&tex; logologo, &tex;The &tex; logo. - -\textasciicircum\textasciicircum -circumflex, ASCII, in textASCII circumflex, in textASCII circumflex: ^. - -\textasciitilde\textasciitilde -tilde, ASCII, in textASCII tilde, in textASCII tilde: ~. - -\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered -asterisk, centered, in textcentered asterisk, in textCentered asterisk: *. - -\textbackslash\textbackslash -backslash, in textBackslash: \. - -\textbar\textbar -vertical bar, in textbar, vertical, in textVertical bar: |. - -\textbardbl\textbardbl -vertical bar, double, in textbar, double vertical, in textdouble vertical bar, in textDouble vertical bar. - -\textbigcircle\textbigcircle -big circle symbols, in textcircle symbol, big, in textBig circle symbol. - -\textbraceleft\textbraceleft -left brace, in textbrace, left, in textLeft brace: {. - -\textbraceright\textbraceright -right brace, in textbrace, right, in textRight brace: }. - -\textbullet\textbullet -bullet, in textBullet: •. - -\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} -circled letter, in textletter in a circle, as in ®istered;. - -\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark -\textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark -\textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmark -composite word mark, in textcap heightascender heightComposite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form +\rq\rq +right quote +closing quote +Right (closing) quote: &textrsquo;. + +\S\S +section symbol +Section symbol. + +\TeX\TeX +&tex; logo +logo, &tex; +The &tex; logo. + +\textasciicircum\textasciicircum +circumflex, ASCII, in text +ASCII circumflex, in text +ASCII circumflex: ^. + +\textasciitilde\textasciitilde +tilde, ASCII, in text +ASCII tilde, in text +ASCII tilde: ~. + +\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered +asterisk, centered, in text +centered asterisk, in text +Centered asterisk: *. + +\textbackslash\textbackslash +backslash, in text +Backslash: \. + +\textbar\textbar +vertical bar, in text +bar, vertical, in text +Vertical bar: |. + +\textbardbl\textbardbl +vertical bar, double, in text +bar, double vertical, in text +double vertical bar, in text +Double vertical bar. + +\textbigcircle\textbigcircle +big circle symbols, in text +circle symbol, big, in text +Big circle symbol. + +\textbraceleft\textbraceleft +left brace, in text +brace, left, in text +Left brace: {. + +\textbraceright\textbraceright +right brace, in text +brace, right, in text +Right brace: }. + +\textbullet\textbullet +bullet, in text +Bullet: •. + +\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} +circled letter, in text +letter in a circle, as in ®istered;. + +\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark +\textcapitalwordmark\textcapitalwordmark +\textascenderwordmark\textascenderwordmark +composite word mark, in text +cap height +ascender height +Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form has the ascender height. -\textdagger\textdagger -dagger, in textDagger: \dag. - -\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl -dagger, double, in textdouble dagger, in textDouble dagger: \ddag. - -\textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $) -dollar signcurrency, dollarDollar sign: $. - -\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) -em-dashEm-dash: — (for punctuation). - -\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) -e-dashEn-dash: — (for ranges). - -\texteuro\texteuro -euro symbolcurrency, euroThe Euro symbol: €. - -\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) -exclamation point, upside-downUpside down exclamation point: ¡. - -\textgreater\textgreater -greater than symbol, in textGreater than: >. - -\textless\textless -less than symbol, in textLess than: <. - -\textleftarrow\textleftarrow -arrow, left, in textleft arrow, in textLeft arrow. - -\textordfeminine\textordfeminine -\textordmasculine\textordmasculine -feminine ordinal symbolmasculine ordinal symbolordinals, feminine and masculineSpanish ordinals, feminine and masculineFeminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. - -\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered -period, centered, in textcentered period, in textCentered period: \cdot. - -\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) -questionation point, upside-downUpside down questionation point: ¿. - -\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) -left quote, doubledouble left quoteDouble left quote: “. - -\textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ') -right quote, doubledouble right quoteDouble right quote: ”. - -\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) -left quote, singlesingle left quoteSingle left quote: `. - -\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') -right quote, singlesingle right quoteSingle right quote: '. - -\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase -\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase -quote, straight basestraight quote, basedouble quote, straight basestraight double quote, baseSingle and double straight quotes on the baseline. - -\textregistered\textregistered -registered symbolRegistered symbol: ®istered;. - -\textrightarrow\textrightarrow -arrow, right, in textright arrow, in textRight arrow. - -\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash -three-quarters em-dashem-dash, three-quarters“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - -\texttrademark\texttrademark -trademark symbolTrademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. - -\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash -two-thirds em-dashem-dash, two-thirds“Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. - -\textunderscore\textunderscore -underscore, in textUnderscore: _. - -\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace -visible space symbol, in textVisible space symbol. - -
      - - -
      - -Accents -Non-English characters -Text symbols -Special insertions - -
      -Accents - -accentscharacters, accentedletters, accented -&latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and +\textdagger\textdagger +dagger, in text +Dagger: \dag. + +\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl +dagger, double, in text +double dagger, in text +Double dagger: \ddag. + +\textdollar (or $)\textdollar (or $) +dollar sign +currency, dollar +Dollar sign: $. + +\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) +em-dash +Em-dash: &textmdash; (for punctuation). + +\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) +e-dash +En-dash: &textmdash; (for ranges). + +\texteuro\texteuro +euro symbol +currency, euro +The Euro symbol: €. + +\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) +exclamation point, upside-down +Upside down exclamation point: ¡. + +\textgreater\textgreater +greater than symbol, in text +Greater than: >. + +\textless\textless +less than symbol, in text +Less than: <. + +\textleftarrow\textleftarrow +arrow, left, in text +left arrow, in text +Left arrow. + +\textordfeminine\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine\textordmasculine +feminine ordinal symbol +masculine ordinal symbol +ordinals, feminine and masculine +Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine +Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. + +\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered +period, centered, in text +centered period, in text +Centered period: \cdot. + +\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) +questionation point, upside-down +Upside down questionation point: ¿. + +\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) +left quote, double +double left quote +Double left quote: &textldquo;. + +\textquotedblright (or ')\textquotedblright (or ') +right quote, double +double right quote +Double right quote: &textrdquo;. + +\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) +left quote, single +single left quote +Single left quote: &textlsquo;. + +\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') +right quote, single +single right quote +Single right quote: &textrsquo;. + +\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase +\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase +quote, straight base +straight quote, base +double quote, straight base +straight double quote, base +Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +\textregistered\textregistered +registered symbol +Registered symbol: ®istered;. + +\textrightarrow\textrightarrow +arrow, right, in text +right arrow, in text +Right arrow. + +\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash +three-quarters em-dash +em-dash, three-quarters +&textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +\texttrademark\texttrademark +trademark symbol +Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. + +\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash +two-thirds em-dash +em-dash, two-thirds +&textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +\textunderscore\textunderscore +underscore, in text +Underscore: _. + +\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace +visible space symbol, in text +Visible space symbol. + + + + +
      +AccentsNon-English charactersText symbolsSpecial insertions +
      Accents + +accents +characters, accented +letters, accented + +&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and languages, through the babel package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. @@ -6797,274 +6179,345 @@ the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. -\" -\capitaldieresis -\" (umlaut accent)\capitaldieresisumlaut accentdieresis accentProduces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. - -\' -\capitalacute -\' (acute accent)\capitalacuteacute accentProduces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing +
      +\" +\capitaldieresis +\" (umlaut accent) +\capitaldieresis +umlaut accent +dieresis accent +Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o. + +\' +\capitalacute +\&textrsquo; (acute accent) +\capitalacute +acute accent +Produces an acute accent, as in o. In the tabbing environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column -(see tabbing). - -\. -\. (dot-over accent)dot accentdot-over accentProduces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. - -\= -\capitalmacron -\= (macron accent)\capitalmacronmacron accentoverbar accentbar-over accentProduces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. - -\^ -\capitalcircumflex -\^ (circumflex accent)\capitalcircumflexcircumflex accenthat accentProduces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. - -\` -\capitalgrave -\` (grave accent)\capitalgravegrave accentProduces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the +(tabbing). + +\. +\. (dot-over accent) +dot accent +dot-over accent +Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o. + +\= +\capitalmacron +\= (macron accent) +\capitalmacron +macron accent +overbar accent +bar-over accent +Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o. + +\^ +\capitalcircumflex +\^ (circumflex accent) +\capitalcircumflex +circumflex accent +hat accent +Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o. + +\` +\capitalgrave +\&textlsquo; (grave accent) +\capitalgrave +grave accent +Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o. In the tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin -(see tabbing). - -\~ -\capitaltilde -\~ (tilde accent)\capitaltildetilde accentProduces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. - -\b -\b (bar-under accent)bar-under accentProduces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. - -\c -\capitalcedilla -\c (cedilla accent)\capitalcedillacedilla accentProduces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. - -\d -\capitaldotaccent -\d (dot-under accent)\capitaldotaccentdot-under accentProduces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. - -\H -\capitalhungarumlaut -\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)\capitalhungarumlauthungarian umlaut accentProduces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. - -\i -\i (dotless i)dotless iProduces a dotless i, as in `i'. - -\j -\j (dotless j)dotless jProduces a dotless j, as in `j'. - -\k -\capitalogonek -\k (ogonek)\capitalogonekogonekProduces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in +(tabbing). + +\~ +\capitaltilde +\~ (tilde accent) +\capitaltilde +tilde accent +Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n. + +\b +\b (bar-under accent) +bar-under accent +Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o. + +\c +\capitalcedilla +\c (cedilla accent) +\capitalcedilla +cedilla accent +Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c. + +\d +\capitaldotaccent +\d (dot-under accent) +\capitaldotaccent +dot-under accent +Produces a dot accent under the following, as in o. + +\H +\capitalhungarumlaut +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) +\capitalhungarumlaut +hungarian umlaut accent +Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o. + +\i +\i (dotless i) +dotless i +Produces a dotless i, as in &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;. + +\j +\j (dotless j) +dotless j +Produces a dotless j, as in &textlsquo;j&textrsquo;. + +\k +\capitalogonek +\k (ogonek) +\capitalogonek +ogonek +Produces a letter with ogonek, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. Not available in the OT1 encoding. -\r -\capitalring -\r (ring accent)\capitalringring accentProduces a ring accent, as in `o*'. - -\t -\capitaltie -\newtie -\capitalnewtie -\t (tie-after accent)\capitaltie\newtie\capitalnewtietie-after accentProduces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The +\r +\capitalring +\r (ring accent) +\capitalring +ring accent +Produces a ring accent, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. + +\t +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +\t (tie-after accent) +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +tie-after accent +Produces a tie-after accent, as in &textlsquo;oo&textrsquo;. The \newtie form is centered in its box. -\u -\capitalbreve -\u (breve accent)\capitalbrevebreve accentProduces a breve accent, as in `o('. - -\underbar -\underbarunderbarNot exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +\u +\capitalbreve +\u (breve accent) +\capitalbreve +breve accent +Produces a breve accent, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. + +\underbar +\underbar +underbar +Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through -descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. +descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. -\v -\capitalcaron -\v (breve accent)\capitalcaronhacek accentcheck accentcaron accentProduces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. +\v +\capitalcaron +\v (breve accent) +\capitalcaron +hacek accent +check accent +caron accent +Produces a hacek (check, caron) accent, as in &textlsquo;o&textrsquo;. -
      +
      - -Non-English characters -\rule -Accents -Special insertions - -
      -Non-English characters +Non-English characters\ruleAccentsSpecial insertions +
      Non-English characters + +special characters +non-English characters +characters, non-English +letters, non-English -special charactersnon-English characterscharacters, non-Englishletters, non-English Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly used in languages other than English. -\aa -\AA -\aa (å)\AA (Å)aringå and Å. - -\ae -\AE -\ae (æ)\AE (Æ)ae ligatureæ and Æ. - -\dh -\DH -\dh (æ)\DH (Æ)Icelandic etheth, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. - -\dj -\DJ -\dj\DJxxxx - -\ij -\IJ -\ij (ij)\IJ (IJ)ij letter, Dutchij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). - -\l -\L -\l (/l)\L (/L)polish l/l and /L. - -\ng -\NG -\ng\NGxxxx - -\o -\O -\o (ø)\O (Ø)oslashø and Ø. - -\oe -\OE -\oe (œ)\OE (Œ)oe ligatureœ and Œ. - -\ss -\SS -\ss (ß)\SS (SS)es-zet German lettersharp S lettersß and SS. - -\th -\TH -\th (þ)\TH (Þ)Icelandic thornthorn, Icelandic letterIcelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. - -
      - + + +\aa +\AA +\aa (å) +\AA (Å) +aring +å and Å. + +\ae +\AE +\ae (æ) +\AE (Æ) +ae ligature +æ and Æ. + +\dh +\DH +\dh (æ) +\DH (Æ) +Icelandic eth +eth, Icelandic letter +Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. + +\dj +\DJ +\dj +\DJ +xxxx + +\ij +\IJ +\ij (ij) +\IJ (IJ) +ij letter, Dutch +ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). + +\l +\L +\l (&lslash;) +\L (&Lslash;) +polish l +&lslash; and &Lslash;. + +\ng +\NG +\ng +\NG +xxxx + +\o +\O +\o (ø) +\O (Ø) +oslash +ø and Ø. + +\oe +\OE +\oe (œ) +\OE (Œ) +oe ligature +œ and Œ. + +\ss +\SS +\ss (ß) +\SS (SS) +es-zet German letter +sharp S letters +ß and SS. + +\th +\TH +\th (þ) +\TH (Þ) +Icelandic thorn +thorn, Icelandic letter +Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. + +
      + + +
      +\rule\todayNon-English charactersSpecial insertions +
      \rule +\rule -
      - -\rule -\today -Non-English characters -Special insertions - -
      -<code>\rule</code> -\rule Synopsis: -\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} - + +
      \rule[raise]{width}{thickness}
      +
      + The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or rectangles. The arguments are: -raise -How high to raise the rule (optional). +
      +raise +How high to raise the rule (optional). -width -The length of the rule (mandatory). +width +The length of the rule (mandatory). -thickness -The thickness of the rule (mandatory). -
      +thickness +The thickness of the rule (mandatory). +
      - -\today -\rule -Special insertions - -
      -<code>\today</code> -\today -The \today command produces today's date, in the format -month dd, yyyy; for example, `July 4, 1976'. +\today\ruleSpecial insertions +
      \today +\today + +The \today command produces today&textrsquo;s date, in the format +month dd, yyyy; for example, &textlsquo;July 4, 1976&textrsquo;. It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and -\year (see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not +\year (\day \month \year) to do this. It is not updated as the program runs. -datetime packageThe datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety +datetime package +The datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety of other date formats.
      - -Splitting the input -Front/back matter -Special insertions -Top - - -Splitting the input -splitting the input fileinput file +Splitting the inputFront/back matterSpecial insertionsTop +Splitting the input +splitting the input file +input file + A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into +input in a single large file, it&textrsquo;s more efficient to split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type when you run &latex;. - -\include -\include - Conditionally include a file. - - -\includeonly -\includeonly - Determine which files are included. - - -\input -\input - Unconditionally include a file. - - - - - -\include -\includeonly -Splitting the input - -
      -<code>\include</code> -\include +\include
      Conditionally include a file.
      +
      \includeonly
      Determine which files are included.
      +
      \input
      Unconditionally include a file.
      +
      + + +\include\includeonlySplitting the input +
      \include +\include + Synopsis: -\include{file} - + +
      \include{file}
      +
      + If no \includeonly command is present, the \include command executes \clearpage to start a new page -(see \clearpage), then reads file, then does another +(\clearpage), then reads file, then does another \clearpage. Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are only run if file is listed as an argument to \includeonly. See the next section. -nested \include, not allowedThe \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +nested \include, not allowed +The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read by another \include command.
      - -\includeonly -\input -\include -Splitting the input - -
      -\<code>includeonly</code> -\includeonly +\includeonly\input\includeSplitting the input +
      \includeonly +\includeonly + Synopsis: -\includeonly{file1,file2,...} - + +
      \includeonly{file1,file2,...}
      +
      + The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by subsequent \include commands. The list of filenames is comma-separated. Each file must exactly match a filename @@ -7075,18 +6528,16 @@ effective.
      - -\input -\includeonly -Splitting the input - -
      -\input -\input +\input\includeonlySplitting the input +
      \input +\input + Synopsis: -\input{file} - + +
      \input{file}
      +
      + The \input command causes the specified file to be read and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at that point. @@ -7099,44 +6550,24 @@ is tried (foo or foo.bar).
      - -Front/back matter -Letters -Splitting the input -Top - - -Front/back matter +Front/back matterLettersSplitting the inputTop +Front/back matter - -Tables of contents -Tables of contents - - - -Glossaries -Glossaries - - - -Indexes -Indexes - - - - - - -Tables of contents -Glossaries -Front/back matter - -
      -Tables of contents - -table of contents, creating -\tableofcontents.toc fileA table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents +Tables of contents
      +
      Glossaries
      +
      Indexes
      +
      + + +Tables of contentsGlossariesFront/back matter +
      Tables of contents + +table of contents, creating + +\tableofcontents +.toc file +A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must have generated a .toc file. @@ -7146,107 +6577,98 @@ not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command. -\listoffigures\listoftablesThe analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables +\listoffigures +\listoftables +The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. -\nofilesThe command \nofiles overrides these commands, and +\nofiles +The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and prevents any of these lists from being generated. - -\addcontentsline -\addcontentsline - Add an entry to table of contents etc. - - -\addtocontents -\addtocontents - Add text directly to table of contents file etc. - - - - - -\addcontentsline -\addtocontents -Tables of contents - - -\addcontentsline -\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}table of contents entry, manually adding -The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +\addcontentsline
      Add an entry to table of contents etc.
      +
      \addtocontents
      Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
      +
      + + +\addcontentsline\addtocontentsTables of contents +\addcontentsline +\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +table of contents entry, manually adding + +The \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} command adds an entry to the specified list or table where: -ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written, +
      +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written, typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). -unit -The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the +unit +The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the following, matching the value of the ext argument: -
      toc -The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, +
      +toc +The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, section, subsection, subsubsection. -lof -For the list of figures. -lot -For the list of tables. -
      +
      lof +For the list of figures. +lot +For the list of tables. + -entry -The actual text of the entry. - +entry +The actual text of the entry. + -\contentslineWhat is written to the .ext file is the -command \contentsline{unit}{name}. +\contentsline +What is written to the .ext file is the +command \contentsline{unit}{name}.
      - -\addtocontents -\addcontentsline -Tables of contents - - -\addtocontents -\addtocontents{ext}{text} -The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text +\addtocontents\addcontentslineTables of contents +\addtocontents +\addtocontents{ext}{text} + +The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text (or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. -ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written: +
      +ext +The extension of the file on which information is to be written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot (list of tables). -text -The text to be written. -
      +text +The text to be written. +
      - -Glossaries -Indexes -Tables of contents -Front/back matter - -
      -Glossaries -glossaries -\makeglossaryThe command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. - -\glossary.glo fileThe command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for +GlossariesIndexesTables of contentsFront/back matter +
      Glossaries +glossaries + +\makeglossary +The command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. + +\glossary +.glo file +The command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. -\glossaryentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command -\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where +\glossaryentry +Specifically, what gets written is the command +\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier @@ -7254,67 +6676,74 @@ glossaries.
      - -Indexes -Glossaries -Front/back matter - -
      -Indexes -indexes -\makeindexThe command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in +IndexesGlossariesFront/back matter +
      Indexes +indexes + +\makeindex +The command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in the preamble. -\index.idx fileThe command \index{text} writes an index entry for +\index +.idx file +The command \index{text} writes an index entry for text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension. -\indexentrySpecifically, what gets written is the command -\indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno +\indexentry +Specifically, what gets written is the command +\indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno is the current \thepage value. -`see' and `see also' index entriesTo generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a -vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso -instead of see to make a `See also' entry. +&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries +To generate a index entry for &textlsquo;bar&textrsquo; that says &textlsquo;See foo&textrsquo;, use a +vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso +instead of see to make a &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo; entry. -\seename\alsonameThe text `See' is defined by the macro \seename, and `See also' +\seename +\alsoname +The text &textlsquo;See&textrsquo; is defined by the macro \seename, and &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo; by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other languages. -makeindex programxindy program.ind fileThe generated .idx file is then sorted with an external +makeindex program +xindy program +.ind file +The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external command, usually either makeindex -(http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the -multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). +(http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the +multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset the index. -printindexmakeidx packageThe index is usually generated with the \printindex command. +printindex +makeidx package +The index is usually generated with the \printindex command. This is defined in the makeidx package, so -\usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. +\usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. -indexspaceThe rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new +indexspace +The rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new letter in the printed index; its default value is 10pt plus5pt minus3pt. -showidx packageThe showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in +showidx package +The showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. -multind packageThe multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the +multind package +The multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind.
      - -Letters -Terminal input/output -Front/back matter -Top - - -Letters -letterscreating letters +LettersTerminal input/outputFront/back matterTop +Letters +letters +creating letters + You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The letter document class is designed to make a number of letters at once, although you can make just one if you so desire. @@ -7323,202 +6752,138 @@ once, although you can make just one if you so desire. document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a minimum: - \documentclass{letter} - \begin{document} + +
       \documentclass{letter}
      + \begin{document}
         ... letters ...
      - \end{document}
      -
      + \end{document}
      +
      + Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name and address of the recipient. For example, you might have: - \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St. - \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} + +
       \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
      +      \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
          ...
      - \end{letter}
      -
      + \end{letter}
      +
      + The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not work. The letter closes with a \closing command. -\\ for lettersAfter the closing, you can have additional material. The -\cc command produces the usual “cc: &dots;”. There's also a +\\ for letters +After the closing, you can have additional material. The +\cc command produces the usual &textldquo;cc: &dots;&textrdquo;. There&textrsquo;s also a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use \\ to separate the items. These commands are used with the letter class. - -\address -\address - Your return address. - - -\cc -\cc - Cc list. - - -\closing -\closing - Saying goodbye. - - -\encl -\encl - List of enclosed material. - - -\location -\location - Your organisation's address. - - -\makelabels -\makelabels - Making address labels. - - -\name -\name - Your name, for the return address. - - -\opening -\opening - Saying hello. - - -\ps -\ps - Adding a postscript. - - -\signature -\signature - Your signature. - - -\startbreaks -\startbreaks - Allow page breaks. - - -\stopbreaks -\stopbreaks - Disallow page breaks. - - -\telephone -\telephone - Your phone number. - - - - - -\address -\cc -Letters - -
      -\address{<var>return-address}</var> -\address +\address
      Your return address.
      +
      \cc
      Cc list.
      +
      \closing
      Saying goodbye.
      +
      \encl
      List of enclosed material.
      +
      \location
      Your organisation&textrsquo;s address.
      +
      \makelabels
      Making address labels.
      +
      \name
      Your name, for the return address.
      +
      \opening
      Saying hello.
      +
      \ps
      Adding a postscript.
      +
      \signature
      Your signature.
      +
      \startbreaks
      Allow page breaks.
      +
      \stopbreaks
      Disallow page breaks.
      +
      \telephone
      Your phone number.
      +
      + + +\address\ccLetters +
      \address{return-address} +\address + The \address specifies the return address of a letter, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration, then the letter -will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard -letterhead. (See Overview, for details on your local +will be formatted for copying onto your organisation&textrsquo;s standard +letterhead. (Overview, for details on your local implementation). If you give an \address declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal letter.
      - -\cc -\closing -\address -Letters - -
      -<code>\cc</code> +\cc\closing\addressLetters +
      \cc + +\cc +cc list, in letters -\cccc list, in letters Synopsis: -\cc{name1\\name2} - + +
      \cc{name1\\name2}
      +
      + Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is printed on a separate line.
      - -\closing -\encl -\cc -Letters - -
      -<code>\closing</code> +\closing\encl\ccLetters +
      \closing + +\closing +letters, ending +closing letters -\closingletters, endingclosing letters Synopsis: -\closing{text} - + +
      \closing{text}
      +
      + A letter closes with a \closing command, for example, -\closing{Best Regards,} - + +
      \closing{Best Regards,}
      +
      +
      - -\encl -\location -\closing -Letters - -
      -<code>\encl</code> +\encl\location\closingLetters +
      \encl + +\encl +enclosure list -\enclenclosure list Synopsis: -\encl{line1\\line2} - + +
      \encl{line1\\line2}
      +
      + Declare a list of one more enclosures.
      - -\location -\makelabels -\encl -Letters - -
      -<code>\location</code> -\location -\location{address} +\location\makelabels\enclLetters +
      \location +\location + +\location{address} -This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears +This modifies your organisation&textrsquo;s standard address. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
      - -\makelabels -\name -\location -Letters - -
      -<code>\makelabels</code> -\makelabels -\makelabels{number} +\makelabels\name\locationLetters +
      \makelabels +\makelabels + +\makelabels{number} If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters. @@ -7526,81 +6891,62 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
      - -\name -\opening -\makelabels -Letters - -
      -<code>\name</code> -\name -\name{June Davenport} +\name\opening\makelabelsLetters +
      \name +\name + +\name{June Davenport} Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return address.
      - -\opening -\ps -\name -Letters - -
      -<code>\opening{<var>text</var>}</code> -\openingletters, starting +\opening\ps\nameLetters +
      \opening{text} +\opening +letters, starting + Synopsis: -\opening{text} - + +
      \opening{text}
      +
      + A letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For instance: -\opening{Dear Joe,} - + +
      \opening{Dear Joe,}
      +
      +
      - -\ps -\signature -\opening -Letters - -
      -<code>\ps</code> -\pspostscript, in letters +\ps\signature\openingLetters +
      \ps +\ps +postscript, in letters + Use the \ps command to start a postscript in a letter, after \closing.
      - -\signature -\startbreaks -\ps -Letters - -
      -<code>\signature{<var>text</var>}</code> -\signature +\signature\startbreaks\psLetters +
      \signature{text} +\signature + Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within text as usual.
      - -\startbreaks -\stopbreaks -\signature -Letters - -
      -<code>\startbreaks</code> -\startbreaks +\startbreaks\stopbreaks\signatureLetters +
      \startbreaks +\startbreaks + \startbreaks Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again. @@ -7608,15 +6954,10 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within
      - -\stopbreaks -\telephone -\startbreaks -Letters - -
      -<code>\stopbreaks</code> -\stopbreaks +\stopbreaks\telephone\startbreaksLetters +
      \stopbreaks +\stopbreaks + \stopbreaks Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs. @@ -7624,15 +6965,11 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within
      - -\telephone -\stopbreaks -Letters - -
      -<code>\telephone</code> -\telephone -\telephone{number} +\telephone\stopbreaksLetters +
      \telephone +\telephone + +\telephone{number} This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected. @@ -7640,41 +6977,27 @@ space for your signature. \\ starts a new line within
      - -Terminal input/output -Command line -Letters -Top - - -Terminal input/output -input/outputterminal input/output +Terminal input/outputCommand lineLettersTop +Terminal input/output +input/output +terminal input/output + - -\typein -\typein - Read text from the terminal. - - -\typeout -\typeout - Write text to the terminal. - - - - - -\typein -\typeout -Terminal input/output - -
      -<code>\typein[<var>cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}</code> -\typein +\typein
      Read text from the terminal.
      +
      \typeout
      Write text to the terminal.
      +
      + + +\typein\typeoutTerminal input/output +
      \typein[cmd]{msg} +\typein + Synopsis: -\typein[\cmd]{msg} - + +
      \typein[\cmd]{msg}
      +
      + \typein prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is @@ -7685,24 +7008,22 @@ redefined to be the typed input.
      - -\typeout -\typein -Terminal input/output - -
      -<code>\typeout{<var>msg</var>}</code> -\typeout +\typeout\typeinTerminal input/output +
      \typeout{msg} +\typeout + Synopsis: -\typeout{msg} - + +
      \typeout{msg}
      +
      + Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed. -&latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space +&latex;&textrsquo;s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in @@ -7711,73 +7032,53 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in
      - -Command line -Document templates -Terminal input/output -Top - - -Command line -command line +Command lineDocument templatesTerminal input/outputTop +Command line +command line + The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; &tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g. -latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' - + +
      latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
      +
      + + will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. -* promptprompt, *\stopIf &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a +* prompt +prompt, * +\stop +If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a * prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop (and return) and it will prematurely end the document.
      - -Document templates -Concept Index -Command line -Top - - -Document templates -document templates +Document templatesConcept IndexCommand lineTop +Document templates +document templates + Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will -be useful. Additional templates are collected at -http://www.howtotex.com/templates. +be useful. Additional template resources are listed +http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. - -book template -book template - - - -beamer template -beamer template - - - -tugboat template -tugboat template - - - - - - -book template -beamer template -Document templates - -
      -<code>book</code> template - -\documentclass{book} +book template
      +
      beamer template
      +
      tugboat template
      +
      + + +book templatebeamer templateDocument templates +
      book template + + +\documentclass{book} \title{Book Class Template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -7795,19 +7096,16 @@ The end. \end{document} + +
      - -beamer template -tugboat template -book template -Document templates - -
      -<code>beamer</code> template +beamer templatetugboat templatebook templateDocument templates +
      beamer template The beamer class creates slides presentations. -\documentclass{beamer} + +\documentclass{beamer} \title{Beamer Class template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -7831,29 +7129,27 @@ The end. + +
      - -tugboat template -beamer template -Document templates - -
      -<code>tugboat</code> template +tugboat templatebeamer templateDocument templates +
      tugboat template TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, -http://tug.org/TUGboat. +http://tug.org/TUGboat. -\documentclass{ltugboat} + +\documentclass{ltugboat} \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{ifpdf} \ifpdf - \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black, - urlcolor=black]{hyperref} +\usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black, + urlcolor=black]{hyperref} \else - \usepackage{url} +\usepackage{url} \fi -\title{Example \TUB\ Article} +\title{Example \TUB\ article} % repeat info for each author. \author{First Last} @@ -7861,12 +7157,12 @@ The end. \netaddress{user (at) example dot org} \personalURL{http://example.org/~user/} -\maketitle - \begin{document} +\maketitle + \begin{abstract} -This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue. +This is an example article for \TUB{}. \end{abstract} \section{Introduction} @@ -7878,22 +7174,23 @@ We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. -The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: +The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more: -{\small -\begin{verbatim} +% verbatim blocks are often better in \small +\begin{verbatim}[\small] \AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW \BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe -\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas +\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe +\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS -\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug +\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP +\TUB \TUG \tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE \Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag \careof \thinskip -\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> <fred> @@ -7901,14 +7198,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: \sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4 \booktitle{Book of Fred} \end{verbatim} -} For more information, see the ltubguid document at: \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat} +(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references). Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - \bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX @@ -7917,30 +7213,22 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. \end{document} + +
      - -Concept Index -Command Index -Document templates -Top - - -Concept Index +Concept IndexCommand IndexDocument templatesTop +Concept Index -cp + - -Command Index -Concept Index -Top - - -Command Index +Command IndexConcept IndexTop +Command Index -fn + + diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info index 5558bb86e05..c5d3a86f724 100644 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info +++ b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info @@ -1,20 +1,21 @@ -This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.13 from +This is latex2e.info, produced by texi2any version 4.13.90+dev from latex2e.texi. This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document -preparation system, version of May 2011. - - This was originally translated from `LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the VMS Help -Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade -of Sam Houston State University. The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by -Stephen Gilmore. The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten -Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and -gratefully acknowledges using `Hypertext Help with LaTeX', by Sheldon -Green, and the `LaTeX Command Summary' (for LaTeX 2.09) by L. Botway and -C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as `TeXniques' number -10), as reference material (no text was directly copied). - - Copyright (C) 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Karl Berry. +preparation system, version of May 2012. + + This manual was originally translated from 'LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the +VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. +Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The LaTeX 2.09 version was +written by Stephen Gilmore. The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this +by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, +and gratefully acknowledges using 'Hypertext Help with LaTeX', by +Sheldon Green, and the 'LaTeX Command Summary' (for LaTeX 2.09) by +L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as +'TeXniques' number 10), as reference material (no text was directly +copied). + + Copyright (C) 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Karl Berry. Copyright (C) 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. @@ -30,7 +31,6 @@ permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. - INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY * LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual. @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ LaTeX2e ******* This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document -preparation system, version as of May 2011. It is intended to cover +preparation system, version as of May 2012. It is intended to cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years. * Menu: @@ -82,13 +82,13 @@ LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years.  File: latex2e.info, Node: About this document, Next: Overview, Prev: Top, Up: Top -1 Overview of LaTeX -******************* +1 About this document +********************* The LaTeX document preparation system is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers -(`http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by the +('http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by the LaTeX project is available from their web site. The present document is completely unofficial and has not been @@ -96,10 +96,22 @@ reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to . - The home page for this document is `http://home.gna.org/latexrefman'. + The home page for this document is 'http://home.gna.org/latexrefman'. That page has links to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure. + Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about +LaTeX. Here are a few: + + Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation. + + Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. + + The guide for document authors maintained as part of LaTeX; there + are several others. + + Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX. +  File: latex2e.info, Node: Overview, Next: Starting & ending, Prev: About this document, Up: Top @@ -117,44 +129,44 @@ output: 1. The main output file, which is one of: - `.dvi' - If invoked as `latex', a "Device Independent" (`.dvi') file is + '.dvi' + If invoked as 'latex', a "Device Independent" ('.dvi') file is produced. This contains commands that can be translated into commands for virtually any output device. You can view such - `.dvi' output of LaTeX by using a program such as `xdvi' - (display directly), `dvips' (convert to PostScript), or - `dvipdfmx' (convert to PDF). + '.dvi' output of LaTeX by using a program such as 'xdvi' + (display directly), 'dvips' (convert to PostScript), or + 'dvipdfmx' (convert to PDF). - `.pdf' - If invoked as `pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format" - (`.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with + '.pdf' + If invoked as 'pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format" + ('.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but - it does make the output much larger than the `.dvi' produced + it does make the output much larger than the '.dvi' produced from the same document. - If invoked as `lualatex', a `.pdf' file is created using the - LuaTeX engine (`http://luatex.org'). + If invoked as 'lualatex', a '.pdf' file is created using the + LuaTeX engine ('http://luatex.org'). - If invoked as `xelatex', a `.pdf' file is created using the - XeTeX engine (`http://tug.org/xetex'). + If invoked as 'xelatex', a '.pdf' file is created using the + XeTeX engine ('http://tug.org/xetex'). Many other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) exist, which can produce HTML, XML, and other things. - 2. The "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary information + 2. The "transcript" or '.log' file that contains summary information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file. - 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for + 3. An "auxiliary" or '.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for things such as cross-references. An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won't try to list them all. Xxx components? - In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a `\', followed + In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a '\', followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments -contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional while arguments -contained in braces, `{}', are required. +contained in square brackets, '[]', are optional while arguments +contained in braces, '{}', are required. LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise. @@ -176,8 +188,8 @@ where the CLASS is a valid document class for LaTeX. *Note Document classes::, for details of the various document classes available locally. - You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass' and -the `\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the "preamble"). + You may include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and +the '\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the "preamble").  File: latex2e.info, Node: Document classes, Next: Typefaces, Prev: Starting & ending, Up: Top @@ -189,7 +201,7 @@ The class of a given document is defined with the command: \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS} -The `\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX source +The '\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX source file. Built-in LaTeX document CLASS names are (many other document classes @@ -210,71 +222,66 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Document class options, Up: Document classes ========================== You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the -`\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. +'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual. To specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma: \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS} Here is the list of the standard class options. - All of the standard classes except `slides' accept the following -options for selecting the typeface size (default is `10pt'): + All of the standard classes except 'slides' accept the following +options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'): 10pt 11pt 12pt All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the -paper size (default is `letterpaper'): +paper size (default is 'letterpaper'): a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper Miscellaneous other options: -`draft, final' +'draft, final' mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is - `final'. - -`fleqn' + 'final'. +'fleqn' Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered. - -`landscape' +'landscape' Selects landscape format; default is portrait. - -`leqno' +'leqno' Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side. - -`openbib' +'openbib' Use "open" bibliography format. - -`titlepage, notitlepage' +'titlepage, notitlepage' Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class. These options are not available with the slides class: -`onecolumn' -`twocolumn' - Typeset in one or two columns; default is `onecolumn'. +'onecolumn' +'twocolumn' + Typeset in one or two columns; default is 'onecolumn'. -`oneside' -`twoside' - Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is `oneside', except for - the `book' class. +'oneside' +'twoside' + Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except for + the 'book' class. - The `\evensidemargin' (`\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the + The '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided, - `\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between `\paperwidth' and - `\textwidth', with `\evensidemargin' the remainder. + '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth' and + '\textwidth', with '\evensidemargin' the remainder. -`openright' -`openany' +'openright' +'openany' Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default - is `openright' for book. + is 'openright' for book. - The `slides' class offers the option `clock' for printing the time at + The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at the bottom of each note. Additional packages are loaded like this: @@ -282,11 +289,11 @@ the bottom of each note. \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG} To specify more than one PKG, you can separate them with a comma, or -use multiple `\usepackage' commands. +use multiple '\usepackage' commands. - Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown by + Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with -`\usepackage'. +'\usepackage'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Typefaces, Next: Layout, Prev: Document classes, Up: Top @@ -311,106 +318,96 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Font styles, Next: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. - These commands are used like `\textit{italic text}'. The -corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which -takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the -next type style command or the end of the current group. + This first group of commands is typically used like '\textit{italic +text}'. The corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration +form", which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form +lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group. The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either -`\sffamily\bfseries' or `\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif. +'\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif. - You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for -instance, `\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'. + You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; +for instance, '\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'. -`\textrm (\rmfamily)' + These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the +'\textrm (\rmfamily)' Roman. -`\textit (\itshape)' +'\textit (\itshape)' Italics. -`\emph' - Emphasis (switches between `\textit' and `\textrm'). +'\emph' + Emphasis (switches between '\textit' and '\textrm'). -`\textmd (\mdseries)' +'\textmd (\mdseries)' Medium weight (default). -`\textbf (\bfseries)' +'\textbf (\bfseries)' Boldface. - -`\textup (\upshape)' - Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. - -`\textsl (\slshape)' +'\textup (\upshape)' + Upright (default). The opposite of slanted. +'\textsl (\slshape)' Slanted. - -`\textsf (\sffamily)' +'\textsf (\sffamily)' Sans serif. - -`\textsc (\scshape)' +'\textsc (\scshape)' Small caps. - -`\texttt (\ttfamily)' +'\texttt (\ttfamily)' Typewriter. - -`\textnormal (\normalfont)' +'\textnormal (\normalfont)' Main document font. - -`\mathrm' +'\mathrm' Roman, for use in math mode. - -`\mathbf' +'\mathbf' Boldface, for use in math mode. - -`\mathsf' +'\mathsf' Sans serif, for use in math mode. - -`\mathtt' +'\mathtt' Typewriter, for use in math mode. -`\mathit' -`(\mit)' +'\mathit' +'(\mit)' Italics, for use in math mode. -`\mathnormal' - For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. - -`\mathcal' - `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. +'\mathnormal' + For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration. +'\mathcal' + 'Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode. - In addition, the command `\mathversion{bold}' can be used for + In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas. -`\mathversion{normal}' restores the default. +'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default. LaTeX also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used -differently than the above commands, too: `{\CMD ...}' instead of -`\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things. +differently than the above commands, too: '{\CMD ...}' instead of +'\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things. -`\bf' +'\bf' Switch to bold face. -`\cal' +'\cal' Switch to calligraphic letters for math. -`\em' +'\em' Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics). -`\it' +'\it' Italics. -`\rm' +'\rm' Roman. -`\sc' +'\sc' Small caps. -`\sf' +'\sf' Sans serif. -`\sl' +'\sl' Slanted (oblique). -`\tt' +'\tt' Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).  @@ -421,26 +418,26 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Font sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Fo The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used -(in points) with the `10pt', `11pt', and `12pt' document size options, +(in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options, respectively (*note Document class options::). -Command `10pt' `11pt' `12pt' +Command '10pt' '11pt' '12pt' -------------------------------------------------- -`\tiny' 5 6 6 -`\scriptsize' 7 8 8 -`\footnotesize' 8 9 10 -`\small' 9 10 10.95 -`\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12 -`\large' 12 12 14.4 -`\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28 -`\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74 -`\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88 -`\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88 - - The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the -declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of -the current group. You can also use the environment form of these -commands; for instance, `\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. +'\tiny' 5 6 6 +'\scriptsize' 7 8 8 +'\footnotesize' 8 9 10 +'\small' 9 10 10.95 +'\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12 +'\large' 12 12 14.4 +'\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28 +'\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74 +'\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88 +'\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88 + + The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of +the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end +of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these +commands; for instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces @@ -452,79 +449,68 @@ These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available ones. -`\fontencoding{enc}' - Select font encoding. Valid encodings include `OT1' and `T1'. +'\fontencoding{enc}' + Select font encoding. Valid encodings include 'OT1' and 'T1'. -`\fontfamily{family}' - Select font family. Valid families include: +'\fontfamily{family}' + Select font family. Valid families include: - * `cmr' for Computer Modern Roman - - * `cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif - - * `cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter + * 'cmr' for Computer Modern Roman + * 'cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif + * 'cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter and numerous others. -`\fontseries{series}' - Select font series. Valid series include: - - * `m' Medium (normal) +'\fontseries{series}' + Select font series. Valid series include: - * `b' Bold - - * `c' Condensed - - * `bc' Bold condensed - - * `bx' Bold extended + * 'm' Medium (normal) + * 'b' Bold + * 'c' Condensed + * 'bc' Bold condensed + * 'bx' Bold extended and various other combinations. -`\fontshape{shape}' - Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - - * `n' Upright (normal) - - * `it' Italic - - * `sl' Slanted (oblique) - - * `sc' Small caps +'\fontshape{shape}' + Select font shape. Valid shapes are: - * `ui' Upright italics - - * `ol' Outline + * 'n' Upright (normal) + * 'it' Italic + * 'sl' Slanted (oblique) + * 'sc' Small caps + * 'ui' Upright italics + * 'ol' Outline The two last shapes are not available for most font families. -`\fontsize{size}{skip}' - Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to +'\fontsize{size}{skip}' + Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a - parameter named `\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters - defaults to pt. The default `\baselineskip' for the Computer - Modern typeface is 1.2 times the `\fontsize'. + parameter named '\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters + defaults to pt. The default '\baselineskip' for the Computer + Modern typeface is 1.2 times the '\fontsize'. The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the - `\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the + '\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to "double space" a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use - the `setspace' package; see - `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'. + the 'setspace' package; see + 'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'. -`\linespread{FACTOR}' - Equivalent to `\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and - therefore must be followed by `\selectfont' to have any effect. - Best specified in the preamble, or use the `setspace' package, as +'\linespread{FACTOR}' + Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and + therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect. + Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as described just above. The changes made by calling the font commands described above do - not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called. + not come into effect until '\selectfont' is called. -`\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}' - The same as invoking `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily', `\fontseries' - and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by - `\selectfont'. +'\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}' + The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries' + and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by + '\selectfont'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Layout, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Typefaces, Up: Top @@ -545,78 +531,78 @@ Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout -6.1 `\onecolumn' +6.1 '\onecolumn' ================ -The `\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces +The '\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces single-column output. This is the default.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout -6.2 `\twocolumn' +6.2 '\twocolumn' ================ Synopsis: \twocolumn[TEXT1COL] - The `\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces -two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is + The '\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces +two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: -`\columnsep' +'\columnsep' The distance between columns (35pt by default). -`\columnseprule' +'\columnseprule' The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule. -`\columnwidth' - The width of the current column; this is equal to `\textwidth' in +'\columnwidth' + The width of the current column; this is equal to '\textwidth' in single-column text. These parameters control float behavior in two-column output: -`\dbltopfraction' +'\dbltopfraction' Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be - occupied by floats. Default `.7', can be usefully redefined to - (say) `.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon. + occupied by floats. Default '.7', can be usefully redefined to + (say) '.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon. -`\dblfloatpagefraction' +'\dblfloatpagefraction' The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by - floats, for a two-column float page. Default `.5'. + floats, for a two-column float page. Default '.5'. -`\dblfloatsep' +'\dblfloatsep' Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float - page. Default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' - documents, `14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for `12pt'. + page. Default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt' + documents, '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for '12pt'. -`\dbltextfloatsep' +'\dbltextfloatsep' Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a - page and the main text. Default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. + page and the main text. Default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Layout -6.3 `\flushbottom' +6.3 '\flushbottom' ================== -The `\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height, +The '\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page. - This is the default if `twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document + This is the default if 'twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document class options::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout -6.4 `\raggedbottom' +6.4 '\raggedbottom' =================== -The `\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of +The '\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.  @@ -625,71 +611,71 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: La 6.5 Page layout parameters ========================== -`\headheight' +'\headheight' Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is - `30pt', except in the `book' class, where it varies with the type + '30pt', except in the 'book' class, where it varies with the type size. -`\headsep' +'\headsep' Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top - of the main text. Default is `25pt', except in the `book' class, + of the main text. Default is '25pt', except in the 'book' class, where it varies with the type size. -`\footskip' +'\footskip' Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline - of the page footer. Default is `30pt', except in the `book' class, + of the page footer. Default is '30pt', except in the 'book' class, where it varies with the type size. -`\linewidth' - Width of the current line, decreased for each nested `list' (*note - list::). Specifically, it is smaller than `\textwidth' by the sum - of `\leftmargin' and `\rightmargin' (*note itemize::). The default +'\linewidth' + Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note + list::). Specifically, it is smaller than '\textwidth' by the sum + of '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note itemize::). The default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For - an `article' document in `10pt', it's set to `345pt'; in two-column - mode, that becomes `229.5pt'. + an 'article' document in '10pt', it's set to '345pt'; in two-column + mode, that becomes '229.5pt'. -`\textheight' +'\textheight' The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies - with the font size, document class, etc. For an `article' or - `report' document in `10pt', it's set to `43\baselineskip'; for - `book', it's `41\baselineskip'. For `11pt', it's `38\baselineskip' - and for `12pt', `36\baselineskip'. + with the font size, document class, etc. For an 'article' or + 'report' document in '10pt', it's set to '43\baselineskip'; for + 'book', it's '41\baselineskip'. For '11pt', it's '38\baselineskip' + and for '12pt', '36\baselineskip'. -`\textwidth' +'\textwidth' The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default - varies as usual. For an `article' or `report' document, it's - `345pt' at `10pt', `360pt' at `11pt', and `390pt' at `12pt'. For a - `book' document, it's `4.5in' at `10pt', and `5in' at `11pt' or - `12pt'. + varies as usual. For an 'article' or 'report' document, it's + '345pt' at '10pt', '360pt' at '11pt', and '390pt' at '12pt'. For a + 'book' document, it's '4.5in' at '10pt', and '5in' at '11pt' or + '12pt'. - In multi-column output, `\textwidth' remains the width of the - entire page body, while `\columnwidth' is the width of one column + In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the + entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column (*note \twocolumn::). - In lists (*note list::), `\textwidth' remains the width of the - entire page body (and `\columnwidth' the width of the entire - column), while `\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists. + In lists (*note list::), '\textwidth' remains the width of the + entire page body (and '\columnwidth' the width of the entire + column), while '\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists. - Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or `\parbox' (*note + Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or '\parbox' (*note \parbox::), all the width-related parameters are set to the specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of - the `minipage' or `\parbox'. + the 'minipage' or '\parbox'. - For completeness: `\hsize' is the TeX primitive parameter used when + For completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal LaTeX documents. -`\topmargin' +'\topmargin' Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is - computed based on many other parameters: `\paperheight - 2in - + computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in - \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided by two. -`\topskip' +'\topskip' Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is - the same as the font size, e.g., `10pt' at `10pt'. + the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at '10pt'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top @@ -699,20 +685,14 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: -`\part' - -`\chapter' +'\part' +'\chapter' (report and book class only) - -`\section' - -`\subsection' - -`\subsubsection' - -`\paragraph' - -`\subparagraph' +'\section' +'\subsection' +'\subsubsection' +'\paragraph' +'\subparagraph' All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., @@ -722,21 +702,20 @@ Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: section title can appear in two other places: 1. The table of contents. - 2. The running head at the top of the page. You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. - Also, all sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print TITLE as + Also, all sectioning commands have '*'-forms that print TITLE as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents. For instance: \section*{Preamble} - The `\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are -numbered. The `\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not + The '\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are +numbered. The '\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is something like @@ -745,12 +724,12 @@ something like \appendix \chapter{The First Appendix} - The `secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers. The + The 'secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting \setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL} -suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where `chapter' is +suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where 'chapter' is level zero. (*Note \setcounter::.)  @@ -771,14 +750,14 @@ the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."  File: latex2e.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Up: Cross references -8.1 `\label' +8.1 '\label' ============ Synopsis: \label{KEY} - A `\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the + A '\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered environment assigns that number to KEY. @@ -787,53 +766,49 @@ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished. To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a -colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: +colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: -`ch' +'ch' for chapters - -`sec' +'sec' for lower-level sectioning commands - -`fig' +'fig' for figures - -`tab' +'tab' for tables - -`eq' +'eq' for equations - Thus, a label for a figure would look like `fig:snark' or -`fig.snark'. + Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:snark' or +'fig.snark'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references -8.2 `\pageref{KEY}' +8.2 '\pageref{KEY}' =================== Synopsis: \pageref{KEY} - The `\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in -the text where the corresponding `\label'{KEY} command appears. + The '\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in +the text where the corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross references -8.3 `\ref{KEY}' +8.3 '\ref{KEY}' =============== Synopsis: \ref{KEY} - The `\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding `\label' command + The '\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit, +equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::). It does not produce any text, such as the word -`Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself. +'Section' or 'Figure', just the bare number itself.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Environments, Next: Line breaking, Prev: Cross references, Up: Top @@ -882,7 +857,7 @@ environment begins and ends in the same manner:  File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments -9.1 `abstract' +9.1 'abstract' ============== Synopsis: @@ -896,7 +871,7 @@ paragraphs.  File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environments -9.2 `array' +9.2 'array' =========== Synopsis: @@ -906,25 +881,23 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{array} - Math arrays are produced with the `array' environment, normally -within an `equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single + Math arrays are produced with the 'array' environment, normally +within an 'equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows: -`c' +'c' centered - -`l' +'l' flush left - -`r' +'r' flush right - Column entries are separated by `&'. Column entries may include -other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with `\\'. + Column entries are separated by '&'. Column entries may include +other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with '\\'. - In the template, the construct `@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in + In the template, the construct '@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in each row. Here's an example: @@ -936,17 +909,17 @@ each row. \end{array} \end{equation} - The `\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space -separating columns; the default is `5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other -parameters which affect formatting in `array' environments, namely -`\arrayrulewidth' and `\arraystretch'. + The '\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space +separating columns; the default is '5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other +parameters which affect formatting in 'array' environments, namely +'\arrayrulewidth' and '\arraystretch'. - The `array' environment can only be used in math mode. + The 'array' environment can only be used in math mode.  File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments -9.3 `center' +9.3 'center' ============ Synopsis: @@ -956,30 +929,30 @@ Synopsis: LINE2 \\ \end{center} - The `center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting + The 'center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the -current page. Each line is terminated with the string `\\'. +current page. Each line is terminated with the string '\\'. * Menu: -* \centering:: Declaration form of the `center' environment. +* \centering:: Declaration form of the 'center' environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \centering, Up: center -9.3.1 `\centering' +9.3.1 '\centering' ------------------ -The `\centering' declaration corresponds to the `center' environment. -This declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in -a `parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the -page by putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or +The '\centering' declaration corresponds to the 'center' environment. +This declaration can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in +a 'parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the +page by putting a '\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or table environment. - Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not + Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an +declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command (of an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit. Here's an example: @@ -993,7 +966,7 @@ environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.  File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Environments -9.4 `description' +9.4 'description' ================= Synopsis: @@ -1004,22 +977,22 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{description} - The `description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each + The 'description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each LABEL is typeset in bold, flush right. The ITEM text may contain multiple paragraphs. Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if -you typeset a label in typewriter using `\texttt', you'll get bold -typewriter: `\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too -bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use `\tt', which -resets all other style variations: `\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'. +you typeset a label in typewriter using '\texttt', you'll get bold +typewriter: '\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too +bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use '\tt', which +resets all other style variations: '\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'. For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Environments -9.5 `displaymath' +9.5 'displaymath' ================= Synopsis: @@ -1032,26 +1005,26 @@ or \[MATH\] - The `displaymath' environment (`\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the -MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global `fleqn' + The 'displaymath' environment ('\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the +MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global 'fleqn' option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::. - No equation number is added to `displaymath' text; to get an equation -number, use the `equation' environment (*note equation::). + No equation number is added to 'displaymath' text; to get an equation +number, use the 'equation' environment (*note equation::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Environments -9.6 `document' +9.6 'document' ============== -The `document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is +The 'document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting & ending::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Environments -9.7 `enumerate' +9.7 'enumerate' =============== Synopsis: @@ -1062,31 +1035,28 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{enumerate} - The `enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations + The 'enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also -be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as `itemize' -(*note itemize::) and `description' (*note description::). +be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as 'itemize' +(*note itemize::) and 'description' (*note description::). - Each item of an enumerated list begins with an `\item' command. -There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. + Each item of an enumerated list begins with an '\item' command. +There must be at least one '\item' command within the environment. By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: 1. 1., 2., ... - 2. (a), (b), ... - 3. i., ii., ... - 4. A., B., ... - The `enumerate' environment uses the counters `\enumi' through -`\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to -`\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. + The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through +'\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to +'\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item. - The `enumerate' environment uses the commands `\labelenumi' through -`\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use -`\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand & + The 'enumerate' environment uses the commands '\labelenumi' through +'\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use +'\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase letters: @@ -1095,36 +1065,45 @@ letters:  File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments -9.8 `eqnarray' +9.8 'eqnarray' ============== - \begin{eqnarray} (or `eqnarray*') +First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment has some infelicities which +cannot be overcome; the article "Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen +describes them in detail +('http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf'). The bottom line is +that it is better to use the 'align' environment (and others) from the +'amsmath' package. + + Nevertheless, here is a description of 'eqnarray': + + \begin{eqnarray} (or 'eqnarray*') FORMULA1 \\ FORMULA2 \\ ... \end{eqnarray} - The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations -or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array' -environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive -items within a row separated by an `&'. + The 'eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations +or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column 'array' +environment, with consecutive rows separated by '\\' and consecutive +items within a row separated by an '&'. - `\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning + '\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning of not allowing a page break at that line. An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a -`\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The `*'-form of the environment -(`\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering -entirely, while otherwise being the same as `eqnarray'. +'\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The '*'-form of the environment +('\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering +entirely, while otherwise being the same as 'eqnarray'. - The command `\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across -lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of + The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across +lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width.  File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments -9.9 `equation' +9.9 'equation' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1133,14 +1112,14 @@ Synopsis: MATH \end{equation} - The `equation' environment starts a `displaymath' environment (*note + The 'equation' environment starts a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin.  File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: flushleft, Prev: equation, Up: Environments -9.10 `figure' +9.10 'figure' ============= \begin{figure[*]}[PLACEMENT] @@ -1156,74 +1135,105 @@ Figures will not be split between two pages. When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns). - The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try + The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float: -`t' +'t' (Top)--at the top of a text page. -`b' - (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. However, `b' is not - allowed for full-width floats (`figure*') with double-column - output. To ameliorate this, use the `stfloats' or `dblfloatfix' +'b' + (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. However, 'b' is not + allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column + output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix' package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ: - `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat'. + 'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat'. -`h' +'h' (Here)--at the position in the text where the figure environment - appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, `t' is - automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear - "here", use the `float' and use its `H' placement letter. (That - package also provides other options.) + appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; 't' is + automatically added. -`p' + To absolutely force a figure to appear "here", you can + '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines. + For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at + 'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere'. + +'p' (Page of floats)--on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. +'!' + Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX + ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can + appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the + page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see + above. + The standard report and article classes use the default placement -`tbp'. +'tbp'. The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, -etc. you wish. +etc. you wish. - The `\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The + The '\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The caption is numbered by default. If LOFTITLE is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::). + Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and +non-float text: + The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at - the bottom; default `.3'. + the bottom; default '.3'. -`\floatpagefraction' +'\floatpagefraction' The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by - floats; default `.5'. + floats; default '.5'. + +'\textfraction' + Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too + much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a + different page. The default is '.2'. + +'\topfraction' + Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before + floats; default '.7'. + + Parameters relating to vertical space around floats: -`\floatsep' - Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default `12pt +'\floatsep' + Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt'. -`\intextsep' +'\intextsep' Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; - default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' styles, `14pt - plus4pt minus4pt' for `12pt'. + default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt' styles, '14pt + plus4pt minus4pt' for '12pt'. -`\textfloatsep' +'\textfloatsep' Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; - default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. + default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'. -`\textfraction' - Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too - much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a - different page. The default is `.2'. + Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page: -`\topfraction' - Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before - floats; default is `.7'. +'\bottomnumber' + Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text + page; default 1. + +'\topnumber' + Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; + default 2. + +'\totalnumber' + Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. + + The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats: +'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: figure, Up: Environments -9.11 `flushleft' +9.11 'flushleft' ================ \begin{flushleft} @@ -1232,34 +1242,34 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: figure, Up: Env ... \end{flushleft} - The `flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph + The 'flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged -right Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. +right Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'. * Menu: -* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the `flushleft' environment. +* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the 'flushleft' environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft -9.11.1 `\raggedright' +9.11.1 '\raggedright' --------------------- -The `\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the `flushleft' +The '\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the 'flushleft' environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as -`quote' or in a `parbox'. +'quote' or in a 'parbox'. - Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does + Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the +declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the paragraph unit.  File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments -9.12 `flushright' +9.12 'flushright' ================= \begin{flushright} @@ -1268,34 +1278,34 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: En ... \end{flushright} - The `flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph + The 'flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged -left. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'. +left. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'. * Menu: -* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the `flushright' environment. +* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the 'flushright' environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright -9.12.1 `\raggedleft' +9.12.1 '\raggedleft' -------------------- -The `\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the `flushright' +The '\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the 'flushright' environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as -`quote' or in a `parbox'. +'quote' or in a 'parbox'. - Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does + Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the -declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the +declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the paragraph unit.  File: latex2e.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments -9.13 `itemize' +9.13 'itemize' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1306,37 +1316,34 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{itemize} - The `itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list. + The 'itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such -as `enumerate' (*note enumerate::). +as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::). - Each item of an `itemize' list begins with an `\item' command. There -must be at least one `\item' command within the environment. + Each item of an 'itemize' list begins with an '\item' command. There +must be at least one '\item' command within the environment. By default, the marks at each level look like this: 1. * (bullet) - 2. -- (bold en-dash) - 3. * (asterisk) + 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) - 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period) - - The `itemize' environment uses the commands `\labelitemi' through -`\labelitemiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use -`\renewcommand' to change the labels. For instance, to have the first + The 'itemize' environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through +'\labelitemiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use +'\renewcommand' to change the labels. For instance, to have the first level use diamonds: \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$} - The `\leftmargini' through `\leftmarginvi' parameters define the + The '\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi' parameters define the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the -left margin of the list. By convention, `\leftmargin' is set to the -appropriate `\leftmarginN' when a new level of nesting is entered. +left margin of the list. By convention, '\leftmargin' is set to the +appropriate '\leftmarginN' when a new level of nesting is entered. - The defaults vary from `.5em' (highest levels of nesting) to `2.5em' + The defaults vary from '.5em' (highest levels of nesting) to '2.5em' (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: @@ -1344,53 +1351,53 @@ greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists: Some parameters that affect list formatting: -`\itemindent' +'\itemindent' Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero. -`\labelsep' - Space between the label and text of an item; default `.5em'. +'\labelsep' + Space between the label and text of an item; default '.5em'. -`\labelwidth' - Width of the label; default `2em', or `1.5em' in two-column mode. +'\labelwidth' + Width of the label; default '2em', or '1.5em' in two-column mode. -`\listparindent' +'\listparindent' Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within - a list item; default `0pt'. + a list item; default '0pt'. -`\rightmargin' +'\rightmargin' Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the - enclosing environment; default `0pt', except in the `quote', - `quotation', and `verse' environments, where it is set equal to - `\leftmargin'. + enclosing environment; default '0pt', except in the 'quote', + 'quotation', and 'verse' environments, where it is set equal to + '\leftmargin'. Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather loose, by default). -`\itemsep' - Vertical space between items. The default is `2pt plus1pt - minus1pt' for `10pt' documents, `3pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `11pt', - and `4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `12pt'. +'\itemsep' + Vertical space between items. The default is '2pt plus1pt + minus1pt' for '10pt' documents, '3pt plus2pt minus1pt' for '11pt', + and '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt' for '12pt'. -`\parsep' +'\parsep' Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. - Defaults are the same as `\itemsep'. + Defaults are the same as '\itemsep'. -`\topsep' +'\topsep' Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph. - For top-level lists, the default is `8pt plus2pt minus4pt' for - `10pt' documents, `9pt plus3pt minus5pt' for `11pt', and `10pt - plus4pt minus6pt' for `12pt'. These are reduced for nested lists. + For top-level lists, the default is '8pt plus2pt minus4pt' for + '10pt' documents, '9pt plus3pt minus5pt' for '11pt', and '10pt + plus4pt minus6pt' for '12pt'. These are reduced for nested lists. -`\partopsep' - Extra space added to `\topsep' when the list environment starts a - paragraph. The default is `2pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `10pt' - documents, `3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `11pt', and `3pt plus2pt - minus2pt' for `12pt'. +'\partopsep' + Extra space added to '\topsep' when the list environment starts a + paragraph. The default is '2pt plus1pt minus1pt' for '10pt' + documents, '3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for '11pt', and '3pt plus2pt + minus2pt' for '12pt'. Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide -space between items. Here is an example defining an `itemize*' +space between items. Here is an example defining an 'itemize*' environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs -within a single item (`\parskip' is not list-specific, *note +within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note \parskip::): \newenvironment{itemize*}% @@ -1403,7 +1410,7 @@ within a single item (`\parskip' is not list-specific, *note  File: latex2e.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments -9.14 `letter' environment: writing letters +9.14 'letter' environment: writing letters ========================================== This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::. @@ -1411,11 +1418,11 @@ This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: list, Next: math, Prev: letter, Up: Environments -9.15 `list' +9.15 'list' =========== -The `list' environment is a generic environment which is used for -defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in +The 'list' environment is a generic environment which is used for +defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in macros. \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING} @@ -1425,21 +1432,21 @@ documents, but often in macros. \end{list} The mandatory LABELING argument specifies how items should be -labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to `\item'). This +labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to '\item'). This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the label. It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands. The mandatory SPACING argument contains commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be -empty, i.e., `{}', which leaves the default spacing. +empty, i.e., '{}', which leaves the default spacing. The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by -`\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::). +'\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Environments -9.16 `math' +9.16 'math' =========== Synopsis: @@ -1448,35 +1455,35 @@ Synopsis: MATH \end{math} - The `math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running -text. `\(...\))' and `$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::. + The 'math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running +text. '\(...\))' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Environments -9.17 `minipage' +9.17 'minipage' =============== \begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH} TEXT \end{minipage} - The `minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that -will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the `\parbox' -command (*note \parbox::), but unlike `\parbox', other paragraph-making + The 'minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that +will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the '\parbox' +command (*note \parbox::), but unlike '\parbox', other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. - The arguments are the same as for `\parbox' (*note \parbox::). + The arguments are the same as for '\parbox' (*note \parbox::). - By default, paragraphs are not indented in the `minipage' + By default, paragraphs are not indented in the 'minipage' environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as -`\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command. +'\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command. - Footnotes in a `minipage' environment are handled in a way that is + Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A -`\footnote' or `\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom +'\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the -`\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary `footnote' counter (*note +'\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note Counters::). However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using @@ -1485,42 +1492,42 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.  File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments -9.18 `picture' +9.18 'picture' ============== \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) ... PICTURE COMMANDS ... \end{picture} - The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of + The 'picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and -a minus sign--a number like `5', `0.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate -specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if -`\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies +a minus sign--a number like '5', '0.3' or '-3.1416'. A coordinate +specifies a length in multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if +'\unitlength' has been set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of -`\unitlength', using the `\setlength' command, outside of a `picture' +'\unitlength', using the '\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture' environment. - A position is a pair of coordinates, such as `(2.4,-5)', specifying -the point with x-coordinate `2.4' and y-coordinate `-5'. Coordinates + A position is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying +the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'. Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - The `picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a -`position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment + The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a +'position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates. - The `picture' environment also has an optional `position' argument, -following the `size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike + The 'picture' environment also has an optional 'position' argument, +following the 'size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square -brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at +brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin). -For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command +For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) @@ -1537,21 +1544,21 @@ is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it. - Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command. + Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the '\put' command. The command \put (11.3,-.3){...} -puts the object specified by `...' in the picture, with its reference +puts the object specified by '...' in the picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. - The `\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything that -can go in an `\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the `\put' + The '\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything that +can go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the '\put' command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. - The `picture' commands are described in the following sections. + The 'picture' commands are described in the following sections. * Menu: @@ -1573,13 +1580,13 @@ corner of the box.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \makebox (picture), Up: picture -9.18.1 `\circle' +9.18.1 '\circle' ---------------- \circle[*]{DIAMETER} - The `\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to -the specified one as possible. The `*'-form of the command draws a + The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to +the specified one as possible. The '*'-form of the command draws a solid circle. Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn. @@ -1587,28 +1594,28 @@ solid circle.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \circle, Up: picture -9.18.2 `\makebox' +9.18.2 '\makebox' ----------------- -`\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}' +'\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}' - The `\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the -normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and -`height' in multiples of `\unitlength'. + The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the +normal '\makebox' command except that you must specify a 'width' and +'height' in multiples of '\unitlength'. - The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that your + The optional argument, '[position]', specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: -`t' +'t' Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. -`b' +'b' Moves the item to the bottom. -`l' +'l' Moves the item to the left. -`r' +'r' Moves the item to the right. *Note \makebox::. @@ -1616,140 +1623,137 @@ text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:  File: latex2e.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \dashbox, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture -9.18.3 `\framebox' +9.18.3 '\framebox' ------------------ Synopsis: \framebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POS]{...} - The `\framebox' command is like `\makebox' (see previous section), + The '\framebox' command is like '\makebox' (see previous section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. - The `\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and -leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box. + The '\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness '\fboxrule', and +leaves a space '\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \dashbox, Next: \frame, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture -9.18.4 `\dashbox' +9.18.4 '\dashbox' ----------------- Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: \dashbox{DLEN}(RWIDTH,RHEIGHT)[POS]{TEXT} - `\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a `picture' + '\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a 'picture' environment. Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT. The TEXT is positioned at optional POS. - A dashed box looks best when the `rwidth' and `rheight' are multiples -of the `dlen'. + A dashed box looks best when the 'rwidth' and 'rheight' are multiples +of the 'dlen'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \frame, Next: \line, Prev: \dashbox, Up: picture -9.18.5 `\frame' +9.18.5 '\frame' --------------- Synopsis: \frame{TEXT} - The `\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT. The + The '\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT. The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the object.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \frame, Up: picture -9.18.6 `\line' +9.18.6 '\line' -------------- Synopsis: \line(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH} - The `\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope + The '\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope XSLOPE/YSLOPE. Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to -mention other shapes, see the `curve2e' and many many other packages on +mention other shapes, see the 'curve2e' and many many other packages on CTAN.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \line, Up: picture -9.18.7 `\linethickness' +9.18.7 '\linethickness' ----------------------- -The `\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal +The '\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be DIM, which must be a positive length. - `\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, -circles, or the quarter circles drawn by `\oval'. + '\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, +circles, or the quarter circles drawn by '\oval'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \thicklines, Next: \thinlines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture -9.18.8 `\thicklines' +9.18.8 '\thicklines' -------------------- -The `\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal +The '\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness:: and *note \thinlines::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \multiput, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture -9.18.9 `\thinlines' +9.18.9 '\thinlines' ------------------- -The `\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal +The '\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness:: and *note \thicklines::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \thinlines, Up: picture -9.18.10 `\multiput' +9.18.10 '\multiput' ------------------- Synopsis: \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ} - The `\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern + The '\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern across a picture. OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \oval, Next: \put, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture -9.18.11 `\oval' +9.18.11 '\oval' --------------- Synopsis: \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION] - The `\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The + The '\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument PORTION allows you to select part of the oval via the following: -`t' +'t' selects the top portion; - -`b' +'b' selects the bottom portion; - -`r' +'r' selects the right portion; - -`l' +'l' selects the left portion. The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a @@ -1759,56 +1763,54 @@ rounded corners.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \put, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \oval, Up: picture -9.18.12 `\put' +9.18.12 '\put' -------------- -`\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }' +'\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }' - The `\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory + The '\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \put, Up: picture -9.18.13 `\shortstack' +9.18.13 '\shortstack' --------------------- Synopsis: \shortstack[POSITION]{...\\...\\...} - The `\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid + The '\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid positions are: -`r' +'r' Move the objects to the right of the stack. - -`l' +'l' Move the objects to the left of the stack - -`c' +'c' Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) - Objects are separated with `\\'. + Objects are separated with '\\'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \vector, Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture -9.18.14 `\vector' +9.18.14 '\vector' ----------------- Synopsis: \vector(X-SLOPE,Y-SLOPE){LENGTH} - The `\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified + The '\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -4 and +4, inclusive.  File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Environments -9.19 `quotation' +9.19 'quotation' ================ Synopsis: @@ -1817,16 +1819,16 @@ Synopsis: TEXT \end{quotation} - The margins of the `quotation' environment are indented on both the + The margins of the 'quotation' environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - Unlike the `quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally. + Unlike the 'quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally.  File: latex2e.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Environments -9.20 `quote' +9.20 'quote' ============ Snyopsis: @@ -1835,16 +1837,16 @@ Snyopsis: TEXT \end{quote} - The margins of the `quote' environment are indented on both the left + The margins of the 'quote' environment are indented on both the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph. - Unlike the `quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented. + Unlike the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented.  File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Environments -9.21 `tabbing' +9.21 'tabbing' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1855,73 +1857,73 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{tabbing} - The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns. + The 'tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant and known in advance. - This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular' + This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the 'tabular' environment. - The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment: + The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' enviroment: -`\\ (tabbing)' +'\\ (tabbing)' End a line. -`\= (tabbing)' +'\= (tabbing)' Sets a tab stop at the current position. -`\> (tabbing)' +'\> (tabbing)' Advances to the next tab stop. -`\<' +'\<' Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. -`\+' +'\+' Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -`\-' +'\-' Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -`\' (tabbing)' +'\' (tabbing)' Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, - i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or - `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against + i.e. everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or + '\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop. -`\` (tabbing)' +'\` (tabbing)' Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last - column because there's no tab stop there. The `\`' command moves - all the text that follows it, up to the `\\' or `\end{tabbing}' + column because there's no tab stop there. The '\`' command moves + all the text that follows it, up to the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}' command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing - environment. There must be no `\>' or `\'' command between the - `\`' and the command that ends the line. + environment. There must be no '\>' or '\'' command between the + '\`' and the command that ends the line. -`\a (tabbing)' - In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do not +'\a (tabbing)' + In a 'tabbing' environment, the commands '\=', '\'' and '\`' do not produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, the commands - `\a=', `\a'' and `\a`' are used. + '\a=', '\a'' and '\a`' are used. -`\kill' - Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\' except +'\kill' + Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like '\\' except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output - for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in that line + for it. The effect of any '\=', '\+' or '\-' commands in that line remain in effect. -`\poptabs' - Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'. +'\poptabs' + Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last '\pushtabs'. -`\pushtabs' - Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily - changing tab stop positions in the middle of a `tabbing' +'\pushtabs' + Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily + changing tab stop positions in the middle of a 'tabbing' environment. -`\tabbingsep' - Distance to left of tab stop moved by `\''. +'\tabbingsep' + Distance to left of tab stop moved by '\''. This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format: @@ -1938,7 +1940,7 @@ environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments -9.22 `table' +9.22 'table' ============ Synopsis: @@ -1954,21 +1956,21 @@ Synopsis: usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables will not be split between two pages. - The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try + The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put -a float; these are the same as that used with the `figure' environment, +a float; these are the same as that used with the 'figure' environment, and described there (*note figure::). - The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default placement -`[tbp]'. + The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement +'[tbp]'. The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, -etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table. +etc., you wish. The '\caption' command allows you to title your table.  File: latex2e.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments -9.23 `tabular' +9.23 'tabular' ============== Synopsis: @@ -1978,7 +1980,7 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{tabular} - or +or \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ @@ -1988,95 +1990,99 @@ Synopsis: These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. - `\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except -for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command (to put a + '\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except +for the last, where it is optional--unless an '\hline' command (to put a rule below the table) follows. The mandatory and optional arguments consist of: -`width' - Specifies the width of the `tabular*' environment. There must be +'width' + Specifies the width of the 'tabular*' environment. There must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified width. -`pos' +'pos' Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of the environment. - `t' + 't' align on top row - `b' + 'b' align on bottom row -`cols' +'cols' Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and intercolumn material. - `l' + 'l' A column of left-aligned items. - `r' + 'r' A column of right-aligned items. - `c' + 'c' A column of centered items. - `|' + '|' A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. - `@{TEXT}' + '@{TEXT}' This inserts TEXT in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any - desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items - must be included in TEXT. An `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an - @-expression causes an extra space of width `wd' to appear to - the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by - another `\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn - space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. - An `\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression - in the `cols' argument. - - `p{WD}' + desired space before the adjacent item must be included in + TEXT. + + To insert commands that are automatically executed before a + given column, you have to load the 'array' package and use the + '>{...}' specifier. + + An '\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an + extra space of width 'wd' to appear to the left of all + subsequent columns, until countermanded by another + '\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, + this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An + '\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression in + the 'cols' argument. + + 'p{WD}' Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width - WD, as if it were the argument of a `\parbox[t]{WD}' command. - However, a `\\' may not appear in the item, except in the + WD, as if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{WD}' command. + However, a '\\' may not appear in the item, except in the following situations: - 1. inside an environment like `minipage', `array', or - `tabular'. - - 2. inside an explicit `\parbox'. - - 3. in the scope of a `\centering', `\raggedright', or - `\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must + 1. inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or + 'tabular'. + 2. inside an explicit '\parbox'. + 3. in the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or + '\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a - `p'-column element. + 'p'-column element. - `*{NUM}{COLS}' + '*{NUM}{COLS}' Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive integer and COLS is any list of column-specifiers, which may - contain another `*-expression'. + contain another '*-expression'. Parameters that control formatting: -`\arrayrulewidth' - Thickness of the rule created by `|', `\hline', and `\vline' in the - `tabular' and `array' environments; the default is `.4pt'. +'\arrayrulewidth' + Thickness of the rule created by '|', '\hline', and '\vline' in the + 'tabular' and 'array' environments; the default is '.4pt'. -`\arraystretch' - Scaling of spacing between rows in the `tabular' and `array' - environments; default is `1', for no scaling. +'\arraystretch' + Scaling of spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and 'array' + environments; default is '1', for no scaling. -`\doublerulesep' - Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by `||' in - the `tabular' and `array' environments; default is `2pt'. +'\doublerulesep' + Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by '||' in + the 'tabular' and 'array' environments; default is '2pt'. -`\tabcolsep' - Half the width of the space between columns; default is `6pt'. +'\tabcolsep' + Half the width of the space between columns; default is '6pt'. - These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment: + The following commands can be used inside a 'tabular' environment: * Menu: @@ -2088,20 +2094,20 @@ rule below the table) follows.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \cline, Up: tabular -9.23.1 `\multicolumn' +9.23.1 '\multicolumn' --------------------- Synopsis: \multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT} - The `\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns. + The '\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the formatting of -the entry; `c' for centered, `l' for flushleft, `r' for flushright. The +the entry; 'c' for centered, 'l' for flushleft, 'r' for flushright. The third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry. Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash; -`\multicolumn' is used for the heading: +'\multicolumn' is used for the heading: \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l} \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr @@ -2113,41 +2119,41 @@ third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular -9.23.2 `\cline' +9.23.2 '\cline' --------------- Synopsis: \cline{I-J} - The `\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns + The '\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are specified in the mandatory argument.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Next: \vline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular -9.23.3 `\hline' +9.23.3 '\hline' --------------- -The `\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing -`tabular' or `array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a +The '\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing +'tabular' or 'array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular -9.23.4 `\vline' +9.23.4 '\vline' --------------- -The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height -and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move the line +The '\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height +and depth of its row. An '\hfill' command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression.  File: latex2e.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments -9.24 `thebibliography' +9.24 'thebibliography' ====================== Synopsis: @@ -2157,20 +2163,20 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{thebibliography} - The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or + The 'thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or reference list. - In the `article' class, this reference list is labelled "References"; -in the `report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". You can change + In the 'article' class, this reference list is labelled "References"; +in the 'report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command -`\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: +'\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely: \renewcommand{\refname}{} The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is as -wide as the widest item label produced by the `\bibitem' commands. It -is typically given as `9' for bibliographies with less than 10 -references, `99' for ones with less than 100, etc. +wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. It +is typically given as '9' for bibliographies with less than 10 +references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc. * Menu: @@ -2182,27 +2188,27 @@ references, `99' for ones with less than 100, etc.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography -9.24.1 `\bibitem' +9.24.1 '\bibitem' ----------------- Synopsis: \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY} - The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the + The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the -`enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, and +'enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. - This command writes an entry to the `.aux' file containing the item's -CITE_KEY and label. When the `.aux' file is read by the -`\begin{document}' command, the item's `label' is associated with -`cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a `\cite' command (see + This command writes an entry to the '.aux' file containing the item's +CITE_KEY and label. When the '.aux' file is read by the +'\begin{document}' command, the item's 'label' is associated with +'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (see next section) to produce the associated label.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography -9.24.2 `\cite' +9.24.2 '\cite' -------------- Synopsis: @@ -2211,21 +2217,21 @@ Synopsis: The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references -associated with KEYS by entries in the `.aux' file. +associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux' file. The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation. -For example, `\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, p. 314]'. +For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography -9.24.3 `\nocite' +9.24.3 '\nocite' ---------------- -`\nocite{key_list}' +'\nocite{key_list}' - The `\nocite' command produces no text, but writes `key_list', which -is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux' file. + The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes 'key_list', which +is a list of one or more citation keys, on the '.aux' file.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography @@ -2235,45 +2241,42 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain -your bibliography, you don't use the `thebibliography' environment -(*note thebibliography::). Instead, you include the lines +your bibliography, you don't use the 'thebibliography' environment +(*note thebibliography::). Instead, you include the lines \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE} \bibliography{BIBFILE1,BIBFILE2} - The `\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its + The '\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be -produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE`.bst', which defines how +produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE'.bst', which defines how your citations will look. The standard STYLE names distributed with BibTeX are: -`alpha' - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and +'alpha' + Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. - -`plain' - Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. - -`unsrt' - Like `plain', but entries are in order of citation. - -`abbrv' - Like `plain', but more compact labels. +'plain' + Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +'unsrt' + Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation. +'abbrv' + Like 'plain', but more compact labels. In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the demands of various publications. See -`http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib'. +'http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib'. - The `\bibliography' command is what actually produces the -bibliography. The argument to `\bibliography' refers to files named -`BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format. -Only the entries referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed in + The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the +bibliography. The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named +'BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format. +Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite' will be listed in the bibliography.  File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments -9.25 `theorem' +9.25 'theorem' ============== Synopsis: @@ -2282,14 +2285,14 @@ Synopsis: THEOREM-TEXT \end{theorem} - The `theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed + The 'theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described -under `\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::). +under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments -9.26 `titlepage' +9.26 'titlepage' ================ Synopsis: @@ -2298,18 +2301,18 @@ Synopsis: TEXT \end{titlepage} - The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with + The 'titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The -`\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::). +'\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::). - You can use the `\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce -a standard title page without a `titlepage' environment. + You can use the '\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce +a standard title page without a 'titlepage' environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments -9.27 `verbatim' +9.27 'verbatim' =============== Synopsis: @@ -2318,22 +2321,22 @@ Synopsis: LITERAL-TEXT \end{verbatim} - The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which -LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the `\' character -produces a printed `\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage + The 'verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which +LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the '\' character +produces a printed '\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a typewriter. - The `verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (`\tt'). + The 'verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt'). * Menu: -* \verb:: The macro form of the `verbatim' environment. +* \verb:: The macro form of the 'verbatim' environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim -9.27.1 `\verb' +9.27.1 '\verb' -------------- Synopsis: @@ -2341,19 +2344,19 @@ Synopsis: \verbCHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR \verb*CHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR - The `\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including -special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (`\tt') font. No -spaces are allowed between `\verb' or `\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR, + The '\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including +special characters and spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font. No +spaces are allowed between '\verb' or '\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in LITERAL-TEXT. - The `*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible + The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible space" character.  File: latex2e.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments -9.28 `verse' +9.28 'verse' ============ Synopsis: @@ -2364,12 +2367,12 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{verse} - The `verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find + The 'verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each -stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the +stanza with '\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas.  @@ -2384,7 +2387,7 @@ printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these lines must be broken into pages). LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some -environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, +environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the '\\' command, and you can always manually force breaks. * Menu: @@ -2401,91 +2404,91 @@ and you can always manually force breaks.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking -10.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] +10.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE] ======================= -The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional +The '\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. - The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except + The '\\*' command is the same as the ordinary '\\' command except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \obeycr & \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Line breaking -10.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' +10.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr' ============================= -The `\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file (`^^M', -internally) the same as `\\' (followed by `\relax'). So each new line +The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M', +internally) the same as '\\' (followed by '\relax'). So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. - `\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior. + '\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking -10.3 `\newline' +10.3 '\newline' =============== -The `\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no +The '\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \fussy, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking -10.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) +10.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen) ================================ -The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that +The '\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect -one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. +one. The '\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. - When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be + When you insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking -10.5 `\fussy' +10.5 '\fussy' ============= -The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about +The declaration '\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. - This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command + This command cancels the effect of a previous '\sloppy' command (*note \sloppy::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \sloppy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \fussy, Up: Line breaking -10.6 `\sloppy' +10.6 '\sloppy' ============== -The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This -will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. +The declaration '\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. +This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. - Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::). + Lasts until a '\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \sloppy, Up: Line breaking -10.7 `\hyphenation' +10.7 '\hyphenation' =================== Synopsis: \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO} - The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a -`-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. + The '\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a +'-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are -tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples (the +tried. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples (the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words): @@ -2494,7 +2497,7 @@ words):  File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking -10.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' +10.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak' ================================== Synopses: @@ -2502,8 +2505,8 @@ Synopses: \linebreak[PRIORITY] \nolinebreak[PRIORITY] - By default, the `\linebreak' (`\nolinebreak') command forces -(prevents) a line break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the + By default, the '\linebreak' ('\nolinebreak') command forces +(prevents) a line break at the current position. For '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin as usual. @@ -2532,10 +2535,10 @@ sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking -11.1 `\cleardoublepage' +11.1 '\cleardoublepage' ======================= -The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all +The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. @@ -2543,43 +2546,43 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand  File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \newpage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking -11.2 `\clearpage' +11.2 '\clearpage' ================= -The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures +The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking -11.3 `\newpage' +11.3 '\newpage' =============== -The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats -(see `\clearpage' above). +The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats +(see '\clearpage' above).  File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Page breaking -11.4 `\enlargethispage' +11.4 '\enlargethispage' ======================= -`\enlargethispage{size}' +'\enlargethispage{size}' - `\enlargethispage*{size}' + '\enlargethispage*{size}' - Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one additional -line. + Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page by the specified +amount; e.g. '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one +additional line. The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page -as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -`\pagebreak'. +as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +'\pagebreak'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking -11.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' +11.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak' ================================== Synopses: @@ -2587,12 +2590,12 @@ Synopses: \pagebreak[PRIORITY] \nopagebreak[PRIORITY] - By default, the `\pagebreak' (`\nopagebreak') command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the + By default, the '\pagebreak' ('\nopagebreak') command forces +(prevents) a page break at the current position. With '\pagebreak', the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. - With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the `\pagebreak' + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the '\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is. @@ -2603,8 +2606,8 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Definitions, Prev: Page breaking, ************ Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with -one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced with -two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands. +one command, the '\footnote' command. They can also be produced with +two commands, the '\footnotemark' and the '\footnotetext' commands. * Menu: @@ -2617,52 +2620,52 @@ two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes -12.1 `\footnote' +12.1 '\footnote' ================ Synopsis: \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT} - The `\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the + The '\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number. This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you -cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures, tables -or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.) +cannot use it in sectioning commands like '\chapter', in figures, tables +or in a 'tabular' environment. (See following sections.)  File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes -12.2 `\footnotemark' +12.2 '\footnotemark' ==================== -With no optional argument, the `\footnotemark' command puts the current +With no optional argument, the '\footnotemark' command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the -`\footnotetext' command. +'\footnotetext' command. This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote with \footnotemark[\value{footnote}] -after the first `\footnote' command. +after the first '\footnote' command.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Symbolic footnotes, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes -12.3 `\footnotetext' +12.3 '\footnotetext' ==================== Synopsis: \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT} - The `\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as -a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the `\footnotemark' -command. The `\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph + The '\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as +a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the '\footnotemark' +command. The '\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph mode. The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number. @@ -2674,14 +2677,14 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Symbolic footnotes, Next: Footnote parameters, Prev ======================= If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing -numbers, redefine `\thefootnote' like this: +numbers, redefine '\thefootnote' like this: \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} - The `\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols + The '\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). If you want to use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also -redefine `\@fnsymbol'. +redefine '\@fnsymbol'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnote parameters, Prev: Symbolic footnotes, Up: Footnotes @@ -2689,18 +2692,18 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnote parameters, Prev: Symbolic footnotes, Up: 12.5 Footnote parameters ======================== -`\footnoterule' +'\footnoterule' Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the - page's footnotes. Default dimensions: `0.4pt' thick (or wide), and - `0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except + page's footnotes. Default dimensions: '0.4pt' thick (or wide), and + '0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except slides, where it does not appear). -`\footnotesep' +'\footnotesep' The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. - By default, this is set to the normal strut for `\footnotesize' + By default, this is set to the normal strut for '\footnotesize' fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no extra space - between footnotes. This is `6.65pt' for `10pt', `7.7pt' for - `11pt', and `8.4pt' for `12pt'. + between footnotes. This is '6.65pt' for '10pt', '7.7pt' for + '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Counters, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Top @@ -2724,10 +2727,10 @@ LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \newcounter, Up: Definitions -13.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' +13.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand' ==================================== -`\newcommand' and `\renewcommand' define and redefine a command, +'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command, respectively. Synopses: \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN} @@ -2736,9 +2739,9 @@ respectively. Synopses: \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{DEFN} CMD - The command name beginning with `\'. For `\newcommand', it must - not be already defined and must not begin with `\end'; for - `\renewcommand', it must already be defined. + The command name beginning with '\'. For '\newcommand', it must + not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'; for + '\renewcommand', it must already be defined. NARGS An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments @@ -2749,27 +2752,27 @@ DEFAULT If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not - specified in the call) is the string `def'. + specified in the call) is the string 'def'. DEFN - The text to be substituted for every occurrence of `cmd'; a - construct of the form `#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the + The text to be substituted for every occurrence of 'cmd'; a + construct of the form '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the Nth argument.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions -13.2 `\newcounter' +13.2 '\newcounter' ================== Synopsis: \newcounter{CNT}[COUNTERNAME] - The `\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new + The '\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new counter is initialized to zero. - Given the optional argument `[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset + Given the optional argument '[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented. *Note Counters::, for more information about counters. @@ -2777,16 +2780,16 @@ whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definitions -13.3 `\newlength' +13.3 '\newlength' ================= Synopsis: \newlength{\ARG} - The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a `length' -command with a value of `0in'. The argument must be a control sequence, -as in `\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if `\foo' is already defined. + The '\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a 'length' +command with a value of '0in'. The argument must be a control sequence, +as in '\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if '\foo' is already defined. *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. @@ -2794,20 +2797,20 @@ and for more information about lengths in general.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definitions -13.4 `\newsavebox' +13.4 '\newsavebox' ================== Synopsis: \newsavebox{CMD} - Defines `\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to + Defines '\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions -13.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' +13.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment' ============================================ Synopses: @@ -2817,12 +2820,12 @@ Synopses: \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF} These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is, -`\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'. +'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'. ENV - The name of the environment. For `\newenvironment', ENV must not - be an existing environment, and the command `\ENV' must be - undefined. For `\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an + The name of the environment. For '\newenvironment', ENV must not + be an existing environment, and the command '\ENV' must be + undefined. For '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an existing environment. NARGS @@ -2834,18 +2837,18 @@ DEFAULT gives the default value for that argument. BEGDEF - The text expanded at every occurrence of `\begin{ENV}'; a construct - of the form `#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth + The text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a construct + of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth argument. ENDDEF - The text expanded at every occurrence of `\end{ENV}'. It may not + The text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'. It may not contain any argument parameters.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions -13.6 `\newtheorem' +13.6 '\newtheorem' ================== \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN] @@ -2859,7 +2862,7 @@ NEWENV LABEL The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the - number. For example, `Theorem'. + number. For example, 'Theorem'. NUMBERED_LIKE (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like @@ -2876,43 +2879,43 @@ WITHIN  File: latex2e.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions -13.7 `\newfont' +13.7 '\newfont' =============== Synopsis: \newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME} - Defines a control sequence `\CMD', which must not already be defined, + Defines a control sequence '\CMD', which must not already be defined, to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on the system -is named `FONTNAME.tfm'. +is named 'FONTNAME.tfm'. This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. -More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files. +More commonly, fonts are defined in families through '.fd' files.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \protect, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definitions -13.8 `\protect' +13.8 '\protect' =============== Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be preceded -by `\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments -must have their own `\protect'. +by '\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments +must have their own '\protect'. - Some examples of moving arguments are `\caption' (*note figure::), -`\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in `tabular' and `array' + Some examples of moving arguments are '\caption' (*note figure::), +'\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in 'tabular' and 'array' environments (*note tabular::). Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not be -preceded by `\protect'. +preceded by '\protect'. See also: -`http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html' -`http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect' +'http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html' +'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect'  File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top @@ -2920,9 +2923,9 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: To 14 Counters *********** -Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The +Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or -command that produces the number, except with no `\'. (`enumi'-`enumiv' +command that produces the number, except with no '\'. ('enumi'-'enumiv' are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering. @@ -2946,63 +2949,62 @@ counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Counters -14.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters +14.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters ===================================================================== All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for -instance, `\alph{enumi}'. +instance, '\alph{enumi}'. -`\alph' - prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ... +'\alph' + prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ... -`\Alph' - uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ... +'\Alph' + uses uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ... -`\arabic' - uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', ... +'\arabic' + uses Arabic numbers: '1', '2', ... -`\roman' - uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ... +'\roman' + uses lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ... -`\roman' - uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ... +'\roman' + uses uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ... -`\fnsymbol' +'\fnsymbol' prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of COUNTER must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: - asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger  File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters -14.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' +14.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}' =========================== Synopsis: \usecounter{COUNTER} - The `\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the -`list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list + The '\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the +'list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list items.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters -14.3 `\value{COUNTER}' +14.3 '\value{COUNTER}' ====================== Synopsis: \value{COUNTER} - The `\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used + The '\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: \setcounter{myctr}{3} @@ -3012,56 +3014,56 @@ anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example:  File: latex2e.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \addtocounter, Prev: \value, Up: Counters -14.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +14.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' ================================== Synopsis: \setcounter{\COUNTER}{VALUE} - The `\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE + The '\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE argument.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters -14.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +14.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' ==================================== -The `\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified +The '\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters -14.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' +14.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' =============================== -The `\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as `\stepcounter' -*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value to -be the result of `\thecounter'. +The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter' +*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current '\ref' value to +be the result of '\thecounter'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day \month \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters -14.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' +14.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}' ============================ -The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary +The '\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary counters.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \day \month \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters -14.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters +14.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters ============================================= -LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month of -the year (`\month', 1-12), and year (`\year', Common Era). When TeX +LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month ('\day', 1-31), month of +the year ('\month', 1-12), and year ('\year', Common Era). When TeX starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. - The related command `\today' produces a string representing the + The related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day (*note \today::).  @@ -3070,7 +3072,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Making paragraphs, Prev: Counters, 15 Lengths ********** -A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length +A 'length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument. * Menu: @@ -3085,12 +3087,12 @@ as an argument.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Up: Lengths -15.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' +15.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' ============================== -The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can -be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (`in'), -millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc. +The '\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can +be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches ('in'), +millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big points ('bp', etc.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths @@ -3098,38 +3100,38 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, 15.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} =============================== -The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the +The '\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths -15.3 `\settodepth' +15.3 '\settodepth' ================== -`\settodepth{\gnat}{text}' +'\settodepth{\gnat}{text}' - The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal -to the depth of the `text' argument. + The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal +to the depth of the 'text' argument.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths -15.4 `\settoheight' +15.4 '\settoheight' =================== -`\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' +'\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' - The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command equal -to the height of the `text' argument. + The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal +to the height of the 'text' argument.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths -15.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' +15.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' ============================== -The `\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the +The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the width of the TEXT argument.  @@ -3138,20 +3140,21 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths 15.6 Predefined lengths ======================= -`\width' +'\width' - `\height' + '\height' - `\depth' + '\depth' - `\totalheight' + '\totalheight' These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the -box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width etc. -of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' + `\depth'. To -make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say +box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width, +etc., of the text in the box. '\totalheight' equals '\height' + +'\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural +size, e.g., say - `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}' + '\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}'  File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengths, Up: Top @@ -3160,7 +3163,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengt ******************** A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not -containing even a `%'. A blank line should not appear where a new +containing even a '%'. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning command. @@ -3174,35 +3177,35 @@ a sectioning command.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs -16.1 `\indent' +16.1 '\indent' ============== -`\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of -the `\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used +'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of +the '\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed. - The default value for `\parindent' is `1em' in two-column mode, -otherwise `15pt' for `10pt' documents, `17pt' for `11pt', and `1.5em' -for `12pt'. + The default value for '\parindent' is '1em' in two-column mode, +otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' +for '12pt'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \parskip, Prev: \indent, Up: Making paragraphs -16.2 `\noindent' +16.2 '\noindent' ================ -When used at the beginning of the paragraph, `\noindent' suppresses any +When used at the beginning of the paragraph, '\noindent' suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \parskip, Next: Marginal notes, Prev: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs -16.3 `\parskip' +16.3 '\parskip' =============== -`\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before -each paragraph. The default is `0pt plus1pt'. +'\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before +each paragraph. The default is '0pt plus1pt'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Marginal notes, Prev: \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs @@ -3214,44 +3217,42 @@ Synopsis: \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT} - The `\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin. The first + The '\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text -where the `\marginpar' occurs. +where the '\marginpar' occurs. When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be placed * in the right margin for one-sided layout; - * in the outside margin for two-sided layout; - * in the nearest margin for two-column layout. - The command `\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in -the opposite (inside) margin. `\normalmarginpar' places them in the + The command '\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in +the opposite (inside) margin. '\normalmarginpar' places them in the default position. When you specify both arguments, LEFT is used for the left margin, and RIGHT is used for the right margin. The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation there by beginning the node with `\hspace{0pt}'. +hyphenation there by beginning the node with '\hspace{0pt}'. These parameters affect the formatting of the note: -`\marginparpush' - Minimum vertical space between notes; default `7pt' for `12pt' - documents, `5pt' else. +'\marginparpush' + Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt' + documents, '5pt' else. -`\marginparsep' - Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default `11pt' - for `10pt' documents, `10pt' else. +'\marginparsep' + Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt' + for '10pt' documents, '10pt' else. -`\marginparwidth' - Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided `10pt' document - is `90pt', `83pt' for `11pt', and `68pt' for `12pt'; `17pt' more in +'\marginparwidth' + Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided '10pt' document + is '90pt', '83pt' for '11pt', and '68pt' for '12pt'; '17pt' more in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the - default is `48pt'. + default is '48pt'. The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes from falling off the bottom of the page. @@ -3264,36 +3265,34 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Math formulas, Next: Modes, Prev: Making paragraphs There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: -`math' +'math' For formulas that appear right in the text. - -`displaymath' +'displaymath' For formulas that appear on their own line. - -`equation' +'equation' The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation number in the right margin. - The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but -the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in -paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so + The 'math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but +the 'displaymath' and 'equation' environments can be used only in +paragraph mode. The 'math' and 'displaymath' environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} - In fact, the `math' environment is so common that it has an even + In fact, the 'math' environment is so common that it has an even shorter form: $ ... $ instead of \(...\) - The `\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a + The '\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used _outside_ of math mode. Conversely, the -`\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too +'\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used _outside_ of math mode. - The `\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the -formula to be that of `displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below + The '\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the +formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ @@ -3313,7 +3312,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Subscripts & superscripts, Next: Math symbols, Up: ============================== To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type -`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type `^{'exp`}'. +'_{'exp'}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type '^{'exp'}'. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript. @@ -3324,637 +3323,637 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscript 17.2 Math symbols ================= -LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The -commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For -example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi +LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. +The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For +example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi symbol (\pi) in your output. -`\|' +'\|' \| -`\aleph' +'\aleph' \aleph -`\alpha' +'\alpha' \alpha -`\amalg' +'\amalg' \amalg (binary operation) -`\angle' +'\angle' \angle -`\approx' +'\approx' \approx (relation) -`\ast' +'\ast' \ast (binary operation) -`\asymp' +'\asymp' \asymp (relation) -`\backslash' +'\backslash' \ (delimiter) -`\beta' +'\beta' \beta -`\bigcap' +'\bigcap' \bigcap -`\bigcirc' +'\bigcirc' \bigcirc (binary operation) -`\bigcup' +'\bigcup' \bigcup -`\bigodot' +'\bigodot' \bigodot -`\bigoplus' +'\bigoplus' \bigoplus -`\bigotimes' +'\bigotimes' \bigotimes -`\bigtriangledown' +'\bigtriangledown' \bigtriangledown (binary operation) -`\bigtriangleup' +'\bigtriangleup' \bigtriangleup (binary operation) -`\bigsqcup' +'\bigsqcup' \bigsqcup -`\biguplus' +'\biguplus' \biguplus -`\bigcap' +'\bigcap' \bigvee -`\bigwedge' +'\bigwedge' \bigwedge -`\bot' +'\bot' \bot -`\bowtie' +'\bowtie' \bowtie (relation) -`\Box' +'\Box' (square open box symbol) -`\bullet' +'\bullet' \bullet (binary operation) -`\cap' +'\cap' \cap (binary operation) -`\cdot' +'\cdot' \cdot (binary operation) -`\chi' +'\chi' \chi -`\circ' +'\circ' \circ (binary operation) -`\clubsuit' +'\clubsuit' \clubsuit -`\cong' +'\cong' \cong (relation) -`\coprod' +'\coprod' \coprod -`\cup' +'\cup' \cup (binary operation) -`\dagger' +'\dagger' \dagger (binary operation) -`\dashv' +'\dashv' \dashv (relation) -`\ddagger' +'\ddagger' \dagger (binary operation) -`\Delta' +'\Delta' \Delta -`\delta' +'\delta' \delta -`\Diamond' +'\Diamond' bigger \diamond -`\diamond' +'\diamond' \diamond (binary operation) -`\diamondsuit' +'\diamondsuit' \diamondsuit -`\div' +'\div' \div (binary operation) -`\doteq' +'\doteq' \doteq (relation) -`\downarrow' +'\downarrow' \downarrow (delimiter) -`\Downarrow' +'\Downarrow' \Downarrow (delimiter) -`\ell' +'\ell' \ell -`\emptyset' +'\emptyset' \emptyset -`\epsilon' +'\epsilon' \epsilon -`\equiv' +'\equiv' \equiv (relation) -`\eta' +'\eta' \eta -`\exists' +'\exists' \exists -`\flat' +'\flat' \flat -`\forall' +'\forall' \forall -`\frown' +'\frown' \frown (relation) -`\Gamma' +'\Gamma' \Gamma -`\gamma' +'\gamma' \gamma -`\ge' +'\ge' \ge -`\geq' +'\geq' \geq (relation) -`\gets' +'\gets' \gets -`\gg' +'\gg' \gg (relation) -`\hbar' +'\hbar' \hbar -`\heartsuit' +'\heartsuit' \heartsuit -`\hookleftarrow' +'\hookleftarrow' \hookleftarrow -`\hookrightarrow' +'\hookrightarrow' \hookrightarrow -`\iff' +'\iff' \iff -`\Im' +'\Im' \Im -`\in' +'\in' \in (relation) -`\infty' +'\infty' \infty -`\int' +'\int' \int -`\iota' +'\iota' \iota -`\Join' +'\Join' condensed bowtie symbol (relation) -`\kappa' +'\kappa' \kappa -`\Lambda' +'\Lambda' \Lambda -`\lambda' +'\lambda' \lambda -`\land' +'\land' \land -`\langle' +'\langle' \langle (delimiter) -`\lbrace' +'\lbrace' \lbrace (delimiter) -`\lbrack' +'\lbrack' \lbrack (delimiter) -`\lceil' +'\lceil' \lceil (delimiter) -`\le' +'\le' \le -`\leadsto' +'\leadsto' -`\Leftarrow' +'\Leftarrow' \Leftarrow -`\leftarrow' +'\leftarrow' \leftarrow -`\leftharpoondown' +'\leftharpoondown' \leftharpoondown -`\leftharpoonup' +'\leftharpoonup' \leftharpoonup -`\Leftrightarrow' +'\Leftrightarrow' \Leftrightarrow -`\leftrightarrow' +'\leftrightarrow' \leftrightarrow -`\leq' +'\leq' \leq (relation) -`\lfloor' +'\lfloor' \lfloor (delimiter) -`\lhd' +'\lhd' (left-pointing arrow head) -`\ll' +'\ll' \ll (relation) -`\lnot' +'\lnot' \lnot -`\longleftarrow' +'\longleftarrow' \longleftarrow -`\longleftrightarrow' +'\longleftrightarrow' \longleftrightarrow -`\longmapsto' +'\longmapsto' \longmapsto -`\longrightarrow' +'\longrightarrow' \longrightarrow -`\lor' +'\lor' \lor -`\mapsto' +'\mapsto' \mapsto -`\mho' +'\mho' -`\mid' +'\mid' \mid (relation) -`\models' +'\models' \models (relation) -`\mp' +'\mp' \mp (binary operation) -`\mu' +'\mu' \mu -`\nabla' +'\nabla' \nabla -`\natural' +'\natural' \natural -`\ne' +'\ne' \ne -`\nearrow' +'\nearrow' \nearrow -`\neg' +'\neg' \neg -`\neq' +'\neq' \neq (relation) -`\ni' +'\ni' \ni (relation) -`\not' +'\not' Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. -`\notin' +'\notin' \ni -`\nu' +'\nu' \nu -`\nwarrow' +'\nwarrow' \nwarrow -`\odot' +'\odot' \odot (binary operation) -`\oint' +'\oint' \oint -`\Omega' +'\Omega' \Omega -`\omega' +'\omega' \omega -`\ominus' +'\ominus' \ominus (binary operation) -`\oplus' +'\oplus' \oplus (binary operation) -`\oslash' +'\oslash' \oslash (binary operation) -`\otimes' +'\otimes' \otimes (binary operation) -`\owns' +'\owns' \owns -`\parallel' +'\parallel' \parallel (relation) -`\partial' +'\partial' \partial -`\perp' +'\perp' \perp (relation) -`\phi' +'\phi' \phi -`\Pi' +'\Pi' \Pi -`\pi' +'\pi' \pi -`\pm' +'\pm' \pm (binary operation) -`\prec' +'\prec' \prec (relation) -`\preceq' +'\preceq' \preceq (relation) -`\prime' +'\prime' \prime -`\prod' +'\prod' \prod -`\propto' +'\propto' \propto (relation) -`\Psi' +'\Psi' \Psi -`\psi' +'\psi' \psi -`\rangle' +'\rangle' \rangle (delimiter) -`\rbrace' +'\rbrace' \rbrace (delimiter) -`\rbrack' +'\rbrack' \rbrack (delimiter) -`\rceil' +'\rceil' \rceil (delimiter) -`\Re' +'\Re' \Re -`\rfloor' +'\rfloor' \rfloor -`\rhd' +'\rhd' (binary operation) -`\rho' +'\rho' \rho -`\Rightarrow' +'\Rightarrow' \Rightarrow -`\rightarrow' +'\rightarrow' \rightarrow -`\rightharpoondown' +'\rightharpoondown' \rightharpoondown -`\rightharpoonup' +'\rightharpoonup' \rightharpoonup -`\rightleftharpoons' +'\rightleftharpoons' \rightleftharpoons -`\searrow' +'\searrow' \searrow -`\setminus' +'\setminus' \setminus (binary operation) -`\sharp' +'\sharp' \sharp -`\Sigma' +'\Sigma' \Sigma -`\sigma' +'\sigma' \sigma -`\sim' +'\sim' \sim (relation) -`\simeq' +'\simeq' \simeq (relation) -`\smallint' +'\smallint' \smallint -`\smile' +'\smile' \smile (relation) -`\spadesuit' +'\spadesuit' \spadesuit -`\sqcap' +'\sqcap' \sqcap (binary operation) -`\sqcup' +'\sqcup' \sqcup (binary operation) -`\sqsubset' +'\sqsubset' (relation) -`\sqsubseteq' +'\sqsubseteq' \sqsubseteq (relation) -`\sqsupset' +'\sqsupset' (relation) -`\sqsupseteq' +'\sqsupseteq' \sqsupseteq (relation) -`\star' +'\star' \star (binary operation) -`\subset' +'\subset' \subset (relation) -`\subseteq' +'\subseteq' \subseteq (relation) -`\succ' +'\succ' \succ (relation) -`\succeq' +'\succeq' \succeq (relation) -`\sum' +'\sum' \sum -`\supset' +'\supset' \supset (relation) -`\supseteq' +'\supseteq' \supseteq (relation) -`\surd' +'\surd' \surd -`\swarrow' +'\swarrow' \swarrow -`\tau' +'\tau' \tau -`\theta' +'\theta' \theta -`\times' +'\times' \times (binary operation) -`\to' +'\to' \to -`\top' +'\top' \top -`\triangle' +'\triangle' \triangle -`\triangleleft' +'\triangleleft' \triangleleft (binary operation) -`\triangleright' +'\triangleright' \triangleright (binary operation) -`\unlhd' +'\unlhd' left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -`\unrhd' +'\unrhd' right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -`\Uparrow' +'\Uparrow' \Uparrow (delimiter) -`\uparrow' +'\uparrow' \uparrow (delimiter) -`\Updownarrow' +'\Updownarrow' \Updownarrow (delimiter) -`\updownarrow' +'\updownarrow' \updownarrow (delimiter) -`\uplus' +'\uplus' \uplus (binary operation) -`\Upsilon' +'\Upsilon' \Upsilon -`\upsilon' +'\upsilon' \upsilon -`\varepsilon' +'\varepsilon' \varepsilon -`\varphi' +'\varphi' \varphi -`\varpi' +'\varpi' \varpi -`\varrho' +'\varrho' \varrho -`\varsigma' +'\varsigma' \varsigma -`\vartheta' +'\vartheta' \vartheta -`\vdash' +'\vdash' \vdash (relation) -`\vee' +'\vee' \vee (binary operation) -`\Vert' +'\Vert' \Vert (delimiter) -`\vert' +'\vert' \vert (delimiter) -`\wedge' +'\wedge' \wedge (binary operation) -`\wp' +'\wp' \wp -`\wr' +'\wr' \wr (binary operation) -`\Xi' +'\Xi' \Xi -`\xi' +'\xi' \xi -`\zeta' +'\zeta' \zeta  @@ -3966,106 +3965,106 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Math functions, Next: Math accents, Prev: Math symb These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. -`\arccos' +'\arccos' \arccos -`\arcsin' +'\arcsin' \arcsin -`\arctan' +'\arctan' \arctan -`\arg' +'\arg' \arg -`\bmod' +'\bmod' Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) -`\cos' +'\cos' \cos -`\cosh' +'\cosh' \cosh -`\cot' +'\cot' \cos -`\coth' +'\coth' \cosh -`\csc' +'\csc' \csc -`\deg' +'\deg' \deg -`\det' +'\det' \deg -`\dim' +'\dim' \dim -`\exp' +'\exp' \exp -`\gcd' +'\gcd' \gcd -`\hom' +'\hom' \hom -`\inf' +'\inf' \inf -`\ker' +'\ker' \ker -`\lg' +'\lg' \lg -`\lim' +'\lim' \lim -`\liminf' +'\liminf' \liminf -`\limsup' +'\limsup' \limsup -`\ln' +'\ln' \ln -`\log' +'\log' \log -`\max' +'\max' \max -`\min' +'\min' \min -`\pmod' +'\pmod' parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) -`\Pr' +'\Pr' \Pr -`\sec' +'\sec' \sec -`\sin' +'\sin' \sin -`\sinh' +'\sinh' \sinh -`\sup' +'\sup' \sup -`\tan' +'\tan' \tan -`\tanh' +'\tanh' \tanh  @@ -4078,46 +4077,49 @@ LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note Accents::). -`\acute' +'\acute' Math acute accent: \acute{x}. -`\bar' +'\bar' Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. -`\breve' +'\breve' Math breve accent: \breve{x}. -`\check' +'\check' Math ha'c' +'\:' +'\>' Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). - -`\,' +'\,' A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. - -`\!' +'\!' A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad).  @@ -4150,51 +4149,51 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Math miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Ma 17.6 Math miscellany ==================== -`\*' +'\*' A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. -`\cdots' +'\cdots' A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. -`\ddots' +'\ddots' A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. -`\frac{num}{den}' - Produces the fraction `num' divided by `den'. +'\frac{num}{den}' + Produces the fraction 'num' divided by 'den'. -`\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2' - The two delimiters need not match; `.' acts as a null delimiter, +'\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2' + The two delimiters need not match; '.' acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the - math in between. Example: `\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'. + math in between. Example: '\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'. -`\overbrace{TEXT}' +'\overbrace{TEXT}' Generates a brace over TEXT. For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}. -`\overline{TEXT}' +'\overline{TEXT}' Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For exampe, \overline{x+y}. -`\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}' +'\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}' Produces the representation of the square root of ARG. The optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce. For - example, the cube root of `x+y' would be typed as - `$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'. + example, the cube root of 'x+y' would be typed as + '$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'. -`\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}' +'\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}' Puts TEXT above RELATION. For example, - `\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'. + '\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'. -`\underbrace{math}' +'\underbrace{math}' Generates MATH with a brace underneath. -`\underline{text}' +'\underline{text}' Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. -`\vdots' +'\vdots' Produces a vertical ellipsis.  @@ -4207,9 +4206,7 @@ When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: * Paragraph mode - * Math mode - * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a @@ -4224,16 +4221,16 @@ it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. -Even if you put a hundred words into an `\mbox', LaTeX would keep +Even if you put a hundred words into an '\mbox', LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line. - LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an `\mbox' + LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an '\mbox' command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box. There are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of -these commands or environments will be called a `parbox'. When LaTeX is +these commands or environments will be called a 'parbox'. When LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is called "outer paragraph mode". @@ -4244,7 +4241,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Page styles, Next: Spaces, Prev: Modes, Up: Top 19 Page styles ************** -The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the +The '\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. * Menu: @@ -4257,36 +4254,36 @@ page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles -19.1 `\maketitle' +19.1 '\maketitle' ================= -The `\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title -page--except in the `article' class, where the title is placed at the +The '\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title +page--except in the 'article' class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations: -`\author{NAME \and NAME2}' - The `\author' command declares the document author(s), where the - argument is a list of authors separated by `\and' commands. Use - `\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for example, +'\author{NAME \and NAME2}' + The '\author' command declares the document author(s), where the + argument is a list of authors separated by '\and' commands. Use + '\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for example, to give the author's institution or address. -`\date{TEXT}' - The `\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date. With - no `\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used. +'\date{TEXT}' + The '\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date. With + no '\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used. -`\thanks{TEXT}' - The `\thanks' command produces a `\footnote' to the title, usually +'\thanks{TEXT}' + The '\thanks' command produces a '\footnote' to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. -`\title{TEXT}' - The `\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document. - Use `\\' to force a line break, as usual. +'\title{TEXT}' + The '\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document. + Use '\\' to force a line break, as usual.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page styles -19.2 `\pagenumbering' +19.2 '\pagenumbering' ===================== Synopsis: @@ -4295,68 +4292,64 @@ Synopsis: Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE: -`arabic' +'arabic' arabic numerals - -`roman' +'roman' lowercase Roman numerals - -`Roman' +'Roman' uppercase Roman numerals - -`alph' +'alph' lowercase letters - -`Alph' +'Alph' uppercase letters  File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles -19.3 `\pagestyle' +19.3 '\pagestyle' ================= Synopsis: \pagestyle{STYLE} - The `\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are + The '\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for STYLE: -`plain' +'plain' Just a plain page number. -`empty' +'empty' Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. -`headings' +'headings' Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what goes in the headers. -`myheadings' - Custom headers, specified via the `\markboth' or the `\markright' +'myheadings' + Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright' commands. - Here are the descriptions of `\markboth' and `\markright': + Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright': -`\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}' +'\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}' Sets both the left and the right heading. A "left-hand heading" - (LEFT) is generated by the last `\markboth' command before the end + (LEFT) is generated by the last '\markboth' command before the end of the page, while a "right-hand heading" (RIGHT is generated by - the first `\markboth' or `\markright' that comes on the page if + the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. -`\markright{RIGHT}' +'\markright{RIGHT}' Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page styles -19.4 `\thispagestyle{STYLE}' +19.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}' ============================ -The `\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the -`\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to +The '\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the +'\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to STYLE for the current page only.  @@ -4367,9 +4360,9 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Spaces, Next: Boxes, Prev: Page styles, Up: Top LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. - Another space-producing command is `\,' to produce a "thin" space + Another space-producing command is '\,' to produce a "thin" space (usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often -useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::). +useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::). * Menu: @@ -4392,81 +4385,81 @@ Vertical space  File: latex2e.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \hfill, Up: Spaces -20.1 `\hspace' +20.1 '\hspace' ============== Synopsis: \hspace[*]{LENGTH} - The `\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument can + The '\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space -with an `\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing. +with an '\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing. LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning -or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional `*' form. +or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional '*' form.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \SPACE, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces -20.2 `\hfill' +20.2 '\hfill' ============= -The `\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no +The '\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. - The `\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the -glue value `0pt plus1fill'); thus, `\hspace\fill' is equivalent to -`\hfill'. + The '\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the +glue value '0pt plus1fill'); thus, '\hspace\fill' is equivalent to +'\hfill'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \SPACE, Next: \AT, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces -20.3 `\SPACE' +20.3 '\SPACE' ============= -The `\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful -after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example `Knuth's +The '\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful +after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example 'Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is also often -used after control sequences, as in `\TeX\ is a nice system.' +used after control sequences, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.' - In normal circumstances, `\' and `\' are equivalent to -`\ '. + In normal circumstances, '\' and '\' are equivalent to +'\ '.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \AT, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \SPACE, Up: Spaces -20.4 `\@' +20.4 '\@' ========= -The `\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a +The '\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a -capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without `\@': +capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without '\@': - ... in C\@. Pascal, though ... - ... in C. Pascal, though ... + ... in C\@. Pascal, though ... + ... in C. Pascal, though ... produces - ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ... + ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ...  File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace, Next: \/, Prev: \AT, Up: Spaces -20.5 `\thinspace' +20.5 '\thinspace' ================= -`\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 +'\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in '".  File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \thinspace, Up: Spaces -20.6 `\/' +20.6 '\/' ========= -The `\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space +The '\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character typically has a large italic correction value. @@ -4474,93 +4467,93 @@ typically has a large italic correction value. If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as -normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the `f's +normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the 'f's are nicely separated) with f: f;. Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic correction. Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space -after the `f') with pdfTeX. +after the 'f') with pdfTeX.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \dotfill, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces -20.7 `\hrulefill' +20.7 '\hrulefill' ================= -The `\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can +The '\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces -20.8 `\dotfill' +20.8 '\dotfill' =============== -The `\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots +The '\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots instead of just white space.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Spaces -20.9 `\addvspace' +20.9 '\addvspace' ================= -`\addvspace{length}' +'\addvspace{length}' - The `\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height + The '\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same -point in the output by a previous `\addvspace' command, then this +point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command, then this command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length -of the total vertical space equal to `length'. +of the total vertical space equal to 'length'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Spaces -20.10 `\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' +20.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip' ==================================== These commands produce a given amount of space. -`\bigskip' - The same as `\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line +'\bigskip' + The same as '\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line space (with stretch and shrink). -`\medskip' - The same as `\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a +'\medskip' + The same as '\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink). -`\smallskip' - The same as `\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter +'\smallskip' + The same as '\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink). - The `\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class. + The '\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Spaces -20.11 `\vfill' +20.11 '\vfill' ============== -The `\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can +The '\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to -`\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::). +'\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces -20.12 `\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' +20.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}' ========================== Synopsis: \vspace[*]{LENGTH} - The `\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber + The '\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber length. LENGTH can be negative or positive. - Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by `\vspace' at the -top or bottom of a page. With the optional `*' argument, the space is + Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by '\vspace' at the +top or bottom of a page. With the optional '*' argument, the space is not removed.  @@ -4587,17 +4580,17 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \mbox, Next: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes -21.1 `\mbox{TEXT}' +21.1 '\mbox{TEXT}' ================== -The `\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text +The '\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \fbox and \framebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \mbox, Up: Boxes -21.2 `\fbox' and `\framebox' +21.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox' ============================ Synopses: @@ -4605,86 +4598,82 @@ Synopses: \fbox{TEXT} \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT} - The `\fbox' and `\framebox' commands are like `\mbox', except that + The '\fbox' and '\framebox' commands are like '\mbox', except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. - In addition, the `\framebox' command allows for explicit + In addition, the '\framebox' command allows for explicit specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument. - Both commands produce a rule of thickness `\fboxrule' (default -`.4pt'), and leave a space of `\fboxsep' (default `3pt') between the + Both commands produce a rule of thickness '\fboxrule' (default +'.4pt'), and leave a space of '\fboxsep' (default '3pt') between the rule and the contents of the box. - *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the `\framebox' command in the -`picture' environment. + *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the '\framebox' command in the +'picture' environment.  File: latex2e.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \makebox, Prev: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes -21.3 `lrbox' +21.3 'lrbox' ============ -`\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}' +'\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}' - This is the environment form of `\sbox'. + This is the environment form of '\sbox'. - The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which must -have been declared with `\newsavebox'. + The text inside the environment is saved in the box 'cmd', which must +have been declared with '\newsavebox'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Boxes -21.4 `\makebox' +21.4 '\makebox' =============== Synopsis: \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT} - The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the + The '\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional WIDTH argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values: -`c' +'c' Centered (default). - -`l' +'l' Flush left. - -`r' +'r' Flush right. - -`s' +'s' Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain stretchable space for this to work. - `\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox + '\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox (picture)::.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Boxes -21.5 `\parbox' +21.5 '\parbox' ============== Synopsis: \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT} - The `\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in -`paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, + The '\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in +'paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any -paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For larger +paragraph-making environments inside a '\parbox' argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making -environment, you should use a `minipage' environment (*note minipage::). +environment, you should use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::). - `\parbox' has two mandatory arguments: + '\parbox' has two mandatory arguments: WIDTH the width of the parbox; - TEXT the text that goes inside the parbox. @@ -4697,30 +4686,27 @@ bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text The INNER-POS argument controls the placement of the text inside the box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used. -`t' +'t' text is placed at the top of the box. - -`c' +'c' text is centered in the box. - -`b' +'b' text is placed at the bottom of the box. - -`s' +'s' stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space for this to work.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \savebox, Prev: \parbox, Up: Boxes -21.6 `\raisebox' +21.6 '\raisebox' ================ Synopsis: \raisebox{distance}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{text} - The `\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory + The '\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative amount). TEXT itself is processed in LR mode. @@ -4732,45 +4718,45 @@ depth.  File: latex2e.info, Node: \savebox, Next: \sbox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Boxes -21.7 `\savebox' +21.7 '\savebox' =============== Synopsis: \savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT} - This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with `\makebox' (*note + This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with '\makebox' (*note \makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with -`\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). +'\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: \sbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \savebox, Up: Boxes -21.8 `\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' +21.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}' =========================== Synopsis: \sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT} - `\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with `\mbox' (*note \mbox::) + '\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with '\mbox' (*note \mbox::) except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD. \BOXCMD must have been -previously declared with `\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). +previously declared with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: \sbox, Up: Boxes -21.9 `\usebox{\BOXCMD' +21.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD' ====================== Synopsis: \usebox{\BOXCMD} - `\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by a -`\savebox' command (*note \savebox::). + '\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by a +'\savebox' command (*note \savebox::).  File: latex2e.info, Node: Special insertions, Next: Splitting the input, Prev: Boxes, Up: Top @@ -4803,26 +4789,26 @@ The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as -itself, include a `\' in front of the character. For example, `\$' will -produce `$' in your output. +itself, include a '\' in front of the character. For example, '\$' will +produce '$' in your output. - One exception to this rule is `\' itself, because `\\' has its own + One exception to this rule is '\' itself, because '\\' has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing -`$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter `\' is produced by using -`\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::). +'$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter '\' is produced by using +'\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::). - Also, `\~' and `\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the + Also, '\~' and '\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a standalone -`~' or `^', you can again use a verbatim command. +'~' or '^', you can again use a verbatim command. Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you -know its number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the visible -space character used in the `\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so -it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'. +know its number by using the '\symbol' command. For example, the +visible space character used in the '\verb*' command has the code +decimal 32, so it can be typed as '\symbol{32}'. - You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers -with `"', so the previous example could also be written as -`\symbol{'40}' or `\symbol{"20}'. + You can also specify octal numbers with ''' or hexadecimal numbers +with '"', so the previous example could also be written as +'\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.  File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions @@ -4832,173 +4818,173 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Reserved charact LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not -available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package. +available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package. -`\copyright' -`\textcopyright' +'\copyright' +'\textcopyright' The copyright symbol, (C). -`\dag' +'\dag' The dagger symbol (in text). -`\ddag' +'\ddag' The double dagger symbol (in text). -`\LaTeX' +'\LaTeX' The LaTeX logo. -`\guillemotleft (<<)' -`\guillemotright (>>)' -`\guilsinglleft (<)' -`\guilsinglright (>)' +'\guillemotleft (<<)' +'\guillemotright (>>)' +'\guilsinglleft (<)' +'\guilsinglright (>)' Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: <<, >>, <, >. -`\ldots' -`\dots' -`\textellipsis' - An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. `\ldots' and - `\dots' also work in math mode. +'\ldots' +'\dots' +'\textellipsis' + An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '...'. '\ldots' and + '\dots' also work in math mode. -`\lq' - Left (opening) quote: `. +'\lq' + Left (opening) quote: '. -`\P' -`\textparagraph' +'\P' +'\textparagraph' Paragraph sign (pilcrow). -`\pounds' -`\textsterling' +'\pounds' +'\textsterling' English pounds sterling: #. -`\quotedblbase (,,)' -`\quotesinglbase (,)' +'\quotedblbase (,,)' +'\quotesinglbase (,)' Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: ,, and ,. -`\rq' +'\rq' Right (closing) quote: '. -`\S' +'\S' Section symbol. -`\TeX' +'\TeX' The TeX logo. -`\textasciicircum' +'\textasciicircum' ASCII circumflex: ^. -`\textasciitilde' +'\textasciitilde' ASCII tilde: ~. -`\textasteriskcentered' +'\textasteriskcentered' Centered asterisk: *. -`\textbackslash' +'\textbackslash' Backslash: \. -`\textbar' +'\textbar' Vertical bar: |. -`\textbardbl' +'\textbardbl' Double vertical bar. -`\textbigcircle' +'\textbigcircle' Big circle symbol. -`\textbraceleft' +'\textbraceleft' Left brace: {. -`\textbraceright' +'\textbraceright' Right brace: }. -`\textbullet' +'\textbullet' Bullet: *. -`\textcircled{LETTER}' +'\textcircled{LETTER}' LETTER in a circle, as in (R). -`\textcompwordmark' -`\textcapitalwordmark' -`\textascenderwordmark' - Composite word mark (invisible). The `\textcapital...' form has - the cap height of the font, while the `\textascender...' form has +'\textcompwordmark' +'\textcapitalwordmark' +'\textascenderwordmark' + Composite word mark (invisible). The '\textcapital...' form has + the cap height of the font, while the '\textascender...' form has the ascender height. -`\textdagger' +'\textdagger' Dagger: \dag. -`\textdaggerdbl' +'\textdaggerdbl' Double dagger: \ddag. -`\textdollar (or `$')' +'\textdollar (or '$')' Dollar sign: $. -`\textemdash (or `---')' +'\textemdash (or '---')' Em-dash: -- (for punctuation). -`\textendash (or `--')' +'\textendash (or '--')' En-dash: -- (for ranges). -`\texteuro' +'\texteuro' The Euro symbol: Euro. -`\textexclamdown (or `!`')' +'\textexclamdown (or '!`')' Upside down exclamation point: !. -`\textgreater' +'\textgreater' Greater than: >. -`\textless' +'\textless' Less than: <. -`\textleftarrow' +'\textleftarrow' Left arrow. -`\textordfeminine' -`\textordmasculine' +'\textordfeminine' +'\textordmasculine' Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: a, o. -`\textperiodcentered' +'\textperiodcentered' Centered period: \cdot. -`\textquestiondown (or `?`')' +'\textquestiondown (or '?`')' Upside down questionation point: ?. -`\textquotedblleft (or ```')' +'\textquotedblleft (or '``')' Double left quote: ". -`\textquotedblright (or `'')' +'\textquotedblright (or ''')' Double right quote: ". -`\textquoteleft (or ``')' - Single left quote: `. +'\textquoteleft (or '`')' + Single left quote: '. -`\textquoteright (or `'')' +'\textquoteright (or ''')' Single right quote: '. -`\textquotestraightbase' -`\textquotestraightdblbase' +'\textquotestraightbase' +'\textquotestraightdblbase' Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. -`\textregistered' +'\textregistered' Registered symbol: (R). -`\textrightarrow' +'\textrightarrow' Right arrow. -`\textthreequartersemdash' +'\textthreequartersemdash' "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. -`\texttrademark' +'\texttrademark' Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}. -`\texttwelveudash' +'\texttwelveudash' "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. -`\textunderscore' +'\textunderscore' Underscore: _. -`\textvisiblespace' +'\textvisiblespace' Visible space symbol.  @@ -5008,95 +4994,95 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Accents, Next: Non-English characters, Prev: Text s ============ LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, -through the `babel' package and related support. This section does not +through the 'babel' package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. - The `\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with + The '\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. -`\"' -`\capitaldieresis' +'\"' +'\capitaldieresis' Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o". -`\'' -`\capitalacute' - Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the `tabbing' environment, +'\'' +'\capitalacute' + Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the 'tabbing' environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note tabbing::). -`\.' +'\.' Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. -`\=' -`\capitalmacron' +'\=' +'\capitalmacron' Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=. -`\^' -`\capitalcircumflex' +'\^' +'\capitalcircumflex' Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^. -`\`' -`\capitalgrave' +'\`' +'\capitalgrave' Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`. In the - `tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin + 'tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin (*note tabbing::). -`\~' -`\capitaltilde' +'\~' +'\capitaltilde' Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~. -`\b' +'\b' Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. -`\c' -`\capitalcedilla' +'\c' +'\capitalcedilla' Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c,. -`\d' -`\capitaldotaccent' +'\d' +'\capitaldotaccent' Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. -`\H' -`\capitalhungarumlaut' +'\H' +'\capitalhungarumlaut' Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. -`\i' - Produces a dotless i, as in `i'. +'\i' + Produces a dotless i, as in 'i'. -`\j' - Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. +'\j' + Produces a dotless j, as in 'j'. -`\k' -`\capitalogonek' - Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in the +'\k' +'\capitalogonek' + Produces a letter with ogonek, as in 'o;'. Not available in the OT1 encoding. -`\r' -`\capitalring' - Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'. +'\r' +'\capitalring' + Produces a ring accent, as in 'o*'. -`\t' -`\capitaltie' -`\newtie' -`\capitalnewtie' - Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The `\newtie' form is +'\t' +'\capitaltie' +'\newtie' +'\capitalnewtie' + Produces a tie-after accent, as in 'oo['. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box. -`\u' -`\capitalbreve' - Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. +'\u' +'\capitalbreve' + Produces a breve accent, as in 'o('. -`\underbar' +'\underbar' Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through - descenders. See also `\underline' in *note Math miscellany::. + descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::. -`\v' -`\capitalcaron' - Produces a ha'c {\small fred} % please use! +\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use! \cs{fred} -> \fred \env{fred} -> \begin{fred} \meta{fred} -> @@ -5822,14 +5808,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others: \sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4 \booktitle{Book of Fred} \end{verbatim} -} For more information, see the ltubguid document at: \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat} +(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references). Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - \bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style \nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty \bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX @@ -5846,35 +5831,28 @@ Concept Index [index] * Menu: -* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 37) -* `*' prompt: Command line. (line 14) -* `.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 7) -* `.idx' file: Indexes. (line 8) -* `.ind' file: Indexes. (line 22) -* `datetime' package: \today. (line 10) -* `float' package: figure. (line 34) -* `makeidx' package: Indexes. (line 27) -* `makeindex' program: Indexes. (line 22) -* `multind' package: Indexes. (line 38) -* `see' and `see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 15) -* `setspace' package: Low-level font commands. - (line 63) -* `showidx' package: Indexes. (line 34) -* `xindy' program: Indexes. (line 22) -* abstracts: abstract. (line 5) -* accents: Accents. (line 5) -* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 5) -* accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters. (line 24) +* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 15) +* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31) +* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 8) +* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 9) +* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 23) +* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 16) +* abstracts: abstract. (line 6) +* accents: Accents. (line 6) +* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 6) +* accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters. (line 25) * acute accent: Accents. (line 20) * acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11) * ae ligature: Non-English characters. (line 15) -* aligning Equations: eqnarray. (line 5) -* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 5) -* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 43) +* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 6) +* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 6) +* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 6) +* amsmath package, replacing 'eqnarray': eqnarray. (line 6) +* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 37) * aring: Non-English characters. (line 11) -* arrays, math: array. (line 5) +* arrays, math: array. (line 6) * arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 128) * arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 160) * ascender height: Text symbols. (line 96) @@ -5889,40 +5867,40 @@ Concept Index * bar-over accent: Accents. (line 29) * bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 14) * bar-under accent: Accents. (line 46) -* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 7) -* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 5) -* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 5) -* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 5) +* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 8) +* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6) +* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6) * big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 79) * black boxes, omitting: Document class options. (line 27) -* bold font: Font styles. (line 84) -* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 17) -* boxes: Boxes. (line 5) +* bold font: Font styles. (line 74) +* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 18) +* boxes: Boxes. (line 6) * brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 82) * brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 85) -* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 5) -* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 5) +* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6) +* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6) * breve accent: Accents. (line 85) * breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 17) -* bug reporting: About this document. (line 11) +* bug reporting: About this document. (line 13) * bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 87) * bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 88) -* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 5) -* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 87) +* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6) +* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 77) * cap height: Text symbols. (line 96) * caron accent: Accents. (line 95) -* case sensitivity of LaTeX: Overview. (line 55) -* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 5) +* case sensitivity of LaTeX: Overview. (line 57) +* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6) * cedilla accent: Accents. (line 50) * centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 67) * centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 135) -* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 5) -* centering text, environment for: center. (line 5) -* characters, accented: Accents. (line 5) +* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6) +* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6) +* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6) * characters, non-English: Non-English characters. - (line 5) -* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 5) + (line 6) +* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6) * check accent: Accents. (line 95) * check accent, math: Math accents. (line 20) * circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 79) @@ -5931,52 +5909,53 @@ Concept Index * circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 32) * circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 61) * class options: Document class options. - (line 5) -* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 5) -* closing letters: \closing. (line 5) + (line 6) +* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 6) +* closing letters: \closing. (line 6) * closing quote: Text symbols. (line 52) -* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 5) -* command line: Command line. (line 5) +* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6) +* command line: Command line. (line 6) * commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 5) + (line 6) * composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 96) -* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 5) +* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6) * copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 12) -* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 5) -* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 5) -* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 5) -* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 5) -* creating letters: Letters. (line 5) -* creating pictures: picture. (line 5) -* creating tables: table. (line 5) +* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6) +* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6) +* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 6) +* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6) +* creating letters: Letters. (line 6) +* creating pictures: picture. (line 6) +* creating tables: table. (line 6) * credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 22) -* cross references: Cross references. (line 5) -* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 5) -* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 5) +* cross references: Cross references. (line 6) +* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 6) +* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 6) * currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 107) * currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 116) * dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 104) * dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 15) * dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 101) * date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 18) +* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 11) * defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 5) + (line 6) * defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 5) -* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 5) -* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 5) -* definitions: Definitions. (line 5) -* description lists, creating: description. (line 5) + (line 6) +* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6) +* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6) +* definitions: Definitions. (line 6) +* description lists, creating: description. (line 6) * dieresis accent: Accents. (line 16) * discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 7) * displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation. - (line 5) + (line 6) * displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote. - (line 5) + (line 6) * document class options: Document class options. - (line 5) -* document classes: Document classes. (line 5) -* document templates: Document templates. (line 5) + (line 6) +* document classes: Document classes. (line 6) +* document templates: Document templates. (line 6) * dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 107) * dot accent: Accents. (line 25) * dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 26) @@ -5996,25 +5975,25 @@ Concept Index * double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 154) * double right quote: Text symbols. (line 144) * double spacing: Low-level font commands. - (line 63) + (line 52) * double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 76) * e-dash: Text symbols. (line 113) * ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 33) * em-dash: Text symbols. (line 110) * em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 163) * em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 169) -* emphasis: Font styles. (line 26) -* emphasis <1>: Font styles. (line 90) -* enclosure list: \encl. (line 5) -* ending & starting: Starting & ending. (line 5) -* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 5) -* environments: Environments. (line 5) +* emphasis: Font styles. (line 27) +* emphasis <1>: Font styles. (line 80) +* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6) +* ending & starting: Starting & ending. (line 6) +* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6) +* environments: Environments. (line 6) * environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 5) -* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 5) -* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 19) -* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 5) -* equations, environment for: equation. (line 5) + (line 6) +* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 29) +* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6) +* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6) * es-zet German letter: Non-English characters. (line 47) * eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters. @@ -6022,329 +6001,343 @@ Concept Index * euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 116) * exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 119) * exponent: Subscripts & superscripts. - (line 5) + (line 6) * feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 132) -* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 5) -* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 20) -* figures, inserting: figure. (line 5) -* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 108) -* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 5) +* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 21) +* figures, inserting: figure. (line 6) +* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 98) +* 'float' package: figure. (line 34) +* 'float' package <1>: figure. (line 38) +* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 6) * font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands. - (line 5) -* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 5) -* font styles: Font styles. (line 5) -* fonts: Typefaces. (line 5) -* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 5) -* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 5) + (line 6) +* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 6) +* font styles: Font styles. (line 6) +* fonts: Typefaces. (line 6) +* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6) +* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6) * footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters. - (line 5) -* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 5) -* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. (line 5) -* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 20) -* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 5) + (line 6) +* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6) +* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. (line 6) +* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 21) +* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6) * footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: Symbolic footnotes. - (line 5) -* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 5) -* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 5) -* fragile commands: \protect. (line 5) + (line 6) +* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 6) +* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 6) +* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6) * French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 27) -* functions, math: Math functions. (line 5) +* functions, math: Math functions. (line 6) * global options: Document class options. - (line 5) + (line 6) * global options <1>: Document class options. - (line 80) -* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 5) + (line 76) +* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6) * grave accent: Accents. (line 37) * grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 29) * greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 122) -* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 5) +* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6) * ha'c email address: About this document. - (line 11) -* @{...}: array. (line 30) -* [...] for optional arguments: Overview. (line 50) -* \ character starting commands: Overview. (line 50) + (line 14) +* @{...}: array. (line 29) +* [...] for optional arguments: Overview. (line 51) +* \ character starting commands: Overview. (line 51) * \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 16) -* \#: Reserved characters. (line 10) -* \$: Reserved characters. (line 10) -* \%: Reserved characters. (line 10) -* \&: Reserved characters. (line 10) +* \#: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \$: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \%: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \&: Reserved characters. (line 11) * \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 20) * \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 45) -* \(: Math formulas. (line 17) -* \): Math formulas. (line 17) +* \(: Math formulas. (line 16) +* \): Math formulas. (line 16) * \*: Math miscellany. (line 6) * \+: tabbing. (line 37) * \,: Spacing in math mode. - (line 19) + (line 17) * \-: tabbing. (line 41) -* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 5) +* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6) * \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 25) -* \/: \/. (line 5) +* \/: \/. (line 6) * \:: Spacing in math mode. - (line 16) + (line 15) * \;: Spacing in math mode. (line 12) * \<: tabbing. (line 33) @@ -6398,10 +6389,10 @@ Command Index * \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 27) * \>: tabbing. (line 31) * \> <1>: Spacing in math mode. - (line 16) + (line 15) * \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 30) -* \@: \AT. (line 5) -* \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes. (line 10) +* \@: \AT. (line 6) +* \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes. (line 11) * \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 60) * \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61) * \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61) @@ -6410,12 +6401,12 @@ Command Index * \AA (AA): Non-English characters. (line 11) * \acute: Math accents. (line 10) -* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 5) -* \address: \address. (line 5) -* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 5) -* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 5) -* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 5) -* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 5) +* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 6) +* \address: \address. (line 6) +* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 6) +* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6) +* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6) +* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6) * \ae (ae): Non-English characters. (line 15) * \AE (AE): Non-English characters. @@ -6425,13 +6416,13 @@ Command Index (line 9) * \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. (line 12) -* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 41) +* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 39) * \alpha: Math symbols. (line 17) -* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 19) +* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 20) * \amalg: Math symbols. (line 20) -* \and for `\author': \maketitle. (line 12) +* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 12) * \angle: Math symbols. (line 23) -* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 43) +* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 37) * \approx: Math symbols. (line 26) * \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. (line 15) @@ -6439,28 +6430,28 @@ Command Index * \arcsin: Math functions. (line 12) * \arctan: Math functions. (line 15) * \arg: Math functions. (line 18) -* \arraycolsep: array. (line 42) -* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 96) -* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 100) +* \arraycolsep: array. (line 41) +* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 100) +* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 104) * \ast: Math symbols. (line 29) * \asymp: Math symbols. (line 32) * \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 11) * \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61) * \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 46) * \backslash: Math symbols. (line 35) -* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. (line 15) +* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. (line 16) * \bar: Math accents. (line 13) * \baselineskip: Low-level font commands. - (line 57) + (line 46) * \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands. - (line 63) -* \begin: Environments. (line 5) + (line 52) +* \begin: Environments. (line 6) * \beta: Math symbols. (line 38) -* \bf: Font styles. (line 83) -* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 32) -* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 5) -* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 5) -* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 5) +* \bf: Font styles. (line 73) +* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 33) +* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6) +* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6) +* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6) * \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 41) * \bigcap <1>: Math symbols. (line 71) * \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 44) @@ -6478,15 +6469,16 @@ Command Index * \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 68) * \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 74) * \bmod: Math functions. (line 21) -* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 30) +* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 29) * \bot: Math symbols. (line 77) -* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 54) +* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 67) +* \bottomnumber: figure. (line 100) * \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 80) * \Box: Math symbols. (line 83) * \breve: Math accents. (line 16) * \bullet: Math symbols. (line 86) * \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 50) -* \cal: Font styles. (line 86) +* \cal: Font styles. (line 76) * \cap: Math symbols. (line 89) * \capitalacute: Accents. (line 20) * \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 85) @@ -6503,27 +6495,27 @@ Command Index * \capitalring: Accents. (line 74) * \capitaltie: Accents. (line 80) * \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 43) -* \caption: figure. (line 49) -* \cc: \cc. (line 5) +* \caption: figure. (line 60) +* \cc: \cc. (line 6) * \cdot: Math symbols. (line 92) * \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 10) -* \centering: \centering. (line 5) -* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 10) +* \centering: \centering. (line 6) +* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 9) * \check: Math accents. (line 19) * \chi: Math symbols. (line 95) * \circ: Math symbols. (line 98) -* \circle: \circle. (line 5) -* \cite: \cite. (line 5) -* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 5) -* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 5) -* \cline: \cline. (line 5) -* \closing: \closing. (line 5) +* \circle: \circle. (line 6) +* \cite: \cite. (line 6) +* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6) +* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6) +* \cline: \cline. (line 6) +* \closing: \closing. (line 6) * \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 101) * \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 16) * \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 19) * \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 23) * \cong: Math symbols. (line 104) -* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 30) +* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 29) * \coprod: Math symbols. (line 107) * \copyright: Text symbols. (line 10) * \cos: Math functions. (line 24) @@ -6535,10 +6527,10 @@ Command Index * \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 54) * \dag: Text symbols. (line 14) * \dagger: Math symbols. (line 113) -* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 5) +* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6) * \dashv: Math symbols. (line 116) * \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 17) -* \day: \day \month \year. (line 5) +* \day: \day \month \year. (line 6) * \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 34) * \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 38) * \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 43) @@ -6560,77 +6552,78 @@ Command Index * \diamond: Math symbols. (line 131) * \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 134) * \dim: Math functions. (line 45) -* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 35) +* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 34) * \div: Math symbols. (line 137) * \dj: Non-English characters. (line 23) * \DJ: Non-English characters. (line 23) -* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 5) +* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6) * \dot: Math accents. (line 25) * \doteq: Math symbols. (line 140) -* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 5) +* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6) * \dots: Text symbols. (line 31) -* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 104) +* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 108) * \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 143) * \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 146) * \ell: Math symbols. (line 149) -* \em: Font styles. (line 89) -* \emph: Font styles. (line 26) +* \em: Font styles. (line 79) +* \emph: Font styles. (line 27) * \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 152) -* \encl: \encl. (line 5) -* \end: Environments. (line 5) -* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 5) -* \enumi: enumerate. (line 31) -* \enumii: enumerate. (line 31) -* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 31) -* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 31) +* \encl: \encl. (line 6) +* \end: Environments. (line 6) +* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6) +* \enumi: enumerate. (line 29) +* \enumii: enumerate. (line 29) +* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 29) +* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 29) * \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 155) * \equiv: Math symbols. (line 158) * \eta: Math symbols. (line 161) * \evensidemargin: Document class options. - (line 55) + (line 50) * \exists: Math symbols. (line 164) * \exp: Math functions. (line 48) -* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. (line 5) -* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 13) -* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 17) -* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 13) -* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 17) -* \fill: \hfill. (line 8) +* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 71) +* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6) +* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 14) +* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 18) +* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 14) +* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 18) +* \fill: \hfill. (line 9) * \flat: Math symbols. (line 167) -* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 57) -* \floatsep: figure. (line 61) -* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 5) +* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 70) +* \floatsep: figure. (line 85) +* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6) * \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. (line 24) -* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes. (line 10) +* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes. (line 11) * \fontencoding: Low-level font commands. (line 11) * \fontfamily: Low-level font commands. (line 14) * \fontseries: Low-level font commands. - (line 25) + (line 23) * \fontshape: Low-level font commands. - (line 40) + (line 34) * \fontsize: Low-level font commands. - (line 57) -* \footnote: \footnote. (line 5) -* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 5) + (line 46) +* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6) +* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6) * \footnoterule: Footnote parameters. (line 6) * \footnotesep: Footnote parameters. (line 12) -* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 10) -* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 5) +* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6) * \footskip: Page layout parameters. (line 16) * \forall: Math symbols. (line 170) * \frac: Math miscellany. (line 18) * \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 17) -* \frame: \frame. (line 5) -* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 5) -* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 5) +* \frame: \frame. (line 6) +* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6) +* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6) * \frown: Math symbols. (line 173) -* \fussy: \fussy. (line 5) +* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6) * \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 176) * \gamma: Math symbols. (line 179) * \gcd: Math functions. (line 51) @@ -6638,8 +6631,8 @@ Command Index * \geq: Math symbols. (line 185) * \gets: Math symbols. (line 188) * \gg: Math symbols. (line 191) -* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 7) -* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 10) +* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 8) +* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 11) * \grave: Math accents. (line 28) * \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 23) * \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 24) @@ -6654,18 +6647,18 @@ Command Index (line 11) * \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 197) * \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8) -* \hfill: \hfill. (line 5) -* \hline: \hline. (line 5) +* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6) +* \hline: \hline. (line 6) * \hom: Math functions. (line 54) * \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 200) * \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 203) -* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 5) +* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6) * \hsize: Page layout parameters. (line 56) -* \hspace: \hspace. (line 5) -* \huge: Font sizes. (line 10) -* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 10) -* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 5) +* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6) +* \huge: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6) * \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 62) * \iff: Math symbols. (line 206) * \ij (ij): Non-English characters. @@ -6675,24 +6668,24 @@ Command Index * \Im: Math symbols. (line 209) * \imath: Math accents. (line 34) * \in: Math symbols. (line 212) -* \include: \include. (line 5) -* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 5) -* \indent: \indent. (line 5) -* \index: Indexes. (line 8) -* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 11) +* \include: \include. (line 6) +* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6) +* \indent: \indent. (line 6) +* \index: Indexes. (line 9) +* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 12) * \inf: Math functions. (line 57) * \infty: Math symbols. (line 215) -* \input: \input. (line 5) +* \input: \input. (line 6) * \int: Math symbols. (line 218) -* \intextsep: figure. (line 65) +* \intextsep: figure. (line 89) * \iota: Math symbols. (line 221) -* \it: Font styles. (line 92) -* \item: description. (line 13) -* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 18) -* \item <2>: itemize. (line 5) -* \itemindent: itemize. (line 52) -* \itemsep: itemize. (line 74) -* \itshape: Font styles. (line 23) +* \it: Font styles. (line 82) +* \item: description. (line 14) +* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 19) +* \item <2>: itemize. (line 6) +* \itemindent: itemize. (line 49) +* \itemsep: itemize. (line 71) +* \itshape: Font styles. (line 24) * \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 65) * \jmath: Math accents. (line 37) * \Join: Math symbols. (line 224) @@ -6704,24 +6697,24 @@ Command Index (line 31) * \L (/L): Non-English characters. (line 31) -* \label: \label. (line 5) -* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 35) -* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 35) -* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 35) -* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 35) -* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 31) -* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 31) -* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 31) -* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 31) -* \labelsep: itemize. (line 55) -* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 58) +* \label: \label. (line 6) +* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 33) +* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 33) +* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 33) +* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 33) +* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 29) +* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 29) +* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 29) +* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 29) +* \labelsep: itemize. (line 52) +* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 55) * \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 230) * \lambda: Math symbols. (line 233) * \land: Math symbols. (line 236) * \langle: Math symbols. (line 239) -* \large: Font sizes. (line 10) -* \Large: Font sizes. (line 10) -* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 10) +* \large: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11) * \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 20) * \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 242) * \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 245) @@ -6732,16 +6725,16 @@ Command Index * \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 20) * \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 256) * \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 259) -* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 24) +* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 34) * \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 262) * \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 265) -* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 38) -* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 38) -* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 38) -* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 38) -* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 38) -* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 38) -* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 38) +* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 36) +* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 36) +* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 36) +* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 36) +* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 36) +* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 36) +* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 36) * \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 268) * \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 271) * \leq: Math symbols. (line 274) @@ -6751,21 +6744,21 @@ Command Index * \lim: Math functions. (line 66) * \liminf: Math functions. (line 69) * \limsup: Math functions. (line 72) -* \line: \line. (line 5) +* \line: \line. (line 6) * \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. - (line 5) + (line 6) * \linespread: Low-level font commands. - (line 70) -* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 5) + (line 59) +* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6) * \linewidth: Page layout parameters. (line 21) -* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 15) -* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 15) -* \listparindent: itemize. (line 61) +* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 16) +* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 16) +* \listparindent: itemize. (line 58) * \ll: Math symbols. (line 283) * \ln: Math functions. (line 75) * \lnot: Math symbols. (line 286) -* \location: \location. (line 5) +* \location: \location. (line 6) * \log: Math functions. (line 78) * \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 289) * \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 292) @@ -6773,29 +6766,30 @@ Command Index * \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 298) * \lor: Math symbols. (line 301) * \lq: Text symbols. (line 36) -* \makebox: \makebox. (line 5) -* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 5) -* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 5) -* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 5) -* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 5) -* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 5) +* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6) +* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6) +* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6) +* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6) +* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6) +* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6) * \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 304) -* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 5) -* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 35) -* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 39) -* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 43) +* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6) +* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 33) +* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 37) +* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 41) * \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 29) * \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 36) -* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 56) -* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 72) -* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 69) -* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 53) -* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 59) -* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 62) -* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 74) +* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 49) +* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 62) +* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 60) +* \mathring: Math accents. (line 40) +* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 47) +* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 51) +* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 53) +* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 64) * \max: Math functions. (line 81) -* \mbox: \mbox. (line 5) -* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 29) +* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6) +* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 30) * \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. (line 13) * \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. @@ -6804,47 +6798,47 @@ Command Index * \mid: Math symbols. (line 309) * \min: Math functions. (line 84) * \models: Math symbols. (line 312) -* \month: \day \month \year. (line 5) +* \month: \day \month \year. (line 6) * \mp: Math symbols. (line 315) * \mu: Math symbols. (line 318) -* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 5) -* \multiput: \multiput. (line 5) +* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6) +* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6) * \nabla: Math symbols. (line 321) -* \name: \name. (line 5) +* \name: \name. (line 6) * \natural: Math symbols. (line 324) * \ne: Math symbols. (line 327) * \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 330) * \neg: Math symbols. (line 333) * \neq: Math symbols. (line 336) * \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand. - (line 5) -* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 5) + (line 6) +* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6) * \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 5) -* \newfont: \newfont. (line 5) -* \newlength: \newlength. (line 5) -* \newline: \newline. (line 5) -* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 5) -* \newpage: \newpage. (line 5) -* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 5) -* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 5) + (line 6) +* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6) +* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6) +* \newline: \newline. (line 6) +* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 6) +* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6) +* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6) +* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6) * \newtie: Accents. (line 80) * \ng: Non-English characters. (line 35) * \NG: Non-English characters. (line 35) * \ni: Math symbols. (line 339) -* \nocite: \nocite. (line 5) -* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 19) -* \noindent: \noindent. (line 5) +* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6) +* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 20) +* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6) * \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak. - (line 5) -* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 19) + (line 6) +* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 29) * \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. - (line 5) -* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 50) -* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22) -* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 10) + (line 6) +* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 45) +* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 21) +* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11) * \not: Math symbols. (line 342) * \notin: Math symbols. (line 345) * \nu: Math symbols. (line 348) @@ -6854,9 +6848,9 @@ Command Index * \O (/O): Non-English characters. (line 39) * \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr. - (line 5) + (line 6) * \oddsidemargin: Document class options. - (line 55) + (line 50) * \odot: Math symbols. (line 354) * \oe (oe): Non-English characters. (line 43) @@ -6866,32 +6860,32 @@ Command Index * \Omega: Math symbols. (line 360) * \omega: Math symbols. (line 363) * \ominus: Math symbols. (line 366) -* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 5) -* \opening: \opening. (line 5) +* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6) +* \opening: \opening. (line 6) * \oplus: Math symbols. (line 369) * \oslash: Math symbols. (line 372) * \otimes: Math symbols. (line 375) -* \oval: \oval. (line 5) +* \oval: \oval. (line 6) * \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 25) * \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 29) * \owns: Math symbols. (line 378) * \P: Text symbols. (line 39) * \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak. - (line 5) -* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 5) -* \pageref: \pageref. (line 5) -* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 5) -* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 19) + (line 6) +* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6) +* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6) +* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6) +* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 14) * \parallel: Math symbols. (line 381) -* \parbox: \parbox. (line 5) -* \parindent: minipage. (line 16) -* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 5) -* \parsep: itemize. (line 79) -* \parskip: \parskip. (line 5) -* \parskip example: itemize. (line 94) +* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6) +* \parindent: minipage. (line 17) +* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 6) +* \parsep: itemize. (line 76) +* \parskip: \parskip. (line 6) +* \parskip example: itemize. (line 92) * \part: Sectioning. (line 8) * \partial: Math symbols. (line 384) -* \partopsep: itemize. (line 89) +* \partopsep: itemize. (line 86) * \perp: Math symbols. (line 387) * \phi: Math symbols. (line 390) * \Pi: Math symbols. (line 393) @@ -6907,31 +6901,31 @@ Command Index * \prime: Math symbols. (line 408) * \prod: Math symbols. (line 411) * \propto: Math symbols. (line 414) -* \protect: \protect. (line 5) -* \ps: \ps. (line 5) +* \protect: \protect. (line 6) +* \ps: \ps. (line 6) * \Psi: Math symbols. (line 417) * \psi: Math symbols. (line 420) * \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 74) -* \put: \put. (line 5) +* \put: \put. (line 6) * \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 47) * \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 48) * \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 74) -* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 5) -* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 5) -* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 5) -* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 5) +* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6) +* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6) +* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6) +* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6) * \rangle: Math symbols. (line 423) * \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 426) * \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 429) * \rceil: Math symbols. (line 432) * \Re: Math symbols. (line 435) -* \ref: \ref. (line 5) -* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 5) +* \ref: \ref. (line 6) +* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6) * \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment. - (line 5) + (line 6) * \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr. - (line 5) -* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22) + (line 6) +* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 21) * \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 438) * \rhd: Math symbols. (line 441) * \rho: Math symbols. (line 444) @@ -6941,54 +6935,54 @@ Command Index * \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 453) * \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 456) * \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 459) -* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 65) -* \rm: Font styles. (line 95) -* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 20) +* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 62) +* \rm: Font styles. (line 85) +* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 21) * \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. (line 18) * \roman <1>: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. (line 21) * \rq: Text symbols. (line 51) -* \rule: \rule. (line 5) +* \rule: \rule. (line 6) * \S: Text symbols. (line 54) -* \savebox: \savebox. (line 5) -* \sbox: \sbox. (line 5) -* \sc: Font styles. (line 98) -* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 10) -* \scshape: Font styles. (line 44) +* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6) +* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6) +* \sc: Font styles. (line 88) +* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11) +* \scshape: Font styles. (line 41) * \searrow: Math symbols. (line 462) * \sec: Math functions. (line 93) -* \section: Sectioning. (line 13) -* \seename: Indexes. (line 19) +* \section: Sectioning. (line 11) +* \seename: Indexes. (line 20) * \selectfont: Low-level font commands. - (line 76) -* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 5) -* \setlength: \setlength. (line 5) + (line 65) +* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6) +* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6) * \setminus: Math symbols. (line 465) -* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 5) -* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 5) -* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 5) -* \sf: Font styles. (line 101) -* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 41) +* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6) +* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6) +* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6) +* \sf: Font styles. (line 91) +* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 39) * \sharp: Math symbols. (line 468) -* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 5) +* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6) * \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 471) * \sigma: Math symbols. (line 474) -* \signature: \signature. (line 5) +* \signature: \signature. (line 6) * \sim: Math symbols. (line 477) * \simeq: Math symbols. (line 480) * \sin: Math functions. (line 96) * \sinh: Math functions. (line 99) -* \sl: Font styles. (line 104) -* \slshape: Font styles. (line 38) -* \small: Font sizes. (line 10) +* \sl: Font styles. (line 94) +* \slshape: Font styles. (line 37) +* \small: Font sizes. (line 11) * \smallint: Math symbols. (line 483) * \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. (line 17) * \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip. (line 17) * \smile: Math symbols. (line 486) -* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 5) +* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 6) * \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 489) * \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 492) * \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 495) @@ -7003,15 +6997,15 @@ Command Index (line 47) * \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 38) * \star: Math symbols. (line 510) -* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 5) -* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 5) -* \stop: Command line. (line 14) -* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 5) -* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 21) -* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 15) +* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6) +* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6) +* \stop: Command line. (line 15) +* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6) +* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 15) +* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 12) * \subset: Math symbols. (line 513) * \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 516) -* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 17) +* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 13) * \succ: Math symbols. (line 519) * \succeq: Math symbols. (line 522) * \sum: Math symbols. (line 525) @@ -7020,16 +7014,16 @@ Command Index * \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 531) * \surd: Math symbols. (line 534) * \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 537) -* \symbol: Reserved characters. (line 24) +* \symbol: Reserved characters. (line 25) * \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 80) -* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 5) +* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 6) * \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 79) -* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 108) -* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 5) +* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 112) +* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 6) * \tan: Math functions. (line 105) * \tanh: Math functions. (line 108) * \tau: Math symbols. (line 540) -* \telephone: \telephone. (line 5) +* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6) * \TeX: Text symbols. (line 57) * \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 95) * \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 60) @@ -7038,7 +7032,7 @@ Command Index * \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 69) * \textbar: Text symbols. (line 72) * \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 75) -* \textbf: Font styles. (line 32) +* \textbf: Font styles. (line 33) * \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 78) * \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 81) * \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 84) @@ -7049,43 +7043,43 @@ Command Index * \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 11) * \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 100) * \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 103) -* \textdollar (or `$'): Text symbols. (line 106) +* \textdollar (or '$'): Text symbols. (line 106) * \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 32) -* \textemdash (or `---'): Text symbols. (line 109) -* \textendash (or `--'): Text symbols. (line 112) +* \textemdash (or '---'): Text symbols. (line 109) +* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 112) * \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 115) -* \textexclamdown (or `!`'): Text symbols. (line 118) -* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 70) +* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 118) +* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 94) * \textfraction: figure. (line 74) * \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 121) * \textheight: Page layout parameters. (line 29) -* \textit: Font styles. (line 23) +* \textit: Font styles. (line 24) * \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 127) * \textless: Text symbols. (line 124) -* \textmd: Font styles. (line 29) -* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 50) +* \textmd: Font styles. (line 30) +* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 45) * \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 130) * \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 131) * \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 40) * \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 134) -* \textquestiondown (or `?`'): Text symbols. (line 137) -* \textquotedblleft (or ```'): Text symbols. (line 140) -* \textquotedblright (or `''): Text symbols. (line 143) -* \textquoteleft (or ``'): Text symbols. (line 146) -* \textquoteright (or `''): Text symbols. (line 149) +* \textquestiondown (or '?`'): Text symbols. (line 137) +* \textquotedblleft (or '``'): Text symbols. (line 140) +* \textquotedblright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 143) +* \textquoteleft (or '`'): Text symbols. (line 146) +* \textquoteright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 149) * \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 152) * \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 153) * \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 156) * \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 159) -* \textrm: Font styles. (line 20) -* \textsc: Font styles. (line 44) -* \textsf: Font styles. (line 41) -* \textsl: Font styles. (line 38) +* \textrm: Font styles. (line 21) +* \textsc: Font styles. (line 41) +* \textsf: Font styles. (line 39) +* \textsl: Font styles. (line 37) * \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 44) * \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 162) * \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 165) -* \texttt: Font styles. (line 47) +* \texttt: Font styles. (line 43) * \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 168) * \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 171) * \textup: Font styles. (line 35) @@ -7098,38 +7092,40 @@ Command Index (line 51) * \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 21) * \theta: Math symbols. (line 543) -* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 5) -* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 5) -* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 5) -* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 5) -* \tilde: Math accents. (line 40) +* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6) +* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6) +* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 6) +* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6) +* \tilde: Math accents. (line 43) * \times: Math symbols. (line 546) -* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 10) +* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11) * \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 25) * \to: Math symbols. (line 549) -* \today: \today. (line 5) +* \today: \today. (line 6) * \top: Math symbols. (line 552) * \topfraction: figure. (line 79) * \topmargin: Page layout parameters. (line 60) -* \topsep: itemize. (line 83) +* \topnumber: figure. (line 104) +* \topsep: itemize. (line 80) * \topskip: Page layout parameters. (line 67) * \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12) +* \totalnumber: figure. (line 108) * \triangle: Math symbols. (line 555) * \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 558) * \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 561) -* \tt: Font styles. (line 107) -* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 47) -* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 5) -* \typein: \typein. (line 5) -* \typeout: \typeout. (line 5) +* \tt: Font styles. (line 97) +* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 43) +* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6) +* \typein: \typein. (line 6) +* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6) * \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 85) -* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 30) +* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 29) * \underbar: Accents. (line 88) * \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 42) * \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 45) -* \unitlength: picture. (line 9) +* \unitlength: picture. (line 10) * \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 564) * \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 567) * \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 570) @@ -7140,14 +7136,14 @@ Command Index * \upshape: Font styles. (line 35) * \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 585) * \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 588) -* \usebox: \usebox. (line 5) -* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 5) +* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6) +* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6) * \usefont: Low-level font commands. - (line 80) + (line 69) * \usepackage: Document class options. - (line 73) + (line 69) * \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 95) -* \value: \value. (line 5) +* \value: \value. (line 6) * \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 591) * \varphi: Math symbols. (line 594) * \varpi: Math symbols. (line 597) @@ -7157,349 +7153,351 @@ Command Index * \vdash: Math symbols. (line 609) * \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 50) * \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 51) -* \vec: Math accents. (line 43) -* \vector: \vector. (line 5) +* \vec: Math accents. (line 46) +* \vector: \vector. (line 6) * \vee: Math symbols. (line 612) -* \verb: \verb. (line 5) +* \verb: \verb. (line 6) * \Vert: Math symbols. (line 615) * \vert: Math symbols. (line 618) -* \vfill: \vfill. (line 5) -* \vline: \vline. (line 5) -* \vspace: \vspace. (line 5) +* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6) +* \vline: \vline. (line 6) +* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6) * \wedge: Math symbols. (line 621) -* \widehat: Math accents. (line 46) -* \widehat <1>: Math accents. (line 49) +* \widehat: Math accents. (line 49) +* \widehat <1>: Math accents. (line 52) * \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6) * \wp: Math symbols. (line 624) * \wr: Math symbols. (line 627) * \Xi: Math symbols. (line 630) * \xi: Math symbols. (line 633) -* \year: \day \month \year. (line 5) +* \year: \day \month \year. (line 6) * \zeta: Math symbols. (line 636) -* \[: Math formulas. (line 17) -* \\ (for `array'): array. (line 27) -* \\ (for `center'): center. (line 12) -* \\ (for `eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 11) -* \\ (for `flushright'): flushright. (line 11) -* \\ (for `\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 21) +* \[: Math formulas. (line 16) +* \\ (for 'array'): array. (line 26) +* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 13) +* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 21) +* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 12) +* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 20) * \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 24) -* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 31) -* \\ for `flushleft': flushleft. (line 11) -* \\ for `tabular': tabular. (line 22) -* \\ for `verse': verse. (line 16) -* \\ for `\author': \maketitle. (line 12) -* \\ for `\title': \maketitle. (line 26) -* \\ force line break: \\. (line 5) -* \\* (for `eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 16) -* \]: Math formulas. (line 17) -* \^: Reserved characters. (line 20) +* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 12) +* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 32) +* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 23) +* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 17) +* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 12) +* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 26) +* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6) +* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 26) +* \]: Math formulas. (line 16) +* \^: Reserved characters. (line 21) * \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 33) -* \_: Reserved characters. (line 10) +* \_: Reserved characters. (line 11) * \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 37) * \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 51) -* \{: Reserved characters. (line 10) +* \{: Reserved characters. (line 11) * \|: Math symbols. (line 11) -* \}: Reserved characters. (line 10) -* \~: Reserved characters. (line 20) +* \}: Reserved characters. (line 11) +* \~: Reserved characters. (line 21) * \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 43) * ^: Subscripts & superscripts. - (line 5) + (line 6) * _: Subscripts & superscripts. - (line 5) -* {...} for required arguments: Overview. (line 50) + (line 6) +* {...} for required arguments: Overview. (line 51) * a4paper option: Document class options. - (line 18) + (line 19) * a5paper option: Document class options. - (line 18) -* abstract environment: abstract. (line 5) -* array environment: array. (line 5) -* article class: Document classes. (line 12) + (line 19) +* abstract environment: abstract. (line 6) +* array environment: array. (line 6) +* article class: Document classes. (line 13) * b5paper option: Document class options. - (line 18) -* book class: Document classes. (line 12) -* center environment: center. (line 5) -* description environment: description. (line 5) -* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 5) -* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 5) -* document environment: document. (line 5) + (line 19) +* book class: Document classes. (line 13) +* center environment: center. (line 6) +* description environment: description. (line 6) +* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 6) +* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6) +* document environment: document. (line 6) * draft option: Document class options. - (line 23) -* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 5) -* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 5) -* equation environment: equation. (line 5) -* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 5) + (line 24) +* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6) +* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6) +* equation environment: equation. (line 6) +* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6) * executivepaper option: Document class options. - (line 18) -* figure: figure. (line 5) + (line 19) +* figure: figure. (line 6) * final option: Document class options. - (line 23) + (line 24) * fleqn option: Document class options. - (line 23) -* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 5) -* flushright environment: flushright. (line 5) -* indexspace: Indexes. (line 31) -* itemize environment: itemize. (line 5) + (line 24) +* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 6) +* flushright environment: flushright. (line 6) +* indexspace: Indexes. (line 32) +* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6) * landscape option: Document class options. - (line 23) + (line 24) * latex command: Overview. (line 18) +* email address: About this document. + (line 13) * legalpaper option: Document class options. - (line 18) + (line 19) * leqno option: Document class options. - (line 23) -* letter: letter. (line 5) -* letter class: Document classes. (line 12) + (line 24) +* letter: letter. (line 6) +* letter class: Document classes. (line 13) * letterpaper option: Document class options. - (line 18) -* list: list. (line 5) -* lR box: picture. (line 63) -* lrbox: lrbox. (line 5) + (line 19) +* list: list. (line 6) +* lR box: picture. (line 64) +* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6) * lualatex command: Overview. (line 32) -* math environment: math. (line 5) -* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 5) -* minipage environment: minipage. (line 5) +* math environment: math. (line 6) +* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6) +* minipage environment: minipage. (line 6) * notitlepage option: Document class options. - (line 23) + (line 24) * onecolumn option: Document class options. - (line 48) + (line 44) * oneside option: Document class options. - (line 48) + (line 44) * openany option: Document class options. - (line 48) + (line 44) * openbib option: Document class options. - (line 23) + (line 24) * openright option: Document class options. - (line 48) + (line 44) * pdflatex command: Overview. (line 26) -* picture: picture. (line 5) -* printindex: Indexes. (line 27) -* quotation: quotation. (line 5) -* quote: quote. (line 5) -* report class: Document classes. (line 12) -* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 53) -* slides class: Document classes. (line 12) -* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 5) -* table: table. (line 5) -* tabular environment: tabular. (line 5) -* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 5) -* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 5) -* theorem environment: theorem. (line 5) -* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 5) +* picture: picture. (line 6) +* printindex: Indexes. (line 28) +* quotation: quotation. (line 6) +* quote: quote. (line 6) +* report class: Document classes. (line 13) +* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 47) +* slides class: Document classes. (line 13) +* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6) +* table: table. (line 6) +* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6) +* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 6) +* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6) +* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6) +* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6) * titlepage option: Document class options. - (line 23) + (line 24) * twocolumn option: Document class options. - (line 48) + (line 44) * twoside option: Document class options. - (line 48) -* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 5) -* verse environment: verse. (line 5) + (line 44) +* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6) +* verse environment: verse. (line 6) * xelatex command: Overview. (line 35)  Tag Table: -Node: Top1670 -Node: About this document3524 -Node: Overview4418 -Node: Starting & ending6789 -Node: Document classes7351 -Node: Document class options7927 -Node: Typefaces10520 -Node: Font styles10962 -Node: Font sizes13287 -Node: Low-level font commands14521 -Node: Layout16986 -Node: \onecolumn17455 -Node: \twocolumn17668 -Node: \flushbottom19171 -Node: \raggedbottom19533 -Node: Page layout parameters19819 -Node: Sectioning22850 -Node: Cross references24398 -Node: \label24829 -Node: \pageref25694 -Node: \ref25993 -Node: Environments26383 -Node: abstract27839 -Node: array28080 -Node: center29411 -Node: \centering29888 -Node: description30728 -Node: displaymath31542 -Node: document32110 -Node: enumerate32367 -Node: eqnarray33659 -Node: equation34669 -Node: figure35042 -Node: flushleft37864 -Node: \raggedright38349 -Node: flushright38908 -Node: \raggedleft39396 -Node: itemize39953 -Node: letter43586 -Node: list43824 -Node: math44760 -Node: minipage45062 -Node: picture46254 -Node: \circle50252 -Node: \makebox (picture)50585 -Node: \framebox (picture)51280 -Node: \dashbox51770 -Node: \frame52299 -Node: \line52625 -Node: \linethickness53094 -Node: \thicklines53515 -Node: \thinlines53825 -Node: \multiput54127 -Node: \oval54493 -Node: \put55110 -Node: \shortstack55358 -Node: \vector55834 -Node: quotation56140 -Node: quote56596 -Node: tabbing57028 -Node: table60192 -Node: tabular61082 -Node: \multicolumn65007 -Node: \cline65804 -Node: \hline66124 -Node: \vline66438 -Node: thebibliography66751 -Node: \bibitem67893 -Node: \cite68624 -Node: \nocite69123 -Node: Using BibTeX69407 -Node: theorem70899 -Node: titlepage71285 -Node: verbatim71887 -Node: \verb72514 -Node: verse73064 -Node: Line breaking73558 -Node: \\74616 -Node: \obeycr & \restorecr75086 -Node: \newline75490 -Node: \- (hyphenation)75780 -Node: \fussy76390 -Node: \sloppy76783 -Node: \hyphenation77112 -Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak77739 -Node: Page breaking78393 -Node: \cleardoublepage79001 -Node: \clearpage79408 -Node: \newpage79684 -Node: \enlargethispage79919 -Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak80444 -Node: Footnotes81137 -Node: \footnote81755 -Node: \footnotemark82273 -Node: \footnotetext82839 -Node: Symbolic footnotes83324 -Node: Footnote parameters83881 -Node: Definitions84616 -Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand85331 -Node: \newcounter86545 -Node: \newlength87013 -Node: \newsavebox87525 -Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment87832 -Node: \newtheorem89098 -Node: \newfont90063 -Node: \protect90543 -Node: Counters91406 -Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol92649 -Node: \usecounter93694 -Node: \value94056 -Node: \setcounter94441 -Node: \addtocounter94732 -Node: \refstepcounter95028 -Node: \stepcounter95373 -Node: \day \month \year95624 -Node: Lengths96169 -Node: \setlength96738 -Node: \addtolength97080 -Node: \settodepth97375 -Node: \settoheight97650 -Node: \settowidth97929 -Node: Predefined lengths98193 -Node: Making paragraphs98703 -Node: \indent99275 -Node: \noindent99747 -Node: \parskip100033 -Node: Marginal notes100291 -Node: Math formulas101923 -Node: Subscripts & superscripts103707 -Node: Math symbols104174 -Node: Math functions110987 -Node: Math accents111930 -Node: Spacing in math mode112860 -Node: Math miscellany113494 -Node: Modes114992 -Node: Page styles116825 -Node: \maketitle117319 -Node: \pagenumbering118389 -Node: \pagestyle118806 -Node: \thispagestyle119946 -Node: Spaces120252 -Node: \hspace121312 -Node: \hfill121871 -Node: \SPACE122268 -Node: \AT122734 -Node: \thinspace123194 -Node: \/123453 -Node: \hrulefill124289 -Node: \dotfill124551 -Node: \addvspace124775 -Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip125267 -Node: \vfill125945 -Node: \vspace126250 -Node: Boxes126680 -Node: \mbox127399 -Node: \fbox and \framebox127686 -Node: lrbox128489 -Node: \makebox128806 -Node: \parbox129522 -Node: \raisebox130855 -Node: \savebox131452 -Node: \sbox131867 -Node: \usebox132316 -Node: Special insertions132574 -Node: Reserved characters133218 -Node: Text symbols134620 -Node: Accents137927 -Node: Non-English characters140400 -Node: \rule141071 -Node: \today141498 -Node: Splitting the input141943 -Node: \include142584 -Node: \includeonly143171 -Node: \input143662 -Node: Front/back matter144153 -Node: Tables of contents144358 -Node: \addcontentsline145386 -Node: \addtocontents146288 -Node: Glossaries146799 -Node: Indexes147318 -Node: Letters148945 -Node: \address150885 -Node: \cc151490 -Node: \closing151726 -Node: \encl151959 -Node: \location152151 -Node: \makelabels152413 -Node: \name152701 -Node: \opening152923 -Node: \ps153248 -Node: \signature153431 -Node: \startbreaks153714 -Node: \stopbreaks153936 -Node: \telephone154151 -Node: Terminal input/output154383 -Node: \typein154648 -Node: \typeout155229 -Node: Command line155852 -Node: Document templates156547 -Node: book template156938 -Node: beamer template157281 -Node: tugboat template157819 -Node: Concept Index159892 -Node: Command Index196069 +Node: Top1688 +Node: About this document3542 +Node: Overview4822 +Node: Starting & ending7194 +Node: Document classes7756 +Node: Document class options8332 +Node: Typefaces10920 +Node: Font styles11362 +Node: Font sizes13773 +Node: Low-level font commands15008 +Node: Layout17462 +Node: \onecolumn17931 +Node: \twocolumn18144 +Node: \flushbottom19648 +Node: \raggedbottom20010 +Node: Page layout parameters20296 +Node: Sectioning23327 +Node: Cross references24868 +Node: \label25299 +Node: \pageref26161 +Node: \ref26460 +Node: Environments26850 +Node: abstract28306 +Node: array28547 +Node: center29876 +Node: \centering30353 +Node: description31193 +Node: displaymath32007 +Node: document32575 +Node: enumerate32832 +Node: eqnarray34121 +Node: equation35511 +Node: figure35884 +Node: flushleft39705 +Node: \raggedright40190 +Node: flushright40749 +Node: \raggedleft41237 +Node: itemize41794 +Node: letter45425 +Node: list45663 +Node: math46600 +Node: minipage46902 +Node: picture48094 +Node: \circle52093 +Node: \makebox (picture)52426 +Node: \framebox (picture)53121 +Node: \dashbox53611 +Node: \frame54140 +Node: \line54466 +Node: \linethickness54935 +Node: \thicklines55356 +Node: \thinlines55666 +Node: \multiput55968 +Node: \oval56334 +Node: \put56948 +Node: \shortstack57195 +Node: \vector57669 +Node: quotation57975 +Node: quote58431 +Node: tabbing58863 +Node: table62029 +Node: tabular62919 +Node: \multicolumn67008 +Node: \cline67805 +Node: \hline68125 +Node: \vline68439 +Node: thebibliography68752 +Node: \bibitem69894 +Node: \cite70625 +Node: \nocite71124 +Node: Using BibTeX71408 +Node: theorem72900 +Node: titlepage73286 +Node: verbatim73888 +Node: \verb74515 +Node: verse75065 +Node: Line breaking75559 +Node: \\76617 +Node: \obeycr & \restorecr77087 +Node: \newline77491 +Node: \- (hyphenation)77781 +Node: \fussy78391 +Node: \sloppy78784 +Node: \hyphenation79113 +Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak79740 +Node: Page breaking80394 +Node: \cleardoublepage81002 +Node: \clearpage81409 +Node: \newpage81685 +Node: \enlargethispage81920 +Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak82447 +Node: Footnotes83141 +Node: \footnote83759 +Node: \footnotemark84277 +Node: \footnotetext84843 +Node: Symbolic footnotes85328 +Node: Footnote parameters85885 +Node: Definitions86620 +Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand87335 +Node: \newcounter88549 +Node: \newlength89017 +Node: \newsavebox89529 +Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment89836 +Node: \newtheorem91102 +Node: \newfont92068 +Node: \protect92548 +Node: Counters93411 +Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol94655 +Node: \usecounter95699 +Node: \value96061 +Node: \setcounter96446 +Node: \addtocounter96737 +Node: \refstepcounter97033 +Node: \stepcounter97378 +Node: \day \month \year97629 +Node: Lengths98174 +Node: \setlength98743 +Node: \addtolength99085 +Node: \settodepth99380 +Node: \settoheight99655 +Node: \settowidth99934 +Node: Predefined lengths100198 +Node: Making paragraphs100713 +Node: \indent101285 +Node: \noindent101757 +Node: \parskip102043 +Node: Marginal notes102301 +Node: Math formulas103931 +Node: Subscripts & superscripts105713 +Node: Math symbols106180 +Node: Math functions112993 +Node: Math accents113936 +Node: Spacing in math mode114906 +Node: Math miscellany115537 +Node: Modes117035 +Node: Page styles118866 +Node: \maketitle119360 +Node: \pagenumbering120430 +Node: \pagestyle120843 +Node: \thispagestyle121983 +Node: Spaces122289 +Node: \hspace123348 +Node: \hfill123907 +Node: \SPACE124304 +Node: \AT124770 +Node: \thinspace125227 +Node: \/125486 +Node: \hrulefill126323 +Node: \dotfill126585 +Node: \addvspace126809 +Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip127301 +Node: \vfill127979 +Node: \vspace128284 +Node: Boxes128714 +Node: \mbox129433 +Node: \fbox and \framebox129720 +Node: lrbox130523 +Node: \makebox130840 +Node: \parbox131553 +Node: \raisebox132882 +Node: \savebox133479 +Node: \sbox133894 +Node: \usebox134343 +Node: Special insertions134601 +Node: Reserved characters135245 +Node: Text symbols136648 +Node: Accents139955 +Node: Non-English characters142428 +Node: \rule143099 +Node: \today143526 +Node: Splitting the input143971 +Node: \include144612 +Node: \includeonly145199 +Node: \input145691 +Node: Front/back matter146182 +Node: Tables of contents146387 +Node: \addcontentsline147415 +Node: \addtocontents148315 +Node: Glossaries148826 +Node: Indexes149345 +Node: Letters150972 +Node: \address152913 +Node: \cc153518 +Node: \closing153754 +Node: \encl153987 +Node: \location154179 +Node: \makelabels154441 +Node: \name154730 +Node: \opening154952 +Node: \ps155277 +Node: \signature155460 +Node: \startbreaks155743 +Node: \stopbreaks155965 +Node: \telephone156180 +Node: Terminal input/output156412 +Node: \typein156677 +Node: \typeout157258 +Node: Command line157881 +Node: Document templates158576 +Node: book template158980 +Node: beamer template159323 +Node: tugboat template159862 +Node: Concept Index162012 +Node: Command Index198773  End Tag Table -- cgit v1.2.3